TRUBNER'S COLLECTION OF SIMPLIFIED GRAMMARS OP THE PRINCIPAL ASIATIC AND EUROPEAN LANGUAGES. EDITED BY REINHOLD ROST, LL.D., P H . D . IX. OTTOMAN TURKISH. BY J. W. REDHOUSE. TRUBNER'S COLLECTION OF SIMPLIFIED GRAMMARS OF THE PRINCIPAL ASIATIC AND EUROPEAN LANGUAGES. EDITED BY REINHOLD ROST, U J . D . , PH.D. I. HINDUSTANI, PERSIAN, AND ARABIC. BY MODERN GREEK. BY E. M. GELDABT, M.A. Price 2s. 6d. THE LATE E. H. PALMEE, M.A. Price 5s. VI. ROUMANIAN. BY R. TORCEANU. II. HUNGARIAN. BY Price 5s. VII. TIBETAN. I. SINGES. Price 4s. 6d. BY H. A. JASCHZE. Price 5s. III. BASQUE. BY VIII. DANISH. W. VAN EYS. Price 3s. 6d. BY E. C. OTTE. Price 3s. 6d. IV. MALAGASY. BY G. W. PABKEE. Price 5s. IX. OTTOMAN TURKISH. BY J. W. REDHOUSE. Price 10s. 6d, Grammars of the following are in preparation .— Albanese, Anglo-Saxon, Assyrian, Bohemian, Bulgarian, Burmese, Chinese, Cymric and Gaelic, Dutch, Egyptian, Finnish, Hebrew, Kurdish, Malay, Pali, Polish, Russian, Sanskrit, Serbian, Siamese, Singhalese, Swedish, &c, &c, &c. LONDON: TRUBNER & CO., LUDGATE H I L I . SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR OF THE OTTOMAN-TURKISH LANGUAGE. BY J. W. REDHOUSE, M.R.A.S., HON. MBMBER OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF LITERATURE LONDON: TRUBNER & CO., LUDGATE HILL. 1884. [All rights reserved.] LONDON: GILBERT AND RIVINGTON, LIMITED, BT. JOHN'S SQUARE, CLERKENWELL ROAD. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE Preface . . . . . Note on Identity of Alphabets . . . . CHAPTER . . . . . ix xii I. LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. SECTION I. Number, Order, Forms, and Names of Letters . . . . . . Synopsis of Arabic, Greek, and Letters „ 1 Latin . 4 I I . Phonetic Values of Letters, Vowel-Points, Orthographic Signs, Ottoman Euphony Transliteration, . . . . 15 CHAPTER II. OTTOMAN ACCIDENCE. SECTION I. Nouns Substantive „ I I . Nouns Adjective „ I I I . Numerals „ IV. Pronouns 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 . 74 . . 82 vi TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE SECTION V. Demonstratives „ V I . Interrogatives . . . . . . . . . . . 88 89 „ V I I . Relative Pronouns 90 „ V I I I . Derivation of Verbs 92 „ „ „ (Table) . . . 94 I X . Conjugation of Verbs ; Moods; Tenses ; Participles ; Verbal Nouns ; Gerunds . „ X. Numbers and Persons . . „ X I . Complex Categories of Verbs . „ X I I . First Complex Category . . . . . . 115 . . . 99 119 . . 120 „ X I I I . Second „ „ . 125 „ X I V . Third „ „ „ X V . Combined (Turkish) Conjugation . 133 „ X V I . Negative and Impotential Conjugations . 135 129 . „ X V I I . Dubitative, Potential, and Facile Verbs . 141 „ X V I I I . Verb Substantive 144 „ X I X . Verbs of Presence and Absence, Existence and Non-Existence . . . „ X X . Compound Verbs . . „ . X X I . Interrogative Verbs; Interrogation „ X X I I . Adverbial Expressions „ X X I I I . Prepositions . „ XXIV. Conjunctions „ X X V . Interjections . . . . . . . . . . 148 . . . 147 151 . 154 . 1 5 6 . . 156 157 TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER T H E OTTOMAN vii III. SYNTAX. PAGE SECTION I. Conversational writing. brevity. — Precision . . „ II. „ III. „ Adjectives „ IV. „ Numerals ,, V. „ Pronouns . „ VI. „ Verbs . Syntax of Substantives . . . . . . . . . 1 7 0 . 173 . . . 1 7 4 „ VII. „ the Participle VIII. „ the Verbal Nouns and Infinitive 179 „ IX. „ the Gerunds 181 ,, X. „ the Adverb „ XL „ the Preposition . „ XII. „ the Conjunction „ XIII. „ the Interjection . . . . . 168 „ Addendum, on suppressed letter j Index . . . . . . 158 . 1 6 1 . . . . . . . in . 178 . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 2 . 1 8 5 . . 184 . 191 . 1 9 3 195 ERRATA. PAGE o 10, 1. 22, for 16, 1. 18, after 24, 1. 15, 28, 1. 4, 29, for i. 2, 99 J» 1. 9, 1. 9, read X* k c 99 S J* &c. O x » vll OX r> oo oo o wl O u> » » Si + » • vis Jiae. - Xo » .Uafi - J * Ml 1. 10, o 5* J) 1. 16, 30, 1. 1, 31, 1. 19, 35, 1. 2, JJ 47, last line, » o fi - Jto,>e O bal 1 1) f/ '•^1 1 » O x J • 54, 1. 18, » 91, 1. 10, „ VIII....Verb „ I X . ...Conjugation, p. 100 124, last line, 127, first line, 154, 1. 3, 1. 7, In pp. 10—16 168, jr ox , J J> &!/ ) > o Ox O O, » add: » (See p. 73, 1. 4.) for (jf^lil^ > > > read > > L^^f 5 PREFACE. T H E Ottoman* Language, A>jJLiULc ismanlfja, is the most highly polished branch of the great Turkish tongue, which is spoken, with dialectic variations, across the whole breadth, nearly, of the middle region of the continent of Asia, impinging into Europe, even, in the Ottoman provinces, and also, in Southern Russia, up to the frontiers of the old kingdom of Poland. The Ottoman language is, in its grammar and vocabulary, fundamentally Turkish. I t has, however, adopted, and con- tinues more and more to adopt, as required, a vast number of Arabic, Persian, and foreign words (Greek, Armenian, Slavonic, Hungarian, Italian, French, English, & c ) , together with the use of a few of the grammatical rules of the Arabic and Persian, which are given as Turkish rules in the following pages, their origin being in each case specified. The great Turkish language, ^J turkje, Ottoman and non- Ottoman, has been classed by European writers as one of the " agglutinative" languages ; not inflecting its words, but X PREFACE. " glueing on," as it were, particles, " which were once independent words," to the root-words, and thus forming all the grammatical and derivative desinences in use. To my mind, this term "agglutinative" and its definition, are inapplicable to the Turkish language in general, and to the Ottoman Turkish in particular. These are, essentially and most truly, inflexional tongues ; none of their inflexions ever having been " independent words," but modifying particles only. The distinctive character of all the Turkish languages, or dialects, is that the root of a whole family, however numerous, of inflexions and derivations, is always recognizable at sight, seldom suffering any modification whatever, and always standing at the head of the inflexions or derivations, however complex in character these may be. When a modification of a root-word does take place, it is always of the simplest kind, always the softening of a hard or sharp consonant into the corresponding more liquid letter, and always of the final consonant only of the root. Thus, a o or t sometimes becomes a a, a j becomes a c, a sharp Arabic d becomes a soft Persian d , or the Ottoman modification of this latter, which is then pronounced like our most useful consonant y, or, in case of a dominant o or u vowel in the root, is pronounced like our consonant w. PREFACE. XI The Ottoman Turkish has more vowel-sounds (eleven in number) than any other tongue known to me. As each of these may have a short and a long modification, they make twenty-two possible vowels in all. Every one of these is distinguished by a special mark in the transliterations of the present treatise, though it is impossible to attempt any such differentiation in the Arabic characters to which the Ottoman language is wedded. The rules of euphony regulate the pronunciation of every word in the Ottoman language; perfectly, in all of Turkish origin; and as far as is practicable, in what is radically foreign. Although a compound word is a thing totally unknown to the Turkish dialects, and of very rare occurrence in Arabic, the Ottoman language abounds with such, adopted from the Aryan, compounding Persian. Persian grammarians and writers first learnt how to mould into a harmonious whole the incongruous Aryan Persian and Semitic Arabic elements. Ottoman ingenuity has gone a step further, and blended in one noble speech the three conflicting elements of the Aryan, Semitic and Turanian classes of vocables. Fault is found by some with this intermixture of idioms; xii PREFACE. but an Englishman, of all the world, will know how to appreciate a clever mosaic of diction; and a real student of the language will learn to admire many a true beauty, resulting from a masterly handling of the materials at his command, by any first-rate Ottoman literary celebrity, whether prosewriter or poet NOTE.—The manuscript of the present sketch Grammar was completed before Christmas, 1882, and copies of my table of identic alphabets have been in the hands of a few friends for the last four or five years. I have just had the pleasure and privilege of reading the admirable and exhaustive treatise on " The Alphabet," by the Rev. Isaac Taylor, and am rejoiced to find that he has come to the same conclusion as to the identity of the three; probably at an earlier date than the time, perhaps twenty years ago, when the idea began to force itself on my mind. I still feel inclined, however, to hold by the inference that the Phenicians gave the alphabet to Italy, quite independently of the Greek action which later on doubtlessly influenced the Italian culture. LONDON, September, 1883. J.W. R. OTTOMAN T U R K I S H GEAMMAE. CHAPTER I. T H E L E T T E R S AND ORTHOGRAPHY. SECTION I. The Number, Order, Forms, and Names of the Letters. T H E R E are thirty-one distinct letters used in the Ottoman language. Some of these have more than one value ; and four of them are sometimes consonants, sometimes vowels. There is also a combination of two letters into one character, 5) or V, la, which Arabian piety has agreed to count as a letter, and which Persian and Turkish conformity has had no option but to adopt. Thirty-two letters have, therefore, to be named and enumerated, as follows:— t ellf, v^ be, CJ pe, o te, & se, -. jlm, •. chlm, - ha, ~ khf, a d&l, j zel, j rl, j ze, j zhe, ^ sin, ^ shin, ^> sad, ^J> did, \o tl, ]e> zl, c 'ayn, c gayn, c i fe, j qaf, ci) kaf, J lam, ^ mlm, ^ nun, j w6v, 8 he, S lam-ellf, ^ ye. The foregoing is the ordinary arrangement of the letters of the Ottoman alphabet, as learnt and repeated by children; B 2 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. excepting that they are not at first taught to mention, or to know, either of the three Persian letters, L-> pe, ~ chlm, and J zhe, which are not contained in the Arabic alphabet, their sounds and values being unknown to, and unpronounceable by, an Arab. I t is called the ellf-be, &> uJM, i.e., the alphabet; and it might be conveniently styled the alphabet by forms; letters of the same form being brought together in it, more or less. There is another very different order necessary to be learnt of the twenty-nine Arabic letters. I t is called ebjed, j £ l , and is arranged in eight conventional words, as follows : jjssl ebjed, jyt hevwaz, Jaa> huttl, {L)J^ keleman, yahx* sa'f&s, oJ^S qarashat, °j£ sakhaz, l&iki dazagila. The letters of the Arabic alphabet, as arranged in this ebjed series, have each a numerical value. The first nine in order represent the nine units, 1 to 9 ; the second nine stand for the tens, also in order, 10 to 90 ; the third nine count as the hundreds, serially, 100 ,to 900 ; the twenty-eighth in the series, c , stands for 1000; and the last, V, though always enumerated, has no value of its own, but counts as the sum of the values of its two components, J 30, I 1; i. e., as 31. This system appears to have been in use in very early N times indeed. The order of the letters in it is that of the Hebrew alphabet, as far as this goes; that is, as far as the end of the sixth word qarashat, izJ*/, with which the Hebrew THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. alphabet terminates. 3 The letters of the two last words (omitting now all consideration of the factitious V) are Semitic inventions of a comparatively modern date, and are modifications, by means of dots, of letters, undotted or dotted, represented in the Hebrew alphabet. Thus, £> is modified from o , ± is from -., i from a, ^o from ^>, k from L>, and c from c . This may be called the numeral alphabet A circumstance that invests this ebjed arrangement with a European antiquarian interest of the very highest order, is the fact that it proves, beyond the remotest shadow of a doubt, the unity of origin of the Semitic (usually taken to be Phenician, but I imagine it to be much more ancient than Moses, or even Abraham), the Greek, and the Latin alphabets. Not only can the now divergent forms of each separate letter in the series be traced through successive modifications back to one ancient Phenician character, but the order of the whole series from I to o is absolutely identical in the Arabic (Hebrew, Phenician),. Greek, and Latin alphabets, as the following synopsis shows. An additional proof is furnished by the identity of the numeral values of the letters in the Arabic and Greek alphabets,—a method totally un^ known to the Latins, who must have had a method of their own, probably Etruscan, before they received their alphabet direct from the Phenicians, quite independently of the Greeks, and quite as early. 4 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Arabic. Greek. Num. Latin. i UJ A B C r j A 5 a E T Z H @ I K A M N U* A 3 j c ]» X The apparent discrepancies and vacancies occurring on comparison of the three alphabets and the series of numerals, are in reality additional proofs of their absolute identity. The two first letters call for no remark, though it is known to scholars that the Greek B has been degraded in Ramaic into a V, and the so-called modern Greek man is unable to pronounce a b, "writing it, when necessary, /JLTT. This combination in Greek words he reads and pronounces as though it were written yu/3. i The Hebrew system is identical with the Arabic is far as its alphabet goes. Thus: p 100, T 200, VJ 300, J1 400; beyonc this the words are written in full. This incident is a condemnation of t le Greek system for the higher numbers. THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. O The —, r , G, must originally have been a hard g. In modern Egyptian, as in Hebrew, and in Greek, it is so pronounced, though the rest of Arabia has softened it into the sound of our English j or soft g, and though the Latins hardened it, apparently, into a K value. The first serious remark is called for on our coming to the change made by both the Greeks and the Latins of the Semitic soft aspirate consonant s into their vowel E. It would almost seem as though the old Phenicians used that letter as a final vowel, exactly as is done by the Persians and Turks at present. A more remarkable divergency, in- explicable to me, but parallel to the foregoing conversion, is the change made by the Greeks of the Semitic hard aspirate consonant — into their long vowel H, rj, whereas the Latins preserved the letter as a consonant and as their sole aspirate, under the same written form as that used by the Greeks, H, h, and which was in reality the Phenician form of the letter. The next remark is as to the Latin F, which the Greekg long ago discarded from their alphabet, after having in the first instance adopted it in its Phenician form T, and used it to represent the numeral 6. they continued After discarding it as a letter, to use it as a numeral, though with a corrupted, cursive form, s-, to which they still, to this day, give the Phenician name of Bav, j\j waw, vav. The Latin modification of its sound, from a w or v to an / , is of no 6 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. importance. The Arabs of to-day, having no v letter or sound in their language, write the name of Her Majesty the Queen-Empress, Fiktoriya. As the Greek phonetic value of Z exactly corresponds to the Semitic power of j , their numeral value being identical, and the form of the Latin G being merely a modification, one is tempted to imagine that originally the Latin power of this letter was soft g, our j , perhaps even our z. Certain it is that in some dialects of Italian a z is used in words where a soft g is found in other dialects. The Greeks made the Semitic \> into their ® ; the Latins, having no such sound, discarded the letter. The Semitic ^ being both a consonant, like our y, and also a long vowel, 1, it followed, as a matter of course, that both Greeks and Latins should make it into the vowel L But the Latins preserved its consonantal use also as an initial; though they forgot, or never realized, that it is a consonant in that position. We now use a y to express that value; but the Germans have adopted the Latin modification j to represent it. Three western letters, », j , y, are now used for the one Semitic (j. The next four letters require no comment; but the Semitic U* of the eastern Arabs is not a good parallel for the Greek 3. The Hebrew letter D, that holds its place in the alphabet, is the equivalent of the Arabic ^>, and the western Arabs of Morocco transpose the ^ and ^ in their j £ \ 7 THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. alphabet, making the fifth word yah**, the letter ^ being the exact equivalent of the Hebrew % in place and in power. The ^ is a better representative of 3 than the , but the two sounds are still very remote from one another. I should be inclined to suggest that when the Greek alphabet was formed, the Semitic ^ by the ^p and the (j*». held the place afterwards taken The Greek 3 is an attempt to represent our value sh> as is seen in the name Xerxes, of which the old Persian was Khsharsha. The Latins dropped this letter, whichever it really was. The conversion of Semitic consonantal c into Greek and Latin vowel o is not unnatural. This letter c is absolutely unpronounceable by any other than a Semitic. I t is a kind of convulsion in the throat; and as the two aspirates were converted into vowels, so was this guttural. This was so much the more to be expected, as the Semitic letter I, which became Greek and Latin a, is also a guttural consonant, serving likewise as a long vowel on occasions. I t is the soft guttural, of which the c is the hard parallel; and an o may well be looked upon as a hard a. What the Arabians use as f, i j , is read in Hebrew, as in Greek and Latin, p. Even the Arabians, when they have to express a foreign letter, p, which they cannot pronounce, write and pronounce it as a b, or as f. The next letter, or JJ£, is dropped in both Greek and Latin. ^ I t appears never to have been used in Greek, even as a numeral; differing in 8 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. that respect from the T . When this latter was dropped as a letter, it was retained, modified, as a numeral. omitted letter ^ But the became the numeral o-a/zTrc, J^ representing 900 instead of 90. From this omission of the ^y> from its proper place in the Greek numerals, a slip of the whole subsequent series became necessary, so that each letter, from j , Q, Q, onwards, had a higher numeral value by one degree in the Semitic than its representative had in Greek; j standing for 100, while J *~»jj* hnrufa vwasliyye, and those which do not so join, ALSLO ^JJJ^ h4ru.fi. m4nfaslla. The latter, the less numerous class, a r e : I, a, i , j , J , J , j and O x O S O ' O x O x O x Ox O x V; eight in number ; thus, t-,1, C ^ , ~i, L-^, ^ J , Jflj, JJ, *V. X OX O^ Ox O X O'' x O «, O ^ All the others join, as b , ^ J , o * , <-*J , C*J, J , l**> s*^> V*"' Ox x O x O x O X O X Ox X O x O x OX O ^ x " Ox Ox > . , U , L-^i, LyA-O, C - f i , <£jfi>, Jo, W , <-*C > V-A9, C^S, <^S, J , ^ * , Ox „. ox J , U , L-*£ , &C. All the letters join on in writing to the character that precedes them (other than to the eight enumerated above) whether they be themselves finals or medials. - OX O x O x As finals their O X OX O ^ O^ forms are as follows : b , c - ^ , e^a., c » , c*«*», J*, ^ , ^*»» Ox Ox OX Ox Ox °£xx OX O^ O-' Jo, J ^ , ^ , ^ 9 , J i , J 3 , ^ j j , ^ j i * , Ox C Ox Ox Ox Ox J x U x O -" O x O xx Oxx oxx Ox xx L-ftJ, jj»., <<*U, J&>, **», ^ j ^ , A-O, J o , JU?. are figured thus: v^b, v-***., j * , ^ , °~ • Cx Ox tf,u^,l»,lij.,gjgi O" " -.. , As medials they O xx xx x x ° ** S Js&, ^ j U°, W**, <_*£", 1 It having been found impracticable to mark in type the varying Ottoman tone-values of the Arabian and Persian long vowels, the student must learn to supply the numbers 1 and 2 over the long-vowel marks. For this purpose, he must apply the rules for the short vowels, according as they follow, or are followed by, a consonant of tbe soft or hard class. By practice, the correct habit will be thus acquired; the case of the short vowels teaching the tone, which will then be instinctively used when the vowel is long. 10 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. O O *» OC*» O O/ O O *• OO - OO/ O O «• O O *» 0<*#» 0 XX O ^T 0 * J ? , ^.Ifi , ^J^aS , ^* , C£A*J , 6 J W , ^>iL* , J£. Those which do not join are, as O x medials, thus written: OO/ OO/ O xx O C /OJ-/ O O* C u-A?, ^ J A , J j j , !^9, *)»>, 8^*£, ^>y>, ji. Longer combinations vary, ad infinitum, as follows : KZJ>J> , 0 ' . *' o ^ < ~ o if* j o J * 0 «•#•> o 9 *< -5 'y^ /o/o j •> o O/oo -» u J L c , H ^ ' J k - j l o , ^ X j k l i l o , J * ^ > ^ * * > Ali^jJjl, d i J / ^ j j o 0^0 * *• ' ' * - ( ^ ^ a u ^ t , AJUUob , &C. Besides the simple names of the letters hitherto mentioned, most of the characters have other, more complicated appellations. /O/ The 1 is usually called hemze, *}+&, when a consonant, in an Arabic word ; and ellfl memdude, i±jX+* u-all, prolonged I, when it is a long vowel, initial or medial. I t can never be a long final vowel in an Arabic word, being then always followed by another consonant hemze ; as, At* sha'&, l\j>. jeza'A, &c. final. It is called ellfl m£qsure, call, shortened I, when I t is then more commonly written ^ Arabic; but by no means always so. in classical In Persian and Turkish, or foreign words, the 1 is always a vowel, but is called indifferently elif and hemze. I t is always long in Persian words, when medial or final. When initial in a Persian word, it may be short or long. When a long initial, it is distin- guished, as in Arabic, by the sign medd, ^ (") over it, as : A. w=JT afet, P . LJ\ ab. When a short initial, it is, in Arabic, generally a consonant, and may take the sound 'a or 'e, of '1, THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. or of 'u. 11 When a short initial in Persian, it is a vowel, and may have any one of the three values 4 or e> 1, u. The details of the powers of I in Turkish words are given further on. The L-J is distinguished from the other letters of the same isolated form by being called t±>j+ ^ (ba'l muv&hh&de), the o * *oJ single-dotted c-> ; as the o is named O I J U gl> (ta'l musnat), the double-dotted o , and the & is designated A*k* glj (sa'l m i sellese), the triply-dotted e*. The o is further distinguished from the L>, also named tk9 IL, by being called c ^ S *U (ta'l q&r&shlt), the o of (the word) t = ^ - 9 ; while k is named ^ » sl£> (ta'l hutti), the L o / (the word^JLL. Again, the o is distinguished, as a medial or initial, from the <_$, then identical in form with it, by being called a j y o l i L (musnatl fevqiyye), superiorly double-dotted; whereas the ^ is then termed A J I ^ oUi* (musnatl tdhtanlyye), inferiorly double- dotted. The ^ is also called jsJ & (ea'l sdkh&z), ^ e ti> 0 / js?. > t The t-j might be called ±g\ s\t (ba'l ebjed), the L-> O/ ±&\; but I do not recollect the expression. I t is, however, distin- guished from the Persian LJ by being designated *~-\JZ fb (ba'l c arabiyye), *fo Arabian <_>, the t^ being called *u-^U ^ (ba'l farislyye), and a-*sP * (ba'l 'ajitmiyye), the Persian t j . G The simple name of the -j., +*?» jim, sufficiently distinguishes the letter from all other Arabic characters. no other designation in purely Arabic works. It has, therefore, I t is, however, 12 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. distinguished from the Persian — by their being styled respectively i+jjs. ++>> (jIml e areblyye), and 6~»j* ^ or ju»gp ^ (jiml farlslyye), (jiml 'ajdmlyye). The — and ± are distinguished from one another by the terms ,»Qtt 5U. (ha'l mfthmele) neglected (undotted) —, and &+*?* ell (kha'l mu jeme) distinguished (dotted) £ , respectively. In Persian they are often called JaLlo &U (ha'l bi-nuqta) dotless _ , and^bdu^ii^ll (kha'l nuqtd-dar) dot-possessing (dotted) ±. These two pairs of Arabic and Persian adjectives go all through the alphabet, in the cases where a dot is the sole distinction between two letters of the same form; as, A* ^ Jta (dall nruhmel£) ^ ; &*s?* J l i (zall mujeme) j . So also the distinctions by the words of the " numeral alphabet;" as, **} J b (dall ebjed), i±? J l i (zall sakhaz), i ; e>^3 ^ (ra'l qar&sh&t)^ ; jja> gU (za'i hevvez) ; ; & c ; AI^O tyc*> (sinl mnhmele), ^ ; , AI^=U. When these two values of the one letter d passed into use for the Ottoman language, a new mode of distinguishing the Persian from the Arabian variety was introduced. It con- 14 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. sisted of placing three dots over the Arabian form of the d, together with a single dash in non-final positions; thus: d, j £ °^ \* J*J> , di-»; thus marking the Persian hard g value of the letter. But this letter, so differentiated in Persian writing, received in Ottoman Turkish a third value, that of our consonantal y, as a softened variety of its Persian value of hard g. This Ottoman value never occurs elsewhere than at the end, or in the middle of a word ; as : d> (bey), d*£j (beyanmek), ^ K j (ylylrml), di»J/ol (lyranmek). In the middle of a word it may begin or end a syllable : be-yan-mek, ly-ran-mek. When this letter follows a u vowel, and is itself followed by yJ an e vowel, it glides into the value of our w; as A_5^ (suwe), &c. In Turkish, the d, retaining the same form, received another value still, the fourth; being then for distinction's sake, called surd &, ^j> J^> (saghir nun) ; as in dl (en), is never initial. This value When medial, it may begin, and may also end a syllable, as it ends many words. The three dots over the d, mentioned in the preceding paragraph, are used by some to designate this Turkish value of surd ^ ; and at other times a single dot is used for that purpose, leaving the three dots to mark the Persian value of the letter. These varying 15 THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. values of the ts) constitute a serious difficulty in learning to read Ottoman Turkish. Surd ^ is here transliterated n. A similar variation in the phonetic value of the Arabic letter c. is to be observed in Ottoman Turkish words. Originally it is, in an Ottoman mouth, a simple hard g ; as : i l l l i (gallb), CJX\ (agleb), i l j i i - I (maglub). In Turkish words it has a softened value, very much like that of our gh, but still more softened, even to the point of practically disappearing from the pronunciation; as : cl_L (dagb, almost daw), ttUlL (daghffi, almost da'in), i l L (dagha, da'a), ^ l t (daghi, dM), ^ i l l L (d&'dan), oill* (da'di), &c. When preceded by an o or u vowel, the c , in Turkish words, if followed by a vowel, glides into the value of our w, even as our own gh O ^ J does in the word throughout (pronounced thruwoui); a s : ^\s.Jo O «• O J J J (dowHn), ^Uj-d (s6w&n), j j ^ j i (qowush); or it nearly disO J JO appears in pronunciation, as before ; thus : Jo^j\ J Jo J (61duwum, J or oldu'um), ijijj^l (olduwii, or Aldu'u). SECTION I I The Phonetic Values of the Letters and Vowel- Points, the Uses of the other Orthographic Signs, our System of Transliteration, and the Doctrine of Ottoman Euphony. We must divide the thirty-one Ottoman letters (omitting V) into vowels and consonants. But it must first be premised that every letter is sometimes a consonant, while only four of 16 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. them are sometimes vowels. These are \, j9*> ij• others, twenty-seven in form, are always consonants. All the I t will be more convenient to treat of the four vowel letters first, together with the vowel-points, which are not letters, but simply marks. Usually, the vowel-points, three only in number, are not written ; they are supposed to be known. But, in children's books, in Qur'ans, in books of devotion, &c, they are written; and sometimes in other books and papers also. o J o J The vowel-points are named : 1, ustun, ^JZ**J\ (over), the mark of which is a short diagonal from the right downwards towards the left, placed over any consonant; as: *.->, o , -., &c; 2, esere, t^\ (no meaning), a similar diagonal, marked under J •» J any consonant; as: —, ±9 ±, i, &c; 3, uturu, jjj>j\ (no meaning), a small j-shaped mark, placed over any consonant; as: j J J J . . j » J ' J9 u*> <^c* These vowel-points mark, originally, the three Arabic short vowels, to which the additional Ottoman vowel-sounds, a, a, 4 have been added. The ustun has the value of & or e, accord- ing to the consonant, & c , accompanying i t ; the esere has the value of 1 or i ; and the uturu that of 6, u, u, u, also according to its accompaniment. The short vowel-sound indicated by each of these three marks always follows, in pronunciation, the sound of the consonant to which it is appended; so that we have the following THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHT. 17 Ottoman syllabary, No. 1 : v-> ba, ba, ba, ba, be ; L-J b}, b! ; t-> b6, bu, bu, b u ; and so on through the alphabet. When it is required to make the vowel long, one of the o three Arabic letters of prolongation, x* <—*j>- (harfl medd, pi. ±+ ^ijj>- hurufi medd), has to be added to the consonant, still marked with its short vowel-point. The letters of prolonga- tion, true long vowels, are 1, j , ^ ; of which \ always accompanies ustun, ,j always accompanies esere; and j always accompanies nturu. We now have Ottoman syllabary No. 2, as follows : \> ba, b a ; ^ J bl, bi ; j) b5, bu, bu, b u ; &c. We thus see that there are eleven Ottoman short vowels, and eight long. Our system of transliterating them is also made apparent. I t is the simple method of using a or e to represent ustun, i to represent esere, and o or u to represent uturu. As these vowel-points shade off in phonetic value, we use &, £, &, 4, or e for ustun ; 1 or i for esere; and 6, or u, 4, d, for uturu. After long consideration, we have for some years past adopted this system, as the simplest, and, on the whole, the most rational. The values of these Ottoman vowels are those of the vowels in the following eleven words. They are all familiar English words, excepting the French tu9 the vowel of which is unknown in ordinary English, though it exists in the dialects of some of our counties. These words are: far, war, a-(bove), c 18 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. pan, pen; pin, girl; so; put, tu, cur. We mark the vowels of these eleven guide-words to the Ottoman pronunciation, in the order in which they stand : far, w&r, dbove, pdn, pen, pin, girl, si, put, tu, c u r ; and for the eight Ottoman long vowels we use: far, war, pin, girl, so, put, tu, cur. That is, nineteen Ottoman vowel-sounds in all, long and short. The student has but to remember the series of ten English words and one French, to become possessed of the key to the Ottoman vowel pronunciation. But he must learn never to swerve from the values of those guide-vowels. To an Englishman, with our slouchy method, this unswervingoess is the most difficult point; but, with a little patience at first, it is to be achieved. He must practice himself in pronouncing pasha, lib (not pdsblw), b&b&, \Ai (not b4yb&), dan, ^ (not sen), ben, ^ (not den), san, ^ (which he will at once pronounce right), O ++ O O / /O O J is-(temek), (*LLJ, fir-(lamaq), j - o ^ i , q6l, Jj-i (not q&l), o j o J o j qui, JjS (not qui), yuz, j ^ (not yuz or yuz), and g y u z , ^ ^ (not gyuz or gyuz, though these are also words or syllables). The English student of Turkish has to exert his utmost care, in respect of the Ottoman vowels, to break himself of the home method of pronouncing a short vowel, and the same vowel when long, in two very different ways. The Ottoman vowels remain alw«iys p u r e ; they never change in phonetic value with a change in phonetic quantity; thus, a is always a THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 19 made long; I is always 1 long, 6 is always 6 long, u is always u long, &c, in the same word and its derivatives. The student will have noticed above the Arabic sign of quiescence of a consonant. I t is named jezm, *j>. and is never placed over a vowel, long or short. The fourth Ottoman vowel letter, *, which, when a consonant, is the soft aspirate h, is also derived from the Arabic, but has a special history of its own. This letter is never used as a vowel in Arabic in any other position than that of a final to a noun, substantive or adjective, usually of the feminine gender, sometimes singular, irregular (hrolcen, technically) plural. and sometimes an Such are the words— ALU> khalife, &1* snnne, AI-A. hasana, A-J? tayylbe, &c. In Arabic, these pronunciations (as modified in Ottoman Turkish, as to the vowels, and as to the consonants) are those of the words when they close a sentence or clause in classical reading. They are also the pronunciations of the words in modern conversational Arabic. But, originally, and to this day, in classical Arabic, those and all such words end not in a vowel at all. They all end in a consonant, in a letter t ; which, for certain grammatical reasons, is never figured o , but always appears in the shape of a letter s surmounted by the two dots of the o , thus l. Our specimen words are therefore, originally, i i i i . kh&lifet, l^t sunnet, AIM-A. hasanet, i^-Jo tayylbet. There are other 20 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. vowels and consonants to be added to the termination of these in classical Arabic, to mark the case-endings or declinations. Thus Si-Is., when definite, may be marked iftii. khallfetu for the nominative, iLli. khalif&tl for the genitive, iiLk. khaiiftt& for the accusative. X X When indefinite, it becomes iU&. khalif&tun, £" X iflii. khalif&tln, AAJ» khalif&tHn. In all these cases, when final in a sentence or clause, the case-endings are dropped from the pronunciation, though still written in vowel-pointed books, and the word becomes simply khalif& throughout. These indefinite case-ending marks are called in Turkish jjj>j\ ,>ot (Ikl uturu), double uturu, »^J ^Si\ (Ikl &s&&), double bs&b, and ^jL-jl je-^-i^ (Ikl As tun) double ustun. A consideration now arose. In classical Arabic, final con- sonants may be either silent, or vocal with any one of the O x x- "^" three short vowels. J O " £x- Thus : o y s j k&t&bet, cu~. ; > k&tebtu, KZ+AS ketebta, o»-i3 k&tebtl. When such words are final in a sentence or clause, the final consonant is made silent; so that we have k&t&bet, as before, for the first; but ketebt for J all three of the remaining words. 0O/ becomes nasr, as does ^aS O' ana x Ox x Ox So ^ * 3 , j^>, j*>, final, 2 Ox * ^»5, though ^oi (always dis- tinguished by a servile I being added—]^o5 n&sran) remains fully pronounced, or only loses the sound of the final n, and is read nasra. When the final I of iaJi. khdlifi, and similar words, was dropped from the pronunciation, the letter might have been THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 21 dropped in writing also; for v_Li&. would read khalife just as well. I t could, however, and would, be read LJLU. khalif? as Europe has done in making it into Caliph. I t was neces- sary, then, to devise a method which should prevent the suppression of the vowel belonging to the last consonant of such words, and yet not be liable to be pronounced as a t with the case-endings. This convenient method was dis- covered by the arrangement adopted of suppressing the dots of the I, and leaving the nude A appended to the word, as A.aJL&. khalife, &c. By this method final A in such words became virtually a vowel in Arabic, though it is never mentioned as such in Arabic grammars or lexicons. Persian has a very large number of nouns, substantive and adjective, that end in an ustun vowel. When the Arabic alphabet became the sole mode of writing Persian, the Arab teachers would naturally use their quasi-vowel final 5 to represent that final Persian sound. Thus, *j> ber&, a^L* SU- gurne, «^U1 amade, »ju**», reside, &c, were written. The B was thus made a vowel in Persian also, when final. I t was even made to follow one of the other two short vowels in very rare cases, when no other device was available. Thus we have the numeral A-*» (si), three (in Ottoman Turkish usually pronounced A*> se), & (kl), that, A*, (chl), what, that. When, by another historical step, Turkish began to be written in the Arabic characters modified by the special 22 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Persian letters (Turkish scribes learning the method from Persian teachers in the land of Persia conquered by Turkish invaders, who there embraced Islam), the use of s as a final vowel was found so convenient as to be naturally adopted. So AJI ebe, ALI £d&, &c, were written. Now, a whole class of Turkish gerunds, optatives, and imperatives of the third person, end with this vowel ; we, therefore, have sjjl ld&, *±S glde, %j£ gyure, JlS qala, \j<& qir&, &c. A further step was, therefore, possible to be taken in Ottoman Turkish, from which Persian writers had and have shrunk. The vowel s was used as a medial also, whenever it was found that its introduction served to distinguish two words written alike, but pronounced differently. bllmek, could also be read d J b bllemek. Thus IEJUJ If the vowel-points were always marked, they would suffice for this case ; but they are generally omitted. ALJ was already in use. - i The gerund and optative AL or By writing d j b bllmek and ISLALJ • bllemek, the distinction was made clear. * ~ i Hence, s as a medial Ottoman vowel, always indicating a preceding nstnn short vowel-point, became fully established. This medial or final Turkish vowel 5 never joins on to the next letter in writing; as, (sLoi^j! nremek, AJIALJI 6diya\ From this sketch of the history of final and medial vowel a, we see plainly how fundamentally erroneous is the common THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 23 European (or rather English) method of transliterating such words with a final or medial h. The nearest approach to correctness o f which our orthography is capable, since we possess not the French e or German e, is to write all such words with a final a, as khalifa, Fatima, Mehha, Brusa, &c. Jeddah; Medina, These are usual; but **>. Jidda, is usually spelt while J^-ALJ Qdhira (usually Cairo), AS&° Tanja (usually Tangiers), &c, have been made into monstrosities. The phonetic value of an initial I is at first a difficulty to the European student, inasmuch as there appears to be nothing like it in Western languages. This, however, is more apparent than real, when fully explained. We must remember that in Arabic the initial I or I is a consonant, not a vowel. Like any other initial consonant, it takes the three short vowel-points, and is then pronounced: 1 3e, I 4, I >u. When it became a Persian letter, it was generally named hemze, as it is usually called in Arabic when a consonant (but never when a vowel of prolongation, or final and short); although, in Persian words, it is always a vowel, whether initial, medial, or final. With the short vowel-points, this initial \ is always a short vowel in Persian words, and the Arabian hemze sign is never placed over i t ; t h u s : j \ er, j \ ez, f^J esb, eu*»\ est, & c ; sL*»l ispah, ^Uli^l Isfahan, &c; i $ ulag, &c. 24 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. This initial short vowel Persian system was extended (in practice, not in theory) to all Arabic words used in Persian with I for their initial letter. But the Arabic consonantal I was then taken (in practice) to be a Persian vowel 1. Thus, \J\y) was read ebvab, Ij^l Ibtlda, Jj^l u s u l ; &c. When, in Arabic, the vowel of the initial consonantal I became long, then, as with any other initial consonant, a vowel letter of prolongation,—a long vowel letter,—was appended to the i ; thus: II, pronounced >i, jl> pronounced>u, ^ 1 , pronounced >i. This system passed also into use in Persian words, the Arabic hemze sign being omitted, even in Arabic words adopted into Persian ; and thus the combinations II, j l , <^l, became the initial Persian long vowels ; being pronounced _ respectively—a, u, I. o £ o * j ox Thus : u^ll ab, J^\ ubar, y^\ Tzed ; and T w ith words originally Arabic: Ul aba, Vjl ula, UJI Ima ; aba, &c. Thus, instead of The Persians adopted this system also, writing i^l ab instead of i^W. The double \ system, however, is still to be found in use in native Persian lexicons; where the first section of chapter I is^ generally figured with the two II, not with I. THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 25 It may be useful to mention here, that the Arabian writers employ this sign of medd to mark a medial or a quasi-final long vowel \ , whenever this is followed in the word by a heinze, i. e.9 a consonantal I. 5 >alina, l ] ^ hamra u, &c. Thus they write ^jlsL** yetesa^ These medd signs are omitted in Persian, as well as the final *; so that \j+>> h&mra is written, as well as pronounced, for ^*&.; llah (for ^i\\ ^ \ nlahi (for j»"i\), {j^J or ^ ^ rahman (for J^j), &c This perpendicular small ellf-shaped medd is also placed, in Arabic, sometimes over a letter j , to mark that, though radically a j , it is a long vowel I in pronunciation, in the two words only, i^. O hay at (usually written »L>., in Persian -- I O . ' and Turkish oLa.) and S^U salat (usually written »5L©, in Persian and Turkish o5L>). 26 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. The medd sign is sometimes placed, in Arabic, over a long vowel j or (j, when they are followed by a hemze in the same word ; as in ^ su>u, 2 _*. jpa. This peculiarity is not used in Persian or Turkish. I t is also sometimes placed over a long vowel medial t, when this letter is followed by a reduplicated consonant in the same word; as: »^U madde; it is not used in Persian or Turkish. Such of the foregoing Arabic usages as have been adopted in Persian for words of Persian or of Arabic origin, are also employed in Ottoman Turkish for the same words j though they are sometimes omitted in ordinary writing. We now come to a purely Ottoman use of the medd sign, utterly unknown in Arabic and Persian. Thus : Whenever an initial vowel 1 of an Ottoman word of Turkish or foreign (European or Indian) origin has the short sound of a or a, the medd sign is placed over it, as a distinction from the initial sounds a, a, e; as : J j ^ T amiral (French), ^ 1 arl, JpTada (Turkish); but tlillf asalet, j y avval (Arabic), J er (Turkish; also Persian; but two different words). Another Ottoman peculiarity connected with the initial 1, when followed in writing by a vowel j or ^ , is that these two vowels are not necessarily long vowels in words of Turkish or foreign origin. Thus o j l 6t, JJ\ ur, yj\ utu, c*L>jl utmek, Jlrfjt oflchal, illvj-jl irlanda. They may then be called THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. directing vowels. 27 In many old or provincial books and writings, these directing vowels are often or systematically omitted, the writers, from habit, or system, adhering to the original Arabic method of spelling by short vowel-points, for the most part omitted in current writing. This makes such books and papers immensely difficult to read and understand. The three Arabic long vowels, I, j , fj, having thus acquired a footing as Ottoman short directing-vowels, when following an initial letter I, it was found convenient to extend the system, and to use them as short directing-vowels, following initial or medial consonants, thereby departing entirely from the Arabic and Persian systems. There is no method in use for distinguishing a long vowel letter from a short one in an Ottoman word of Turkish or foreign origin. We may almost venture to say that all such medial vowel-letters in Turkish and foreign Ottoman words are short vowels ; whereas, in Arabic and Persian words they are always long. yib bash, JJS q!r, ^y O-OJ J . C + Cf Thus: qush, jf*}UI aghlamaq, bozulmaq, d J ) ^ buzulmek, xs^jy O ^OJ J^- gyuruldu, J, div^ gyurunmek. Hitherto we have considered only the open syllables, that is, those which end with a vowel. We have now to treat of the closed syllables,—those which end with a consonant. In the original Arabic system, when a word or syllable ended with a quiescent consonant,—a consonant not followed 28 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. by a vowel sound or vowel letter in the same syllable,—such consonant was marked, in pointed writings, by the sign ° placed over it, which, as was before remarked, is called jezra, +)>.. T h u s : L-*f beb, c->li bab, c-^ bub, L-*-J bib, &c. I t is a rule in classical Arabic, that two quiescent consonants cannot follow one another in the same syllable, whether as initials or as finals. Such a word or syllable as crusty tart, blurt, flirt, & c , is unknown. As far as two such initial consonants go, this rule prevails in the vernacular Arabic also, and has passed into the Persian and Turkish. Foreign words with such combinations of initial consonants to words or syllables are treated in one of two ways. When initial in a word, they may be separated into two syllables, either by a servile vowel I, generally with an esere vowel, being prefixed ; or by a vowel, generally eser£, being intercalated ; and when the combination is initial to a non-initial syllable of a word, the latter method alone is used, or the syllables are so divided as to separate the two consonants. Thus : KXifia has become *Jsl Iqlim, kral has become J^i qlral, oo o^ o prince has become gj^ pirlnj, and Svizzera has become j*Ly>\ Isvlcher. In classical Arabic, a final word in a phrase or clause could terminate in two quiescent consonants ; a s : k>. rabt, As urn, c^» huzn, &c. This liberty is much used in Persiau, Turkish, THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 29 and foreign, as well as in Arabic Ottoman words; thus : O O JJ COf OO 0° o-*,a durust, ^,1 ard, ^ ^ plrins, 2 ^ plrlnj {prince); &c. When a letter in an Arabic word ends one syllable, and begins the next in the same word, it is not written twice, but one sole letter is made to serve for the two, in pointed writings, by having a special mark, *, placed over it. This mark is an abbreviation of the Arabic word jJt» shedd, which means a strengthening, corroboration, reduplication. Thus we have, oJ-i» shlddet, o l c 'Met, JI& baqqal, jpos. 'attar, j * medd, Mi WJ j j vldd, J umm, &c. It is a sine qua non in Ottoman reading, and in correct speaking, to redouble such letters in the pronunciation. We can derive a correct idea of this reduplication by studying our expressions, mid-day, ill-luck, run next, &c. But, if such reduplicated Arabic word has passed into vernacular Ottoman use, then the redoubling is excused ordinary conversation ; as in the words J l L baqal, in .Uac aqtar ; &c. This reduplication is really unknown in Persian; consequently, reduplicated Arabic words are much used in o Persian without reduplication ; thus ki. is generally used in Persian as k» khat, and has thence, as similar words, passed into Ottoman Turkish. On the other hand, pedantic imitation has commonly given to a few Persian words the Arabic peculiarity of reduplication, so passing into Ottoman also : thus, 30 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. j ^ per (a wing), is sometimes pronounced ^ perr ; and sjj^ perende, »jj^ perrende ; &c. This reduplicating system is not used in correctly writing Turkish Ottoman words, but it is sometimes met with in incorrect writings. The two letters should be written in O JO J O JO J full in such Turkish words; thus, J-Dj^ ehulluq, J J J J J billuq, etU*l emmek, &c. The Arabic word hemze, »}•&, besides being a name for the letter I, as before explained, is also the name of an orthographic sign, mark, or point, very variously used in Arabic and Persian. Most of the rules concerning it, which derive from the two languages, have passed into Ottoman Turkish, with an addition or two used in the Turkish transliteration of foreign words. Turkish words never require the sign. The hemze sign, ', would appear to be a diminutive head of the letter c , thus indicating to the eye the guttural nature of the vocal enunciation it represents; which is, in fact, a softened choke, in an Arab mouth. But in Persian and Turkish pro- nunciation it is a slight hiatus, at the beginning of a noninitial syllable, or at t h e end of any syllable, initial, medial or final. I t is placed over a letter when it bears the ustun or utfirii vowel, or is quiescent; under it, generally, with the esere vowel. The hJmze, in a word of Arabic origin, always represents a consonantal letter I, sometimes radical, sometimes servile. THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 31 In Persian words, the theory of the sign is the same as in Arabic, but the sign itself is always servile, and either final or nearly so. When a hemze, radical or servile, is initial in an Arabic word, it is never written or pronounced in Persian or Turkish. The 1 letter is then taken to be a vowel, and is treated accordingly. Thus, J J >emel, becomes J*l emel; J J ! 'Ibll, becomes o> Jjl Ibll ; J ' k m , becomes J Amm. and short. : Oj S> These are all radicals, So again, JQ\ ^efkyar, becomes J6s\ efkyar ; JlJ\ >lqbal, becomes JUI iqbai; .j*l 'umur, becomes jy\ umur; &c. These initials are all servile, and short. The modes and doctrine of making them into long vowels have already been described. In Persian, Turkish, and foreign words, an initial I is always a vowel, and is made long in the same way as if the word were of Arabic origin, as has been said before. When a hemze, radical or servile, in an Arabic word, is medial or final, a rather numerous body of rules come into play. Sometimes the letter I, then always called hemz6, is written, together with the h£mz& sign over it, \ (as in ^ K re>s), and sometimes the h6mz& sign above is figured, as a letter OJ f* ** now, without the I, in the body of the word; as in ^jJ^L^e yetesa>elun. In the former of these two cases, the hemze is o X usually a final, quiescent consonant in its syllable; as, eusi* o A. re>-fet, ^ U rae>-men, &c. In the latter case, the hemz& is the initial consonant of its medial or final syllable, movent with 32 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. ftstun ; as in l*ja. juz->an, \%y>. jeza'an, &c. But it may also be both; that is, a quiescent hemze may terminate one syllable, while another, a movent h&mze, may begin the next syllable. In this case, as with any other consonant so occurri ig, one 1 alone is written, with a hemze sign over i t ; and ar ove this, the teshdid sign is superadded, with an ustun sign over it a again ; as in JliJ thfb->h\. This step never occurs ii Turkish phrases ; but the explanation is needed, so as to m ike clear what follows. This reduplicated medial hemze, movent with istun, is sometimes followed by a long vowel 1. In this case, instead of writing, for instance, ^Wj ra>->as, the two letters I are combined into one, with the signs medd and hemze, anc without the ustun vowel; thus, ^ T . ra>->as, as before. This ;ombiua- tion is of very rare occurrence, happening only in d erivative words, of which the root is triliteral, with hemze for second radical. But a movent initial hemze of a syllable, medial ii a word, may be followed by a long vowel \, without being redi plicated. I t is then figured by a single written I with the hemze and medd signs ; as, JU ma'al, &c. These combinations, when used in Turkish, drop the hemze and teshdid signs, but preserve the medd sign. The ustun vowel that precedes such medd sign is hardened from e into a, THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 33 on account of the following a, even with a preceding soft consonant. But, when such medial or final h£mz& is itself movent with esere, it is no longer written in the form of \; it then takes the form of ^ , without dots, and with a h&nize sign over i t ; as, ^J^JJ rens. If its vowel is uturu, it is written as a j letter, o with hemze sign over i t ; JJ as, ^JJJ ru>us. In these two examples the vowels are long; hut there are words in Arabic some perchance used in Turkish, in which they are short. Of course, the long vowel letters do not then follow the O modified, disguised hemz£. Thus, ^J^ Moreover, when such medial ^ O jO^ ripls, ^Jjl eb>us. or final hemze, whether movent or quiescent, is preceded by a consonant movent with eser&, the hemze is figured as a letter ^ ; and when movent with uturu, the hemze is written as a letter j ; in either case surmounted by a hemze sign ; thus, ^^ bfcsa, ^>jj bu^a. Such disguised medial hemze may be followed by a long vowel letter; as, *\y fcbad, JjJ~*o mes^ul, LrJJ rens. If the hemze be changed into a ^ figure, and be followed by a long vowel \, it becomes changed in Turkish, and sometimes in Arabic, into a consonant ^ ; as in o - l ^ rlyaset (for o*-tf, rbaset). There is a striking peculiarity in certain Turkish Ottoman derivatives, which causes great embarrassment to students, and has filled continental Turkish dictionaries and grammars D 34 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. with totally misguiding examples and rules of pro aunciation, with regard to the interchangeable vowel-letters j and (j. The peculiarity arose, I imagine, when all Ottoman Turkish was provincial, and was governed by the pronu aciation of Asia Minor, variously modified in its various provinces. Thus the earliest writers made use, in all such derivative words, of the vowel-letter j (when they used a ly at all). O J ^ O J 0 O J " They, therefore, wrote \^JS gelnb, L_>JXS gldub, t_>j J& qachub, o O J J j Jo- JO* c-ij^J qirnb, ^jjy qurub; and jU,b b&shlu, j U I ellu; &c. These derivatives became, in course of time, in Europe, and in Constantinople, modified in pronunciation into gellb, gldlb, qachib, qlrib, qurub, bdshl?, elll, &c. The orthography, how- ever, has remained sacred, excepting in the case of provincials, who sometimes write, as they pronounce, v-J&, c-^u^, W-A-SJS, O O J U-AJI^J , ^jjf, J O A ^ b , ^ Os , &c. This subject will be further developed in the paragraphs on Euphony. Proceed we now to the phonetic values of the co isonants. The letter ^ , equally used in Ottoman words of Arabic, Persian, Turkish, and foreign origin, has the value of our b generally, whether it be initial, medial, or final in a word. o, o o + o oJ Thus : j j bed, j> blr, Jo bar, j o biz, ^ buz, btk, buz, biz ; \>\ij rlbat, \&j rabt, e^-> subut; c-jbS kltab, t - j ^ . j3iiub, i-*j»l erib, \~>j> harb, uJs qalb ; &c. But when medisl or final, ending a syllable or word, it sometimes, anomalously, takes THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. the value of our p. 35 Thus it is common to hear, L^li-T kltap, i^Jo tip, \±i>\ Iptlda, ^ I I J kltapji. Especially is this the case with the gerunds in L^J ; as, ^>jsS gidip, ^j6 gelip, v j j ^ . 5 yazip, L-^SJI oquyup, VJUK qfrip. The Persian letter <> is our p in all positions: ,JJ peder, _ Jj\ apar, «_*>! lp. The Persian word v-**J esp, and the Turkish word LJ>JO t6p, are usually written with i_>. The Arabic o is our t in all positions: —t taj, taj, J J I etel, Iji? fetva, o l et, o l at, O J ! it, Ojl ot. In Turkish grammar it is sometimes changed into movent ^ in derivatives, when it O OJ J OJOJ is originally final and quiescent; as, o ^ durt, ^ ^ OJOJ ^ J J J OJ d ^ durdun, **j± durde, ^ ^ durdu, ^^ durdunju, J C dtirdum, &c.; o^l It, j±J\ Ider, L-ijJol Idlp, ^ ^ ^ J idlji ; il+J git, ^ 1 / glder, L-JJJJJ* gldlp, ^-^S gldljl; &c. The Arabic o is found in Arabic words only, and in a very few borrowed from the Greek. O our th in think; i J Its original value is that of .* so that &j|yU aya-thulug, for ayios OeoXoyos, was not as bad as our bishop for emfffcoTros. But in Turkish and Persian this value is unknown; the letter is pronounced as our 5 (sharp, never z) ; aya-sulug is therefore the Turkish name of Ephesus, c^(j is pronounced sablt,^! eser, oij^.1 Ihdas, &c. I n some Arabic-speaking countries this letter has become a t; as, o 5 6 talata, &c. The Arabic - in Turkish is our soft g, which we represent 36 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. by a j in all positions of all words, whatever the r origin. OO O O ^ O ^ si* Thus, JJM^. jms, (j*»U>.l ejnas, —Ipl aghaj. In some Arabico o •» speaking countries it is pronounced like our hard g ; as, ±sr* mesgld, sjs;*' segdd, &c. Sometimes it takes the sharp sound o f £ , q.v. The Persian _ has the value of our ch in church, o * our tch in crutch. We never use the latter orthography in o ur transom O X < „ literations,—always the former ; as, j ^ l dchmdq, C * J O J ^ O J J O cs^ja. churek, taJ^j^ chur&k, l^j*. chirba, eis"^ chlchek. fl U ch&m, O ^ - J I Ich, sL> chek, In Turkish derivation, this letter, in Turkish or foreign (not Persian, and there are no Arabic) words, sometimes becomes Arabic -., but not as a rule. The Arabic — has the harshly aspirated sound of our h in horse, hurl, her; not its soft sound, as heard in head, - lim, half, o * + &c. I t is chiefly used in Arabic words; as, ^ > hisin, \tf~*s» huseyn, _ b fettah, _ ^ jurh. We represent it by h ; some adopt h, to distinguish it from 5, q.v. Aspirate it always. The Arabic ± has no equivalent in our language. I t is the counterpart of the Scotch and German ch in loch, ich, &c. is generally transliterated Tch, as in the present treatis ). It Until the student has learnt its true pronunciation, he shculd consider it as a variety of h, and never pronounce it as a k, especially when it is initial. O ' A 0 0 ' Thus jjj£. kMdiv (pronounce '•* hidiv, not kldiv), .L&jjlji. khudfivendghyar (pron. tiuda...), THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. o ^ 37 o J - o ^L» shakh, j y ^ \ Ikhlamtir. In Turkish words, this letter is often used, provincially, for JJ , and is itself sometimes pronounced in original words also ; as, (*Ui5 gltmek, jsS glder; clL>, c b dUgh. The Arabic i, in an Ottoman mouth, is a z. Arabic words alone. Different Arab communities pronounce it as our soft th in this, as a d, or as a z. 0 O O X I t is found in °/^ O i %* The Turk reads, O O <" j^.1 dkhz, ^pi zlkr (vidg. zlklr), Jji.L me>khuz, ^,jj bezr. The Arabic , is our r in every position, in all classes of o *e-s o " ocm> words: thus, KZJS\J re^fet, Jo bar, ^1 ard. There are two important remarks, however, which it is necessary for the English student to bear in mind with respect to this, to him, peculiar letter. Firstly, it must always be pronounced (never dropped or slurred over, as we pronounce part, p i ' t ) ; and secondly, the value of the vowel before it in the same syllable must never be corrupted (as when we pronounce pot, p a t ; for, f&r; cur, cur ; & c ) , but always kept pure, as with any other consonant; thus, j ^ q6r, jji qur, jy* sur, jj> gyur, &c.; o Jii o P i r > JS» q!r o » -** q i r ; &c# 38 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. The Arabic j is our z in every word and every position; jh zad, ^-jj zlr, ^ j z6r, ziir, ^j_.i nezd, \\ ez, ^1 az, az, O J Jjl uz ; &c. The Persian J is only found in Persian and Frenei words ; it is of the value of our s in treasure, pleasure, and is transliterated zh) as, j\j zhazh, »^>*£ pezhmurde, jjj mazh6r, &c. AJ\ &ta- I t is of very rare occurrence. The Arabic ^ is a soft s, always followed by a soft vowel in all words. I t must never be pronounced as z ; thu3, ill asa, JJ^JS qavs, jj«* suz, suz. The Arabic y i is our sA, always; as, ^U shad, ^ 1 Ish, ^ l i neshr. The Arabic ^a, in Turkish, is a hard 5, used in Turkish, o J and foreign words also, to designate a hard vowel; 1 hus, Jfc\ Ass, l dsmiq, J ^ > J ^ susmaq, {j^»J qism&q. Never read it z. The Arabic ^ only. is very peculiar, being used in Aral ic words It is generally pronounced as a hard z in Tur kish, but sometimes as a hard d; thus, ^>\j razl, Us qaza, ^ l i \\ enqaz ; ^ \ 3 qadi, J K - ^ 1 ^JIS qazi-'l-'&sker ( v u l g . ^ _ ~ s ^13 qh '-'a^ker), &c. Its Arabic sound is inimitable to a European without long practice. The Arabic L, besides being an element of Arab c words, always as a hard t, is used in Turkish and foreign words, sometimes with that value, sometime* as a very hard d, when THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. initial. o « y 00 J O J J . . . 39 o O , + Thus, c^lL tulu*, Jb5 qdfcr, ki. k h a t t ; JAJ> titll, c l t dagh, j^W tuz, j*UJ? tiqamaq, j ^ j l L davranmaq. The Arabic k is used in Arabic words only, as a very hard z. O Thus, J i b zallm, I k zAlm, J L b zifr, jJo zafer, ) L i hazz, J O .. k^iis? mahzuz. The Arabic c is, as a general rule, used in Arabic words only. I t is a strong guttural convulsion in an Arab throat, softened in Turkish to a hiatus, and often disappearing entirely. Thus, ^ac easr, "We represent it by a Greek spiritus asper. Oo-« o o o ^ jo* o J o, ^ b ta*n, ^jxL melun, *WS qat', c j W maqtu\ The Turkish word vjs. 'araba (for AJU) is, however, with its derivatives, always written with this letter, of course corruptly. The Arabic c is, originally, a peculiar Arabian kind of hard g, with a sound vergeiug on that of the French r grasseye, which English dandies sometimes imitate. But in Turkish pronunciation it is either a simple hard g9 when initial; as, vJlfi gallb, KZAAZ g&flet, SJJIS. gay da, &c; and either that when medial or final in Arabic words only, or like our softened gh in Turkish w o r d s ; often disappearing, or nearly so, and changing, like it, into a w sound after or before an Aturu hard vowel. O Thus, Jltel igfal, c,x* sadg, j^k* magfur; J ^ J U I , J J OJ aghlamaq, clW dagh, ^^j\ O J J O J o O s J ° ? "* 1 2 ilduwu, J&j* siwan, J&jio do wan, , J ^f-y> san, jfl aq, e>3> waqt, are thus cor- rectly rendered, leaving the k to represent its legitimate ancestor, d . T h e Arabic d, in all words and all positions, is our k. When initial in a word or syllable before a long 1 or j vowel, and also before a short uttiru vowel, it borrows, in an Ottoman mouth, the sound of a y after itself before the vowel; but not so before the short ustun, the short esere, or the long I vowel. Thus, c-^5 kyaztb, J j ^ » l ekyul, i£bj^=> kyttpek ; (^A^=» kedl, A^=a klram, J^-^'j vekil. Its name, in Arabic, requires no addition; but in Persian and Turkish it has to be distinguished from the Persian letter of the same form, but widely different phonetic value. 'areblyye. I t is then termed A*-^C UJO kyafl In Arabic and Persian Ottoman words it remains unchangeable by grammatical inflexion; but in Turkish words, when final, it undergoes phonetic degradation on becoming movent, and is pronounced as a Persian d, and even as a y ; or sometimes as a w after an iittiru vowel. Thus, i^Lj\ Ipek, dC->l Ipeyln, &ls\ Ipeye, £ l j l ipeyl; $jj» THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. O 3 3 3 y 3 3 3 41 3 3 0*«0 euluk, dL^=sjlj*» sultiyun, A ^ S ^ M suluye, ^ » ^ suluju; &+zA Itmek, \y±£^m>\ Itm&yln. The Persian <*J, called A ;->»^l-i uJo kyafl farlslyy&, and ^^U u j ^ kyafl farlsi, or ^jjs? * »\s kyafl 'ajami (vulg. 'aj&m kaTl), is the Persian hard g. fjS^^ I t is unknown in Arabic, is unchangeable in Persian words, and is never final in Turkish words or syllables. Thus, eL» seg, d-feu** segln, A^SU* s£g&, .£*• segl; J£ g41. In ordinary writing and print it is undistinguished from its Arabic original; but the Persians mark it with a double dash : j £ gyul, SL*> seg. In some Turkish books it is marked with three dots: JS, dU. The Ottoman d, ignored by all previous writers, eastern and western, consequently nameless, but which we venture a J o J *y to term AJLLJ: »_JO kyafl 'Asmanlyye, the Ottoman < *, is <) found in Turkish words only, as a medial or a final, never as an initial to a word, though it is used as an initial letter in a non-initial syllable. Its phonetic value is that of our y in all cases, though it has no mark to distinguish it. radical, as in db bey, J & dlyll, ^ ^ I t is both ylylrml; or it is gram- matical, declensional, servile, representing a softened Arabic O* 3 radical or servile d, become movent, as in <£by£» kyupek, savdlyim, L£i±j* savdlyl. Most European writers 42 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. represent this value by gh; but the practice is insufficiently considered, and altogether misleading. The Ottoman nasal e), distinguished by the name of surd n, o J o ^yjZle «• sag Mr nun, is a second special Turkish phonetic value of the letter d, or nasal letter, which we transliterate with the Spanish nasal n. I t has the phonetic value of our English ng nasal, as in sing, thing, &c. I n ordinary writing and print, it has no mark by which a student may recognize i t ; but sometimes three dots distinguish it, and one recent writer has marked it with one dot, u*j (as with him the three dots, d , serve to point out the Persian letter or sound). is never initial to a word. This value As a medial, it sometimes ends, sometimes begins a syllable; as, j ^ X ^ l anlamdq (vulg. annamaq), {jj£=6 t&xhi (vulg. tar!) ; J $ j ^ » gyunul, j£=*s deiilz, ^-^=»T aMz, ij£y> s6nra (vulg. s6ra). When final to a word, it is usually sounded as a simple n; as, tsb ben (ben), eL*» s^nln (sanln), eXlS g^llii (galln), dlL dlii (d&n), &j*> sdn (sbri). When medially final it is usually softened in like manner, or is elided in pronunciation. In ^%^=A and its derivates (itself derived from e)l an), the following J is exceptionally incorporated with it in pronunciation, as though by a kind of inversion of the Arabic rule of conversion for the J of the definite article Jl before certain letters called solar (for which see next paragraph on letter J ) . The Arabic J is our letter I in all words and all positions ; THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. as, ^jjJ lazum, v^OI alln, JU dal. 43 The Turkish word j ^ i l f e i , mentioned above, is, with its derivatives, a modern Ottoman exception of the capital; and the Arabic rule for the conversion of the J of the definite article J l , in pronunciation, when followed by a noun or pronoun beginning with a solar letter, ^^* u J ^ . harfl shemsi, into that solar letter redupli- cated by a teshdid, is a classical exception, peculiar to Arabic compounds. The solar letters are fourteen in number (exactly the half of the alphabet) ; viz., o , d>, ^, ^>j>J> <* > u-> u°i j» ijo, L>, k , J , ^^J\ cJ. Thus we have j J I ez-zlkr, <*UJ1 es-semek, ^ ^ ^ J l esh-sh^ms (whence the name ot ^*****»), uLaJi es-saia, Is.-*3' ed-duhd, ez-zuha, *JlkJl it-tall', JLkJl ez-zulm, ppM ellazlm, ^ J l en-nur. In the pronoun <^JJl, and its derivatives, the written J of the article disappears also. The sign " placed o o ^ over the J , so omitted in pronunciation, is named vwasl, J-oj junction; and is the letter ^ of that word, specially modified. The Arabic letters * and ,j are our m and n respectively, in all words and positions: JU mal, J J emel, ~ J benlm,^k\i nazlr, O O J ^j>. huzn. The Arabic letter j is sometimes a consonant, sometimes a vowel. When a consonant, it has the phonetic value of our v, of our w, or of these two combined, the v beginning, and the w ending the sound of the letter. Thus, Jj var, ^\j^ jewab, 44 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. o o «. o uJL>j vwasf, «.$!j vwaq!\ differences. The ear alone can decide these But when the consonant j is reduplicated in an Arabic word, it has always the v value; as, Jjl dvval, J\ji q^vvdl. Ottoman corruption even then may sound it, in hard lettered words, as a reduplicated w—q&wwal. The word u-ily qawwaf (or ^J\^ q&w&f) is an Ottoman corruption of Arabic n^jUi. khaffaf. When the letter j is a vowel in an Arabic or Persian word, it always has the value of u ; excepting a few Persian words, become Ottoman vernaculars, in which it takes the sound of A. O J J O O J O ^ > O O J Thus, *jjJ ltizum, ^ji** memnun ; j ^ shur; o * ^ d6st (dust), o •> (jip. khosh (khush). In Turkish and foreign words it is generally, if not always, short, and may have either the value of 6, or of u, u, u, which there is no means of distinguishing, save that of accompanying hard or soft consonants. With a hard consonant, in a Turkish or foreign word, the vowel-letter j (often omitted) must have the sound of either 6 or A, unless it be considered long, when it becomes o or u ; thus, j ^ i q6m&q, ^ j S qunn&q. With a soft consonant, it must be read either u or u, u or u ; as, etL^ yuzmek, jljj-* suzlu. If the accompanying consonant or consonants be neutral, all °J °J guidance is lost; as, jj> b6z, buz, buz, jj«* suz, suz. In derivatives there is, however, frequently a servile vowel or consonant, hard or soft, that helps. o *o J o ^ o j Thus, ^jy> boz&n, (jljljj* o y buzluluq, &k*jj> buzmek, <&*\j*t suzmek; but jj**> suz has no THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. such helping derivative. 45 As to the long and short value, each individual ear must decide for itself in words of these two classes—Turkish and foreign. Vowel j is never initial; it must be preceded by I to represent an initial uturu sound ; as, j j j l ilmaq, dljjl uimek, &c. The Arabic letter 5 has already been fully discussed. The Arabic letter OH % > &fj> % u n ; [yi pfy, °J> shey, J\j re mey, £> hayy, ° j j qayyum, ^ remy, J*j v£shy, ^ * meshy. vely, ^ This is a difficulty to a student at first, as we have nothing like it in English. When the ^ is a vowel, it is never initial. If a vowel 1 or i sound be initial in any Ottoman word (Arabic, Persian, Turkish, or foreign), the ^, if written, is always preceded by 46 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. an I; as, ^jsA Idl, j^y) irlainaq. When medial, it is always o .# o long in Arabic and Persian words ; as, j ^ \ emir, <^UJ bin. In Turkish and foreign words, medial vowel (j is generally, if not always short; as, d ^ j vlrmek, j ^ J qirmaq. When final in an Arabic word, it is also always short; as, ^jl5 qazi, razl, _ c b da'l, ^ U jaii, ^jj^»* sari, &c. -i|L But there are hosts of Arabic words ending in reduplicated consonantal - khAsrevT, 'imperial;' IJJ\JJJ shirazT, The substantives indicate abstract qualities; as, (jbli shahi, ' royalty;' {jj>jj vezlrl, ' vezirial ofiice or functions;' &c. Turkish and foreign final shahlnsheh, »LL^» shehlnshah, A*£J^ shehlnsheh ; &c. In many Turkish words the vowels j and ^ are used for one another by different writers, at different times, in different places; even at one place and time ; even by one writer at different times, or in the selfsame document; but this last as a license or an inadvertency. advisable. j£gellr; Consistency in this matter is Thus we have: JLib, b&shlil, j i b b&shli, ^jft gelAr, jj\ arA, i 9 j k , c , c , j . are only six : I, o , J , , c-> , o , ^ , « , .3, J , «, As the orthography of every Arabic and Persian Ottoman word is fixed and unchangeable, it is only in Turkish and foreign Ottoman words, and in the declensions and conjugations of all Ottoman words, that the rules relating to hard and soft letters are carried out. This is the first and chief part of the beautiful system of Ottoman euphony. If any one of the hard or soft consonants is used in a, Turkish Ottoman word, all the other radical and servile letters of the word, of its derivations, and of its declension or conjugation, must be of the same class, or of the neuters. oy o x o ^o ' ^ r> Thus we have: j*jl5 qazmaq, di*p gezmek; ^.yft J o ^ ) j gezdlyl; jj^ls qarliq, \^f , qazdighi, gyuzluk; &c. The Ottoman vowels are also of these three classes. hard vowels are : a, a, I, T, 6, 6, u, u ; eight in all. vowels also eight: a, e, 1, I, u, u, u, u. are a, a, a. The soft The neutral vowels These vowels always accompany their own class of consonants, or the neutrals. accompany any class of consonant. bl ana, U»IJ pasha, ^ O^ ' The 0<*0 J The neutral vowels can Thus we have : bb bdbd, san, ^ ben, j ^ J qirmaq, dU^f glrmek, O '(1/ i y O fO J / j ^ S qimaq, j ^ j S qurmaq, dLJj^ gyuzetmek, etl*^ gyurmek. When in a Turkish Ottoman word a vowel is the dominant letter, its consonant or consonants being neutrals, the declen- THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY. 49 sion, conjugation, and derivation from that word follow the class to which the dominant vowel belongs ; thus, j^Jl atrnaq, O O ,-• OX X O O' xO J O'OJ jJ/M aghirliq, j^V/J irlamaq, j + ^ 1 Ammaq, &>\JS-J\ 6ghramaq; O » 4" O /O O xo J OxO J islo j l elemek, csUijil Inmek, i*Lo}j> ytizinek, d l ^ y tirmek. When an Arabic or Persian word is declined or derived from, in Ottoman Turkish, its last dominant letter or vowel decides whether the declension or derivation shall be made O J Ox with hard or soft letters and vowels ; thus, Lj^* merbut, rJ~> J c / O x o o ^ O 'i* oc x^ ($o£j* merbutluq ; j u ! emir, dd^*l emirllk; ^ U asan, ^liUI asanliq ; &c. When the sole dominant vowel of a Turkish Ottoman word, or the last dominant letter or vowel of a Turkish, Arabic, Persian, or foreign Ottoman word, is of the o or u class, hard or soft, all possible consonants, and all vowels in the declension, conjugation, or derivation therefrom, not only conform to the class of such dominant, but furthermore, all consecutive servile vowels in the derivatives that would otherwise be esere, become uturu, of the class of the dominant; that is, become u when the dominant is 6 or u, and become u when the O JO J J ot OiO J~> J dominant is u or n ; thus, [#J&J\ olgun, jb mtgun, jjJLi^L tutgunluq, jj-**> sumshdurmek, d l ^ j J ^ j - - surnshdurulmek ; O 'OJ J-^ O/OJOJ J O^rjJo-f J Cil^j) gyurushmek, d ^ j J ^ ^ a gyurushdurmek, <*JUJ,jg2^s3 E 50 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. gyurushdurulmek. But if, in such words, an ustun vowel come in by the ordinary course of derivation or conjugation, and be followed by a syllable or syllables with an esere vowel, the influence of the radical dominant uturu is destroyed o,rj j o 0,0J J by such intervention ; as, bozushmaq, J^-ft*^)j> bozushmaqliq, ^kj^j) bizushmaghin ; d i ^ y gyurushmek, isJJiC^jJ gyurushmekllk, £^£1^} gyuiushmeyln. ( 51 ) C H A P T E R IL T H E OTTOMAN ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. SECTION I T H E R E is no gender. The Noun Substantive. If the female of an animal has not a special name, as, jfjlL (taw&q), a hen, j ^ ~ i (qisraq), a mart, O O O x * t*L>l (tnek), a cow, j ^ t e (qanjlq), a bitch, the female is named, as with us, a she..., ^LJ± (dlshi); as, ^ ^ , 1 a lioness ; &c. -£JO (dlshl arslan), If the female be a girl or woman, she is never o « named dishl, but is mentioned a s ^ J (qiz), maiden, or ^jjd (q&ri)^ matron, accordingly; as, (j^j^jj (qiz khizmetjl), (khizmetjl qiz), a servant maid, a maidservant; orjJ(j^"bj*> ^ s n ^jj& (qaii dshji), or ^ l i ^ f l (ashj! qari), a woman cook, a cook woman. There is, really, no declension of nouns in Turkish; but the prepositions, perhaps eight in number, by some termed postpositions, are subjoined to the noun, singular or plural, the plural being always formed by adding the syllable^ (lar, lex) to the singular; thus : Nom. j j l 6q {arrow), Gen. dijl Aquii (of—), j-^j\ oqlar (arrows). \&j&j\ oqlatln. 52 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Dat. 63j\ 5qa j^Juij! oqladi. (to - ) , + o J Loc. i±9j\ 6qda (in — ) , bjfij\ oqlarda. Ace. ^ i (the — ) , U?j£jl oqlail. °"° Abl. 6qn j 0dJj\ Inst. 6qdan &±J3\ 6qla O J (/rom — ) , Noni. O J 'O J oq Ichnn (/or — ) , &j$)j3j\ 6qlar Ichnn. ev (house), ^ £vler (houses). evln, d# evlerln. eve, ^1 evlere. j' o 2jsj\ oqlarla. (WJIVA — ) , O J Caus. Cjf\ jj\ ^ ^ j l oqlardan. • Gen. Dat. !? Loc. Sij! evde, 5^jl evlerde. j«S, \j&y ^>jf \Dut ^ ^ ^ i /c^^ °^u> &cMost, if not all, Turkish singulars, of more than one syllable, ending in j , soften it into c before junctional vowels; as, J ^ L ^ (chardaq), trellis, dLcl^U cbardaghin, ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. A-CI^U chardaghd, ^ x l ^ U . chardaghi. 53 Those in Arabic d soften it into Turkish d (y value); eL-jl (Ipek), silk, dX-*-jt (Ipeyln), A_1JV (Ipeye), Jv-oJ (Ip^yl). Those in Persian d (g value), do not change i t ; as, du**> seng, stone, dX-i-> (sengln), dX-^*i (senge), - X - ^ » (sengl). These rules do not apply to Arabic and Persian substantives ; these retain their final j or d unchanged; unless the borrowed word has passed into the mouth of the vulgar as an o o o o everyday expression; as, j p * i fistiq, d*i~i fistighin, &c. Singulars ending in a vowel, take ^ in the genitive, and consonant J (pideler). The word y> (su), water, irregularly forms its genitive as O J J djj-p (suyun, almost the only exception or irregularity in the language). (jy> (soy), sort, ends in a consonant, and is regular; djj-* (s6yun), vyo (siya), ^ j * (s6yu). 54 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Arabic and Persian substantives never change their final • ^- O " consonants for declension; {j^e> (tlb&q), plate, <*1LL t&baqin; O ^ O __ * ^ xO dL^I (Imsak), refraining, worship, jjiL* (salati). _ O x ^ A-SL^I (imsake); oil—© (salat) r Their final vowels follow the same /J O , rules with those in Turkish words; l o (dua), 'prayer, <*UICJ d^ e anin); W L J (piyade), foot-man, charsu), market, ^j**j^ AJ5^LJ (plyadeye); j _ * ^ L ^ (eharsuyu) ; ^1% (suiasl), triliterai root, /c-i^^J (sulaslyl). They form their plurals as Turkish words; but Persian names of men and their kinds use the Persian plural also, if judged proper. This is formed by adding an ustun vowel, followed by ! ^ (kh'aje), master, J&^j* (kh'ajegyan). Singulars ending in vowel j take conJ O J sonant ^ instead of d ; as, J.I_>J&> (khub-ru), a beauty in face, U ^ V J * (khub-riiyan). Those ending in vowel ^ change it into consonant \j in like manner; as, J pole, J^3* (qutban), UT^s (qutbeyn), the two poles. The regular plural masculine nominative for men is formed by adding uturu followed by ^j (un) to the singular. becomes esere followed by ^ This (in) in the oblique case, also used as a nominative in Turkish; the plural feminine is with O O O J ustun followed by o l (at) in all cases ; thus, JL*> (musllm), O J O J O a Muslim, I^JL** (musllmun), O J O / OJ C>-JL* (musllmm), o U L * (mus- llmat), Muslims. The irregular Arabic plurals commonly used in Turkish are of rather numerous forms, and there are many more plural forms used occasionally. These irregular plural Arabic forms are not obtained by adding a letter or letters, vowel or con^ sonant, to the end of the singular, but by varying the vowel or vowels of the word, and by adding letters, consonant or vowel, as the case may be, before, between, or after, the letters of the singular. To enable the student to obtain a fair insight into this very intricate but beautiful system, I have to say, first of all, that a paradigm has been adopted by Arabian grammarians, according to which all such modi* 56 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. fications may be effected. They have taken the triliteral Jxs (fa'ala) as the representative of any and every triliteral rootword, and they have modified this root into every shape that can, under any circumstances, be taken by any derivative of any triliteral root in the language. All those modifications, when not made on the vowels alone of the triliteral, are effected by adding servile letters, or a servile letter, here and there, before, after, and in the midst of, the three radical consonants, with appropriate mutations, in each case, of the vowels, long or short, in the new word. Thus, to speak only of Arabic nouns, substantive or adjective, used in Turkish, we have, in the first place, to learn the forms of their singulars (for they all have definite forms), and then the forms of the plurals special to each of these singulars. To facilitate and systematize this knowledge, the Arabian grammarians have divided the whole language into sections of biliteral, triliteral, quadriliteral, quinqueliteral, & c , roots, which they term, respectively, ^JLJ (sunan), Skj j-cl\. (raba'i), ^C-UA. (klmmasi), ^lj**» (stidaVi), &c. are the Turkish pronunciations of the terms. (siVasi), These I do not re- member ever to have seen or heard the expression ^ U . ! (uhadi), which would be the analogous name for uniliteral root; but it may perhaps be found. Of these, the triliterak form by very far the most important and numerous class, the quadriliterals coming next. These are represented, ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 57 respectively, by the supposititious paradigmatic words J-x-J (fa'ala) and J U (ft'lele). Every triliteral root is theoretically capable of giving rise to fifteen chapters of derivation, called C-JL) (bab, pi. L-^J-JI ebvab). These chapters are respectively termed : 1, ^ J U JXS (fa'ald babi), the chapter of the triliteral; 2, ^\> J*xw (tefil babi), the chapter of (the verbal noun) J-x*J ; 3, ,~JIJ AICU* (mftfaVUA b^bi); 4, ^ C J U (If al babi); 5, . j l T jltf (t4fi"Al — ) ; 6, ^ b J ^ l i J (tifa'Ai—); 7, ^ C J ^ ] (Inffal—); 8, ^ l T j u J l (Iftlal — ) ; 9, ^ C J I J U ( I f Hal — ) ; 10, ^ C J U i J (Istlf al — ) ; l l , ^ C j l J l (Ifllal—); 1 2 , ^ C J U ^ K l f V a l — ) ; 1 3 , ^ b j £ J l (Iffvval — ) ; 14, ^ C j £ * 1 (Ifinlal — ) ; 15, ^ C J I J l (Iflnla—). The use of words from the last four chapters is next to unknown in Turkish, if not quite so; and the use of chapters 9 and 11, JJLSI , J \ * ^ , is confined to the expression of colours, the second expressing an intensity of degree. All the other nine chapters of derivation are constantly met with in Turkish, as nouns, substantive and adjective. Occasionally, even a verb is used; but as a kind of invocatory interjection. All but the first of these names (which is the form of three out of the six varieties of its verb) is the form of one of the verbal nouns, or of the sole verbal noun, connected with the verb of the chapter; and each chapter has two adjectives 58 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. deriving from it, the active and passive participles of the verb of the chapter. The first, or triliteral, chapter possesses, furthermore, several other special forms of nouns deriving from its verb other than its verbal nouns (which are a kind of infinitive, or noun of action or being, corresponding with our English substantive form in -ing, as, walking, singing, cutting, suffering, lasting, & c , as acts or states). Of these, I give here merely those frequently met with in Turkish ; and it must be understood, that in this simple triliteral chapter, the various forms of verbal nouns are never all found deriving from one verb ; but certain forms belong to one or more kinds of triliteral verbs, others to other kinds. These hinds of verbs, again, are of two sorts; there are verbs transitive or active, and there are verbs intransitive or neuter; and certain verbal nouns are more used than others with each of these two kinds. Again, there are the six conjugations of this simple triliteral chapter ; and each conjugation has its preferential form or forms of verbal noun. The Turkish Qamiis dictionary dilates on this subject more than other works, and much information can be obtained from it, in addition to what should be "studied in the " Grammar of the Arabic Language," by Dr. Wm. Wright, vol. i., p. 109, par. 196, where 36 forms of " nomina verbi " are given for this triliteral chapter alone, and several others may be found in De Sacy's " Grammaire Arabe," 2nd edition, 1831, vol. i., p. 283, par. 628. Those that are principally ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 59 used in Turkish are the following: 1, J * (fa'l); 2, J ^ (faMl); 3, j i (fl'l) ; 4, J ^ (fu'1) ; their feminines: 5, A \JJ (fa'le) ; e 6, &i (fa'ale); 7, ' & (fl le); 8, &* (fu'le) ; the same forms, with an insititious or servile long vowel \ : 9, J ^ (fa'al) ; 10, JUj ( f l a l ) ; 11, J U (fuTil); and their feminines : 12, J & (fa ale) ; 13, J U (fl ale); 14, J & (fuale); some of the same, with long vowelj or JUs (fa'allyet) ; and the special forms in initial servile * , with their feminines : 25, Jxa* (mef'al); 26, j £ (meffl); 27, *Uiu (mef'ale); 28, A W (meflle); with the two special forms in initial servile o , with long vowel I intercalated: 29, JUS (tef al); 30, j Q (tif al). Many original substantives and adjectives are of one or other of the forms here given; and in frequent cases it is disputed whether such words are substantives or verbal nouns. The active paro ticiple, nomen agentis, of this chapter i s : 31, JcU (fa e il); 32, feminine, AJUCLS (fa'lle) ; and the passive participle, nomen patientis, i s : 33, J^d* (mef ul); 34, feminine, djxiu (mefule); derivative adjectives are met with, branches of this chapter, as: 35, J ^ (fa'l); 36, J ^ ( f i l l ) ; 37, ]jZk (faul; often feminine); 38, J-xs (fa'il); and the feminine of this last: 39, aLas (fa'lle) ; 60 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. the diminutive, substantive or adjective: 40, J ^ (f&'ayl); the noun of unity: 41, J** (fale); the noun of kind or manner : 42, A1X9 (fl'le) ; the noun of place and time : 43, J*io mef'al; sometimes mef cii and A1*A* mef'die); the noun of the place of abundance: 44, AW© (mef'die); the noun of instrument and receptacle: 45, Jxi© (mlf 'II; sometimes JUd* mlf al, and ^U e mlf'ale; rarely Jxi« muf ul and *Ui* mufule); and others still which need not be classified here, though a knowledge of their special forms and meanings, when acquired, assists greatly to an accurate appreciation of Arabic diction, as occasionally met with in Turkish. T h e irregular plurals of these forms mostly met with, when the words are substantives and masculine, a r e : 1, JUsl (ef al); 2, jJJ> (ffl'ul); 3, J l i (fl'al) ; 4, j 2 l (if'Al) ; 5, AUI (effle) ; G, J l i J (fu"al) and 7, J L i i (fa'ale; both for the form Jcli) ; 8, }U (fA'ala) and 9, iJ\ (ef U a ; both for the form J ^ fall); 10, Vli (fa*ala; for the form iUs fa'la); when they are feminine O y xO , O +J in form, either; 11, J*s (ffill; for the form d*9 fi'le), or 12, J** (fu'al; for the form al** f&'le), or 13, JUsI (ef'al; as for masculines) ; 14, JjUs (fa'a'll; for the forms jJUi fa'ale, AJJXS fa'ule t \ .. - j faeil£); 15, J s j y (fevall; for the form ai-cli) ; besides 16, J * & (mefall; for the forms mef al, mef il, mlf al, and o y _ o so o Jo* their variants) ; 17, J-sl** (m^fa'il; for the forms JUi*, JJ*A*); and others more rarely used. ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 61 Adjectives masculine derived from this triliteral chapter, much used in Turkish, are of the two forms J-*9 (fall) and Jxs! (ef'al) ; feminines, respectively, ALX* (fa'lle) and %& (fa'la, for Arabic i%a ; of J«s! when not comparative) or %& (f&'la, for Arabic ^ x s ; of the same Jxsl when comparative). The plurals of these a r e : %& (fd'ala) or jLal (ef'ile), for J ^ , as in the substantive; and Jxs (fuel), for Jxsl and its feminines. We now come to the derived chapters. The verbal nouns of the second chapter a r e : J ^ ' (tef II), JUAJ (tefal; sometimes tlfal), and *kaJ (tefile) ; the plurals of the whole of which are of the form J-claJ (tefa'il) ; though the first makes also a quasi-regular plural, o^Lxw (tefl'at). O W / J* *v4s J Its active participle is J*A* (mnfa'll, fern. al*io mtifa'lle); and its passive participle is JXA* (mu.faeeal, fern, *£&» mufa"ale), of which the masculine is also used as a noun of time and place. The verbal nouns of the third chapter a r e : alxla* (mnf a'ale) o .» and J U (fl'al ; this latter only occasionally used) ; the active participle is Jclio (mftfall, fern. AICUO muialle); the passive participle, j i l i u (mAfa'al, fern, ak\i* mtifa'ale, exactly like the first verbal noun). . o #»o The verbal noun of the fourth chapter is JUsI (if'al); a. p. J*io (mAf 11, fern. A W ) ; p . p. J*a« (mufil, fern. A W ) . 62 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. The fifth chapter h a s : v. n., J * £ (tefa^ul); a. p. J*u* (mutefall, fern. A U ^ ) ; p. p. j X (mutefiTal, fern. J ^ ) . The sixth : v. a j l l l i (tefa'ul) ; J c U l l (mutefall, *LlSl) 5 JcUi* (mutefaal, AICU^*). The seventh: JUsl (Infial), J ^ (munfall, i £ ) , J i i H (mflnfaal, Axtu*). The eighth : JU*1 (Iftlal), j i L (mifti'Il, A 1 ^ ) , J*iu (mufta'al, ALC^U). c T h e ninth: JiLi 1 (Ifllal), a.p. j 2 1 (mufall, j £ u mufalle); ^ no p. p. The tenth: J U A ^ J (istlfal), J*a^** (mustefil, *!»«•;«»,<>), J*AZ-~<> (mustefal, A1*A1~O). o „ The eleventh: J ^ M (Ifllal), j u £ (mufall, IlllL mufalle) ; no p. p. As to the significations of these chapters, it may be shortly said that when the first is transitive, the second is causative or intensitive; and when the first is intransitive, the second— causative still in the same sense, but not intensitive—is transitive. Sometimes the second has the sense, not of making (a thing) do or be (so or so), but of making (it) out to be (so and so), of deeming, judging, pronouncing, or calling (it so and so) ; rarely, it unmakes also. The third chapter denotes reciprocity of the action between ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 63 two, or among several or many agents, or an expected reciprocity when one agent only is shown. Thus, AJ>&> a mutually writing letters (to one another), a writing in expectation of a reply; J l i a mutually striving to kill one another, O O J fighting. When the triliteral is expressive of a state, as cr ^>. (h&sn), a being beautiful or good, the third form expresses an action corresponding with that state in the agent; thus, 4u-As? (mfthasene), a doing good, and acting well, kindly to (the other). The fourth form is causative, generally, but sometimes ° *° intransitive; thus, JL^I (Irsal), a sending (some person or o *o thing) ; J l i i (Iqbal), an advancing. The fifth form has the sense of acquiring a state, sometimes by one's own act, sometimes through the act of another; as, . . ^ ^ j (tekessur), a becoming broken. This may be transitive at times; as, + ,~Ly., , (ta'alltim), a becoming knowing in (a science, . T art, &c.) ; i. e., a learning (it). The sixth form has the idea of reciprocity, something like the third, but more decided, more certain in fact; thus, J j l i u (taqatul), a mutually killing one another. Sometimes it has the sense of feigning a state ; as, Jals* (tejahul), a feigning to be ignorant. Sometimes, again, it expresses a repeated act; thus, LilLJ (taqaza), a dunning, repeatedly demanding the fulfilment and discharge (of some incumbent act or debt). 64 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. The seventh and eighth forms, like the fifth, imply the acquisition of a state, either by one's own act, or as the result of the act of another; thus, JUail (Inffal), a being acted upon, o ^ o _ affected, hurt, wounded, vexed (by another's act); J]Q£\ (Intlzar) a (becoming) looking forward (for the occurrence of an event). Sometimes the eighth form acquiring; is transitive in the sense of thus, (j^l^al (Iftlras), an acquiring (game) by huntO X O ing; or, a seeking to acquire; as, ^ U J I (lltlmas), a seeking to obtain (a favour) by (morally) feeling one's way (by touching, groping, requesting); a requesting. The ninth and eleventh express two degrees of state as to colour, and sometimes as to defects; the eleventh denoting o ^ o intensity of that state ; thus, ,]/•»! (Ihmlrar), a being red; redO x O _ O - O ness; j\j<+2»\ (Ihmirar), a being very red; 9^j^ O " (i'vijiij, a being O crooked; crookedness; —L:s2j_cl (1'vijaj), a being very crooked; anfractuosity. The tenth usually expresses a trying to get (the act or state O y O O signified by the first form) ; as, ^L.&uJ (Istlfsar), an asking for an explanation of (a matter). Sometimes it has, like the second, the sense of deeming or judging (a thing) to be (what ° "° ° the first form signifies); as, Jl&i*»l (Istlsqal), a deeming (a person or thing) heavy, disagreeable, tedious. And sometimes it means an acquiring a state, expressed by the first form ; thus, ,. o o laJ^I (Istlshfa), a becoming restored to health. And again, it ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 65 o ^o o occasionally has the sense of the first form ; as, JjjuiJ (Istl'dad), a being or becoming ready prepared; readiness (external or mental); mental capacity and quickness in acquiring dexterity or knowledge. Quadriliteral roots have but four forms ; of which only two are perceptibly used in Turkish, the first and second. The first has two verbal nouns, figured paradigmatically by AIU* o *o (fa'lele), and ^%9 (fl'lal); the second, but one, figured by J W (tefa'lul); culkL* (saltanat) may serve as an instance of O J Oy ' a verbal noun of the first form, and ^WLJ (tesaltiin) as an example of the second. I t would occupy too much space to detail here the modifications of these results arising in the case of roots where the second and third radicals are identical, or of those in which one, two, or all three of the radicals belong to the trio \, y <^, out of which the long vowels, the letters of spring. prolongation, These details should be studied in Wright's, or in De Sacy's Arabic Grammar. But it is necessary to remark that these Arabic verbal nouns belong equally to the active and passive voice of their verbs; so that, as in English, the same word, js fet-h for instance, will sometimes mean a conquering, at others a being conquered, just as our word conquest does. This last rule holds good with Persian verbal nouns, not much used in Turkish. It is not so, however, with Turkish verbal nouns, excepting, to a slight extent, with the F 66 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. present, as in A* ma, me ; and this for the simple reason that every passive Turkish verb has its own special verbal nouns complete, present, past, and future. Every Turkish, Persian, and Arabic substantive has its diminutive, the two latter seldom used in Ottoman phrases. The Turkish diminutive substantive is formed usually by o o suffixing the syllable < U (jlk) or j * (jiq) to the word, of & whatever origin, whether it end in a consonant or vowel. o o >- «. o o Thus, db?^l (erlkjlk) a little plum, db&l (Itjlk) a little dog, ^UliT(kltabjlk or J^liTklt&bjlq) a little booh, dbtf^(kyatlbO x^ O J J J jlk) a little cleric, <&U*j.> (devejlk) a little camel, U&>J>J\ (utujuk), a little flat-iron, dL*sjS^(kAdljlk) a little cat, jfc-ljl (elmajiq) a little apple, jfc.U»b (pasbajiq) a little pasha, (jsPuoli (padlshahjlq) a little monarch, J^j*? (q&pAJM) O * J a O little door or gate, ' ^ A ^ l j i i (khojajiq) a little professor, ^yjgj* (qirljlq) a little woman. o o In words ending with eJ or J J , after a movent consonant, it would form a cacophony to repeat diminutive. these letters for the The less important is therefore sacrificed to euphony, and omitted in the diminutive, a vowel letter usually taking its place: v&yf (kyurek), <&L^j> (kyurejlk), a little O » J OJ J J shovel or oar; jf»-j> (chojuq), ^ (chojujuq), a little child. This form of the diminutive is sometimes modified into that of j \ i * (jeylz), jk> (jaghfz); thus, JXJ*JI (evjeylz) a little house, ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. o 67 + o jJu^yJ* (qizjaghiz), a little girl. As is seen, the former esere vowel of the -. in the diminutive has now become an ustun, as the eser& has been passed on to the e) or j ; , modified into Turkish d (y value) or c (soft gh value). Euphony requires it. These diminutives are used as terms of endearment also, exactly as in German, and as our nursery vocabulary says, daddy, mammy, granny, aunty, doggy, horsey, &c. ; only, in Turkish, the method is of universal application, by all classes, not by children only. The Persian diminutive always ends in *L (che); as, b (pa), **b (pache), or in d preceded by an As tun vowel; as, j<±5 (kemz), (S^JT(kenizek). The Arabic diminutive also makes its first vowel uturu, and the next vowel ustun, followed by a quiescent consonantal ^, whatever may be the vowels or quiescences of the original O *• * word; as, cr*&. O O* J O O (hasan), £>w* (huseyn) ; ^ ^ O O " J (hisn), ^^a*. (husayn); &c. The Persian and Arabic diminutive applies equally to substantives and adjectives. fications in details. The Arabic rule has many modi- But as these Persian and Arabic diminu- tives are taken into Ottoman use as original words, enough has been said on their subject for the present purpose. 68 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. SECTION I I . The Noun Adjective. As a general rule, the adjective, in Turkish, is invariable, having no gender, number, case, or degrees of comparison; and this, whether the word be of Turkish, Arabic, or Persian origin. I t always precedes the substantive qualified; as, +±\ dj^j (blyuk adam), a great man, J*±\ eJ^j (btyuk adamlar), great men; JCJJ\ ISJ^J (blyuk Inekler), big cows. But the Persian form of phrase is also much used (especially in writing), by which an adjective of Persian or Arabic origin follows the substantive qualified ; such adjective remaining in the singular after a Persian substantive plural, the substantive qualified always taking an esere of subjection to join it to the o o i •* *o * adjective; thus, &jj-> &\<*j-* (merdani buzurg), great men; o ,0 * * d^j L*c (e4saklrl muntazlme), regular troops, ^Lk-c ^^-LiL** (selatml e izam), great Sultans. Persian adjectives have three degrees of comparison, more or less in use in Turkish composition. The comparative is o* formed by adding the syllable^' (ter) to the end of the posi- ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 69 tive ; and the superlative, by adding the syllables ^J (terln); but these never qualify preceding substantives, being only used as substantive members of phrases, or to qualify a following substantive; thus, o l i J5L^ \$.jm (blhterinl vesa>U1 nejat), the best of the means of salvation; (blhterin vesa>lll nejat), the best means of salvation. Arabic adjectives have but two degrees of comparison. "Whatever the form of the positive, the comparative is of the O/O/ form Jxsl ( e f &l). This is used, in Persian construction, more as an exaggeration than as a degree of comparison, more as a substantive than an adjective. If followed by a substantive singular, it is a superlative with the sense of very, extremely, exceedingly, and the like; thus, o W eA^j o~^ nejat), a very good means of salvation. (ahsant vesile5i If the following sub- stantive be in the plural, the adjective is a superlative, with the sense of the most ; as, ol*s J5Ly c^*&.l (&hsiinl vesa5lll nejat), the best of the means of salvation. If an adjective be used as a substantive, it admits the OX J plural and the prepositions, as substantives; thus,Jjjl (lyuler), the good; \&Jj>\ (lyulerlii), of the good, &c, &c. Every Turkish adjective, besides its positive signification, betokens, on occasions, the comparative, the superlative, and an excess of the quality it expresses, which we explain by O J employing the adverb too before the word. Thus, dj-j (blyuk), 70 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. o -. lat*ge, larger, largest, too large; ,j\^f O J (sijaq), hot, hotter, hottest, J too hot; ijje-je (sdghuq), cold, colder, coldest, too cold; &c. The Persian compound adjective, much used in Turkish, in the positive degree only, is of many kinds. Some are com- pounded of two substantives, one or both of which may be Arabic or Persian, never Turkish ; as, c^L*. +S» (jem-jenab), O O * 0'W majestic as Jemshid; ^JAJ LJLA (asaf-tedbir), Asaph in counsel; uJ,^s*£ (sheker-leb), sugar-lipped; »\CJL»O o J l j c ('adalet- destgyah), a very loom of justice (i. e., just) ; others of an O - O J ' adjective followed by a substantive ; as, ^ L ^ s * ^ (sebuk-pay), light of foot, light-footed; or a substantive followed by an adjective; as, AL£JJ.> (dll-tlshne), thirsty-hearted (i. e., ardently desirous) ; or a substantive preceded by ^> (hem); as, jiLiT J& (hem-ashyane), of the same nest; genus; (hem-jlns), of the same jjj^~** (hem-shehri), of the same town or country, a fellow-countryman; like; UJ*** as, J^jijj-i CO/ of a substantive followed by J^j (vesh), (peri-vesh), fairy-like; o « » O followed by d ^ (rang), *U (fam), or ^ OO, of a substantive -*^ (gyun), all signifying CO, O colour; as, t s J ^ ^ (sebz-rang), green-coloured; fam), emerald-coloured; ^*xS 'Oti*J Js^(zumurrud- (gendum-gyun), wheat-coloured (i. e., dark-complexioned, brown); of a substantive followed by J(T(kyar, gyar), J T ( g e r ) , a U (ban), or j> (dar) ; as, (shirin-kyar), sweet-mannered; jC±ij\ ]C^fi (aferid-gyar), creative ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 71 (i. e., creator) ; ^ T j (zer-ger), goldworker, goldsmith; O * IJLCIJ OOJ (bag-ban), garden-keeper (i.e., gardener) ;J\±J$* (muhr-dar), sealkeeper; or followed by J\± (dan), j \ \ (zar), ^L, (sar), or ^L-l (Istan), all names of special places; as, (sera-pa), from head to foot; or with \J or o in place of the I; as, \j\5j* (ser-ta-pa), same sense; jJij* O (ser-te-ser), from end to end, O JO - * from beginning to end; or with ^\ in jjj>\~Z* (sheban-ruz), night and day (which is unique), JJ^AJLi (shebane-ruz), meaning: a whole night and day, all night and all day, twenty-four hours, or several nights and days in one succession; or with some other Persian preposition between the t w o ; as,-cjjJ^ pey-derpey), step by step, gradatim; eu*»^euM».s (d£st-ber-dest), hand on hand, hands crossed; AL^A:*** (sm^-be-sine), breast to breast; O J ' J O'JJ/O' jj^^Uy^ (dush-a-dush), shoulder to shoulder, bach to back; j$+>/*> (ser-b£-rauhr), with the head (or mouth of a bag, bottle, &c.) sealed up; or with a substantive and compound adjective ; as, / ?».^a ; i ^ i - (bakht-ber-geshte), w;^0S£ £wc& is reversed; or even 72 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. four words combined; as, »ju£> dJ^*» (ser-be-felek-keshlde), whose head is lifted up to the very spheres ; besides many other varieties ; especially the two privatives in ^ J (bi), without, and li (na), not; as, v-ol ^ (bi-edeb), without education or manners, unmannerly, impolite; L*j\j (na-bina), not seeing, sight- less, blind. Some Arabic expressions may be regarded as compound o «» o *» epithets in Turkish and Persian; as, MK%»U (sahib-qiran), ford o/* tAe conjunction (i. e., tAe master of the age) ; ou+xJ-Jj (veli-nl'met), associate of benefits (i. e., a benefactor) ; expresJ o o o^ * o ^ cv sions formed ofj i (zu), o U (zat), Jal (ehl), and C-JI^I (erbab), all of which imply possession; as, Afljiji (zu-zu>abe), possessed "* J of a forelock or topknot, and Afliiji (zu-zunabe), possessed of a following (i.e., a comet); u ^ ' o l i (zatu-'l-jenb, vwty. satlljan), tfAe possessor of the side (i. e., pleurisy) ; or in Persian construction; as, j j ^ J a l (ehli-'lrz), possessed of honour or virtue, O < O x honorable, honest, virtuous ; *0>» x~~.**->\iS (erbabi-mesned), those who possess the chief seat (i. e., high dignitaries); or an adjective qualified w i t h ^ c (g&yr)> other; as, ^ j s ^ - c (gayri-mahdud), other than circumscribed (i. e., unlimited, undefined); or an Arabic verb in the aorist made negative with V (la), not; as, l*o5sV (la-yAhsa), wo^ to be counted, innumerable; JJOV (la-yu'add), untold, innumerable; OJ*JV (la-yemut), wfo cZ^5 no^, immortal; fjjs&V (la-yetejezza), not to 00 subdivided, indivisible; or an 73 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. Arabic adjective followed by a definite article and substantive; as, J J J J I ^ J J I (ebedlyyu-'d-devam), eternal in duration; ^Lyi) (gyuzel yurumek), to walk The same is the case with Persian adjectives, whether used in Turkish or in Persian phrases. Arabic adjectives, as Arabic substantives, require to be put in their 5 O own accusative case indefinite when used as adverbs; as, iUs 0 - * (fl'lan), by act; L*o. (hasanan), beautifully. Arabic substan- tives are also sometimes used as Turkish adverbs by being put in their own genitive, indefinite or definite, as may be, and preceded by an Arabic preposition; as, iUs ^ ('an gafletln), by inadvertence; ^JljJLlI ^Ic ('ale-'t-tevall), in continued succession, successively; AP « a J ' ^j (fl-'l-haqiqa), in reality, really, truly; oU-ijJl; (bl-'d-defa'at), on several occasions, repeatedly; uZL) (ll-sebebln), for a reason; &c. As with substantives, so also every Turkish adjective has its diminutive, formed by the addition of the suffix A> (je, ja), -ish, to the word, whether this end in a consonant or vowel; as, j £ j (yeshll), green, A_SP* (yeshllje), greenish, somewhat green; Jj_5 (qizil) red, *srj-i (qlzllja) reddish; < sj> (blyuk) <)- 74 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. large, *S?^-*-J ( D ty a kje) largish; j l i ^ (uf&q) small, 4L_S?LSJI (uf5,qj4) smallish; ijj\ (hi) large, &*ij\ (Irlje) largish; (qara) black, &z»*j} (q&raja1) blackish; (quvujd) dryish. ^y (quru) dry, ij3 ^jjy A modification of this form, dictated by the principle of euphony, is used for the words d ^ o , d ^ , o o jUjl, ' by substituting a final d o r j for the t, and suppressing those letters at the end of the radical word, as for substantives ; thus, O * J O 3 " i P / j£.Uj! (Afajiq) smallish, and d ^ s r (kuchujuk) smallish; this last being doubly euphonic. These diminutive adjectives, as in every language, often express in Turkish the reverse of diminution in the quality they represent, being in fact exaggeratives in sense, and meaning very, exceedingly, extremely, &c.; as, j$ +±\ &>jf~£» (jesurja Jddm dlr), he is a bravish man (i. e., a very brave man). SECTION I I I , The Numerals. Turkish, Arabic, and Persian numerals, cardinal and ordinal, are used in Ottoman. one-tenth. Arabic fractions are also used as far as In this sketch, however, the five sorts of Turkish numerals alone are explained. These are the cardinal, ordinal, distributive, fractional, and indefinite numbers. ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 75 o The simple Turkish cardinal numbers are : jj JJi (Ikl) two, -j\ (uch) three, o^> (durt) four, ^ (bir) one, (besh) Jive, j J I (alti) six, ^±1 (y&dl) s ^ w , j X - (seklz) eight, jyb nine, ^j\ (6n) ten, ^J^i (diquz) (ylylrml) twenty, jj~*j\ (6tuz), ^/r/y, J^S (qlrq) forty, J J I (elll) j£/ty, J L d T (altmfsh) strrty, J U * (yetmlsh) seventy, ^IjC* (seksan) eighty, ^ L i t (d6q?an) ninety, \jj (yuz) a hundred, (sL* (bin) a thousand. The two substan- CJ O JO tives, (£)# (ynk), a hundred thousand, and ^^U (mllyin), a million, are also used; but they are not true numerals. They are names of aggregates, and require the numerals before o -> o o * ° o them; as, ^jij> (bir yuk), one hundred thousand, ijjj*j> (bir mllyon) one million; and so on for higher numbers, dj> Lc^} > O JO O » O JO ^j^JU ^j\, &c. O J3 The French numerals ^jJ* (bllyin), ^j^tj (tlrll- yon), o up to 9 9 9 ; next by using dLj before these simples or compounds up to 1999; and finally, by again using the simples o o o J or compounds before dL-> up to 999,999; thus, ^Jjl (6n-blr) ^ ° ^ O J O J J O J eleven, ^ J ^ J > o (ylylrml Ikl) twenty-two, ^jyj^jji (y&z otuz tich) one hundred and thirty-three, ^ dL-j (bin gJjjijS-* 76 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. s&klz yuz qirq besh) one thousand eight hundred and forty-Jive, O O J O J O J O cjjSij\jji O ^ ' O O Ol* O J Of ctL-> J - X A (jl^-lijji JJ^J (beshyuz altmishseklz bin yuz 6n durt) 568,114, ^ T JLJ1 jjlj\ dU ^ U ^ ^ J ij*. Uj^A gj' (uch mllydn, yedi yuk, doqsan iki bin, uch yuz, Alii alti) 3,792,356. I t will be noticed that'no conjunction enters these • T combinations. O J O When the foreign expression ^ j . ,L« , or the treasury word &ji is not used, the native method of expressing O O J multiples of <*LJJJJI is to state the simple or compound number of such multiple, and then to intercalate the word •3 < ^ O O o J o J S 'f " »,_S (kerre) £m£s, before the word du-fj^i ; as, eL-jj^j a^JS ^ J J (yedi kerre yuz bin) sgum iimes o?ie hundred thousand, 700,000; dLoji. Ir^J^ KS^°J£ ^J* ( d ^ r t ^ z ^ *k* k erre y ^ z b * fi ) 45,200,000. T h e Turkish interrogative cardinal numeral is — Is (qach) fow; many ? The cardinal numerals are adjectives ; but, like all adjectives, may be used as substantives, and declined. Even the interrogative — l i is used as a substantive when enquiring " what number ? " or " what is it o'clock ? " or " at what price ? " or " what is the day of the month ? " Thus : JJXJJJA gli (qach dldlnlz) "how many did you say?" ^jdS **l5 c>fcL» (sa'at q&cha o J c ^ ^ ^ gaidl) " to ^010 many (hours) has the clock come ? " ij^jfji) *>^ (qacha verly6rsun) " at how much art thou selling (it, them) ? ' ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. o 77 *» o „ • ^ ^ 1 3 usbl (ayfn qachl d!r) " the how-manyeth of the month is it ? " The Persian compound cardinals place the higher elements first, as in Turkish and English; but the conjunction j is inO Ox J O ' * O •* J ++ troduced between each two members; as, o i a • o*o£»« e^u*j«.3• ,U» (hezar A duwist u shast u heft), a thousand, two hundred, and sixty-seven. The Arabic compound cardinals take the conjunction j between each pair also ; but the lower elements stand first; as, oo^ J o,£ j o„ Jo +, u l l j c i w L j t j w ^ j JUJ >&*» (seoe-i tlse A khamsin & ml>eteyn u elf) the year one thousand two hundred and fifty-nine, expressed in Turkish, ^*Ai*,jjSk ^>\ jyltSyJ\ ISSLJ (bin Iklyuz elll diquz senesl). The Turkish ordinal numbers are formed by adding an esere to the last quiescent consonant of the cardinal, simple or como pound, followed by the termination ^4 JO J J J first, i&jy^ o ; as, ^ c 5 (blrlnjl) JO J J (ituzunju) thirtieth, ^jy. o-X' 0 ^ y ^ H (blSlnjl) thousandth, ^j^s^ „ (yuzunju) 0<" {Ji}\, Joj ^j^o Ji hundredth, oo o ;o/ jJjjtA* o ^ • But, in the numbers that end in vowel ^ , this is suppressed before the same termination ; as, | y i £ j . (Iklnjl) second, ^ J ^ (aitlnjl) sixth, ^yf^i (yedlnjl) seventh, ^^^S^i (yiylrmlnjl) O Ox iii twentieth, ^rr i^n$) o oJ fiftieth* The cardinal o ^ changes JOJQJ its final into ^ before the ordinal termination; as, ir&*j* (dn-diirdunja) fourteenth. O J ^ 78 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. The Arabic and Persian ordinals are frequently used, and may be found in the lexicons, &c. The Turkish distributive numbers are formed from the cardinals by making their last quiescent consonant movent with o o * ustun, and then adding a quiescent . to the word; as, (blrer), J l i (besher), jjyj\ (otuzer); j ^ (yuzer), ^ jj (blner). Their sense is expressed in English, which has no such numerals, by the words each and apiece; the foregoing examples will thus be rendered : one each, five apiece, thirty o o J each, a hundred each, a thousand each. becomes j ^ (durder) four apiece, The cardinal o>.> °* When the cardinal ends with a vowel, the s y l l a b l e ^ (sher) is suffixed to form the distributive ; as, jLS^\ (Iklsher) two apiece, ******—* » yalt Isher) six each, ^ I J J O I (yedlsher) seven apiece ^ L J ^ X J (ylylrmlsher) twenty each, j£JA\ (elllsher) fifty each In the case of more than one hundred or thousand, it is the cardinal that designates their number that receives the distributive suffix; as, jji ^ ~ r ^ (Iklsher yuz) two hundred each, duj JZJ (besher bin) five thousand apiece. And in compound numbers the distributive suffixes are added to the numbers of thousands, of hundreds, and of final units or tens, to indicate one distribution; thus, jjt ^J^i jji j2*i (besher yuz ylylrml Ox blrer) five hundred and twenty-one ^ O O O J o' * O O >»^ ^ ^ch,jl^\^'^J^Si^tj6sMa (seklzer bin, yedlsher yuz, qirq Iklsher), 8,742 apiece; JtJ\\ jj> (yuz elllsher), 150 each. ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 79 The Turkish fractional numbers are very simple. The number of the denominator in the locative, and followed by the number of the numerator is the form; as, j> *±S>\ (Iklde blr) in two (parts), one; i.e. | , the half; ^^A *±1J (beshde Ikl) in five, two; i.e. f, two-fifths.oo j Sometimes one of the synonyms ^ oo (pay), a *y^ (juz>), *~* (qism), &*>. (hissa) part, is added after each numeral of the fraction; as, ^j> »JJU SA (Ikl payda, blr pay) in two paints, one part. The Arabic fractional numbers are also used up to ten, oo Excepting the word ujLai (nisf) a half, the half, they are all O 0-* OOJ O OJ of the form Jx*; thus, eJij (stils, vulg. sums) a third, jto. (rub*) o o J OO'' a seventh, ^ on J o o J a fourth, ^j*** (khums) a fifth, ^x* (suds) a sixth, *-*» (sub*) OOJ OOJ (sumn) an eighth, su-J (tus e ) a ninth, jL& ('ushr, O ^ O J OOJ vw?^. ushur) a tenth, a tithe. The dual of e J u is used, ^UJL* (sulsan) two-thirds ; but for all the others a Turkish numerator 03-» O O OJ » ^ * is used; as, vjj —jl (uch rub e ) ^r^^ quarters, y*+>- ^y^ o oJ o*» khums) two-fifths, *«J ^ (Ikl (besh tuse) five-ninths, &c. There are two special Turkish adjectives and one Turkish o ~ substantive to express half. One of the adjectives, ^U (yaxlm), and the substantive, ^ b (yari), signify the half (of one sole thing; as, Ql *,G (yarlm elma) half an apple, a half apple; ir+ljk eJLSlJl (elmanin yarlsi), the half of an (or of the) apple. O J J The other adjective, # (buchuq), is used after some whole 80 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. +o, o i » o number, never alone ; as, Ul {Jy*-y. j> (blr buchuq elma) an apple and a half, LS*CL» £y*yt if^} (ikl buchuq sa'at) two hours and a half. When a complex fractional number consisting of an integer and a fraction other than one-half has to be expressed, the Turkish or Arabic fractions are used, the conjunction J or the preposition A)) being introduced between the integer and the fraction; as, *_^ y J {SJ\ or **j y AS\ ^P^-A two and oneo fourth. When the Turkish fraction is used, the numeral y in the genitive is also introduced before the fraction; as, ^-^.jl 8^}_>w*i &y A>\ ^j+> Jive, and three-eighths of one. The indefinite numerals a r e : yt> (her) every; y yt> (her blr) o every one, each; o o -*& (hlch) no, none; y o* o, o _*a (hlch blr), no ; « » o (jiso (ba'zi) some; ji.£=>\ (ekser) the most part; *• o r^j* (blr qach) some, a few; j \ (az) few; . (blr ch6q) a great many, a great quantity; as &c. Of these, y* is always an adjective; the rest are adjectives and substantives. There is a small series of Turkish numerals of a peculiar nature, from j~$*->} (Ikiz), twin, twins, through J-->jl (uehuz) o J •» triple, a trine, j j ^ p (durduz) fourfold, o ^ toj~2j (beshlz) five-fold, o J J and perhaps on to j^j\ (6nuz) ten-fold. Adjectives are formed ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. from these in j ! ; as, j]}^\ 81 (Iklzli), possessed of twins, oj twin J o J J (branches, &c.); jjJ^jl (nchuzlu) with three (lambs, branches, &c); &c. The written digits a r e : I 1, r 2, r 3, i 4, ) \J9 for ^ji\ £fj ', j> for^i-Vl gjj —, f o r ^ V l ^ U * . ; <->, for u ^ , ; ^ o 3 - x o , o'* , ; W, for J^Vi s, A^*I if J"> a ^ dots being omitted in these shortened numeral dates. Not so, however, when the date is written out in full words ; as, ^ L i J o ; *5ol (<*LJ «---£l ^ ^ J AJ^l^i ^ H ^ e L ^ *}-* &*>-;** **'~» jjb> (Ishbu bin Iklyuz d6qsan doquz senM hljiiyyesl mah-i muharremlnlii 6n 82 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. b&shlnji penjshenblh gyunu) This day of Thursday, the 15th of the month of Muharrem, of the Hijra year 1299. SECTION IV. The Pronoun. The Turkish personal pronoun has no distinction of gender: ^ (ben) / , ^ (sdn, not sen) thou, j \ ( 6 ; in writing, generally, O J O O j y 61) he, she, it; and their plurals : jj (hlz) we, j*> (slz) you, ^ J j l (&nl&r, inldr) they. o o o In politeness, J « J and j - * are used instead of ^ ^ o ^ and ^j-*,. They then have their own plurals: Jj> (blzler), Jy*> (slzler), which cannot be expressed in English. as singulars, by the over-polite. These are even used The third person plural is used, in the same way, out of politeness, for the singular, as is practised in Italian ; but it has not its plural. The word ijXd (kendi) self, is a kind of common pronoun, of all the persons, singular and plural. I t is specialized by the posses- sives. The personal pronouns, singular and plural, are declined in the same way as the nouns substantive, excepting that some of them have a special genitive,—all but those of the second person, singular and plural. These genitives a r e : ^ (b^nlm) of me, my; (SJLMI (s4nln) of thee, thy; dlil (Unin, 6nuii) of him, o her, it; his, her, its; ^ o (blzlin) of us, our; \s£y» (slzln) of you, your ; d^lil (dnldiin, onlarin) of them, their. But, to take either ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. o J 83 ^ of the prepositions with you, (bSMrn) my father (not my mother, o &c), * * o «» JJJJ +* (benlm b&b&m) my father (not your father, or his father). The possessive pronouns, too, have no distinction of gender, either on the English or French principle. They are 1 (1m, o im) my; d (in, in) thy; ^j (1, !), or, after a vowel, ^ his, her, its; y* (Imlz, imiz) our, jS (si, si) (Inlz, inlz) your; ^J (lerl, ldri), their. These possessives are suffixed to the substantives they qualify, and form one word with them. That compound word is then declined like a simple substantive ; thus, *>jj (evlm) my house, ISUJJ! (evlmlii) of my house, A*>J! (evlme) to my house, »J*JJ! (evlmde) in my house; &c. (The ^ added here before the bare possessive, is thought by some to be needed in the case of a preceding consonant that does not join on in writing to its next letter in the same word. Others do not consider it necessary, and write: ^ , is)jl, ^ 1 , &c; but 84 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. when the compound, in declension, &c, takes another vowel after it, it is more usual to add this preceding vowel also; as, <$UJJ1 (evlmlii) of my house, A^J! (evlme) to my house; JS^J^\ (evlnlz) your house ; &c. The vowel that precedes the bare possessive is an £s6re, soft or hard, given grammatically to the final consonant of the qualified substantive, when it ends in a consonant. 0#* Or* Thus, Op* ,** o l (at) a horse, J\ ( M m ) my horse, dUl (&tin) thy horse, Jil (atf), his, her, its horse, j+-5\ (itimiz) our horse, J « A . J 1 (Mniz) your horse, (butum) n j J OJ oJ j or +±j> (budAm) my thigh; \£ (yuz) a face, +jji (yuzum) my face; j j M g y u z ) an eye, jljjS (gyuzAm) my eye. When the substantive ends with a vowel, the bare possessive is added to form a syllable with that vowel, whatever it may be; thus, JJIJ (babam) my father; ^jj c^ajb (yanq6n) thy echo; (qapAsA) his, her, its door or gate; JAJJ^JJ** (sungyumuz) O J •» ° -» our bayonet; jS^jf - (gyurgyunuz) your experience; J 9 \s)jjy» (surulerl) their flock. The example here given, with the possessive singular of the third person, shows clearly that when the substantive ends with a vowel, ^» is the possessive, in lieu of (teyzeleri) their aunt. When the final vowel is ^ , the possessives of the first and second persons singular do not join on to it in writing. In the third person singular, and in all the possessive plurals, o o * they join on. o *" Thus, {jjjS (terzl) a tailor, *\£JJ-J (terzlm) my tailor, & (terzlii) thy tailor, ^ijj J+OJ O&rzlmlz) our tailor, jSsjJ (terzllerl) their tailor. (terzlsl) his or her tailor, (terzlnlz) your tailor, {jjtjj There is no valid reason for this rule; custom alone has it so. Thus are formed: ^joJf (kendlm) myself, &xS {kendln) thyself, ^ 4 x 3 (kendlsl) his, her, itself; j*l xS\(kendlmlz) ourselves, y& jji (kendlnlz) yourselves, i±£ (kendllerl) theirselves. A final j , in a polysyllable, as in declension, changes into c before the possessives, singular or plural, excepting that of the third person plural; so also, an Arabic d changes into o , J Turkishes) (y value) in like cases. mansion, ^LjjJ Thus, jlijS (qonaq), a (q6nagh!m) my mansion; dx^jl (Ipeyln) thy silk; dujl (Ipik) silk, j j l k (tawuq) a fowl, ^J]o (tawAghA) his or her fowl; j*clijS (q6nagh!miz) our mansion, (Ipeylnlz) your silk ; (jjAJj\Jio (tawuqlar!) their fowl. j3^-+-A The 86 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. reason of the exception is evident,—the final consonant takes no vowel before ^J. These possessives equally qualify plural substantives, and follow the sign of the plural. Thus, +jj\ (evlerlm), my houses; ts^JLJl (atlailn) thy horses; ijjjj<-jy> (Miugyulerl) his, her, its bayonets; j+sjjjj^ niz) your aunts; (sfirulerlmlz) our JlocJcs; jS^J^ (tevzelerl- ^^JuLjjS (qin&qlari) their mansions. By a consideration of the examples above given with the possessives of the third persons, singular and plural, as attached to singular and plural substantives, two peculiarities become evident, namely: 1, the plural sign is not repeated for the possessive when the substantive is itself plural ; 2, consequently, the combination of a substantive and a possessive of the third person, when it has the plural syllable J between the two, leaves it altogether doubtful whether this plural sign belongs to the substantive or to the possessive. *o* o x combination ^JJjXjjJ Even if the J (qondqlarleri) had been in use,—which is not the case,—it would • have been impossible to decide whether ^jj&bja (qonaqlari) was intended to betoken the sense of his or her mansions, on the one hand, or their mansion, on the other. Add to this difficulty the third sense of their man- sions, and the puzzle becomes still more complicated. In conversation, the doubt of the hearer may be removed, if necessary, by proper enquiries. But, in a written document, ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 87 intended to be understood by an absent reader, possibly after the death of the writer, a method was seen, especially by judges and legists, to be necessary for distinguishing between the three cases. That distinction is effected, in writing, somewhat at the expense of plain grammar, as follows. To distinguish the single possessor of the plural possessions, the singular corroborative genitive of the personal pronpun is placed before the combination containing the plural sign; thus, ijjjijja (anln qonaqlari) his or her mansions. dul To distinguish the plural joint possessors of a single possession, the genitive of the plural personal pronoun is prefixed, and grammar is violated by omitting the plural sign from the combination of substantive and possessive; as, \f-^ their mansion. d^Lil (tularin qonaghl) In the third case, the sign of the plural is used in the corroborative and in the combination ; thus, ijjskji d,lil (dnldrfn qin&qlM) their mansions. A doubt may still be felt, and these distinctions are not always used. The declension of the combination with the possessive of the third person, singular or plural, takes a special form, a ^ being introduced before the prepositions, and the final vowelletter of the original combination suppressed before this C ), when the latter is joined in writing to the combination singular, or does not itself possess a vowel in the combination 88 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. plural. This rule, applied to possessives joined to substan- tives ending respectively in consonants or vowels, acts t h u s : x >/" ^jl^-S, (sL)UJ5, A^ILS , »A^IL5 , ^e-^^-3, ^yJcS ^x» ; x x * ^O x j S O s * ' X ' 'C/ XOx SO x jS' ^ x O x* XO s- + y x ^ s* x /O/ * x x /C/ x X x* ^ X X ' x xx ^ X xO <0/ 8Jklwsjj, ^ M » 8 ) J , ^JJu-^o ; (j?^»^ > ^^SLJ^*}^ 9 *^lj*}s> > • ..O , O CSL^LLJ, ^x ^"V O zO< O XO x 5 X / C ^ i ^ ) x ' When ^ J - i J is an adjective, it remains unchanged, and ' O X * O " ^ means own ; thus, J^L* ^J-L-i (kendt b&b&m) ray own father, \SZjjJtd\j ijXLJ (kendl valldelerlnlz) yowr oww mothers, &c. SECTION V, TAe Demonstratives. These are, y (bu) this, £» (stm) that or jAi's, ^ (6) or J^\ O ./ O O J (61, as in the personal) that, J^>J\ (6-blr) o r ^ J j l (61-blr) the other. They are used as substantives and as adjectives; being declined or invariable, accordingly, like other substantives and O adjectives. O 'I* C x ^ J ^ C^O x ^x- J Thus, L^ULJ y this book, J*\-zS y these books; * OxOx»*0 ^\ J)J\ that other man, J*±\J)J\ J those other men; &c. As substantives, y and j^» are thus declined, something like * i * oJ J y i x o •» the personal j l or J j l : j j (bu), diijj (bunun), o^ (buna), sjjg J (bunda), 3 O xO J C^O J O xO J JJJ (bunu), ^Jjj-j (bundan) ; Jjj-> (bunlar), eJjlSjj (bunlarin), lj>y (bilnlara), w j l ^ (bunlarda), ^J>y (bunlari), ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. OsO s O 3 89 9 O J ^ ^ J L J ^ J (bunlardan) ; jJi, (shu, sometimes written Jj_£, proC J J <, J sO J nouneed sh6l), dii^t (shAnM), &^» (shMa), »jj^» (shunda), J > O -O •» O/O J J^i. (shunu), J\ (A-blrt) its other one, the other one (of the two). I t is then declined O 3 + 3 sO J like all similar combinations : d L ^ j ] , A i ^ j i , ^s^j\9 O sO 3 SO * O sO 3 * so J SO sO 3 SO J J ^i/jK O sO 'O 3 Or it may take either of the two possessive suffixes of the first o J and second persons plural; as, j*ij>j\ (6-blrlmlz), the other one n 3 s^ f of us, d j ^ j l of the other one of us; a/oyjl to the other one of SO SO 3 s* SO 3 you ; ty^iyj>j\ in the other ones of us; ^$y^Jj>^\ the other ones of you; &c. SECTION V I The Interrogates. who ? is always a substantive, and declined as such, singular and plural: ^jfofwhom s O ^ ^ o s O ^s- ? whose ? ±+fto whom ? OSQ sS i±+5 in whom ? ^+5 whom ? &S+.S of or from whom ? J+ZS who, what or which persons ? &c. 90 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. AJ (ne) what ? is generally a substantive, and declined; but it is also used as an adjective, and is then invariable : (*J13AJ (nenln) of what ? *-) (for A)A3, neye) to what ? saw (nede) m what? ^ A J (neyl) wAa* (accus.) ? ^ j j (for ^ A J , neddn) from what ? Jj (forJl«u, neler) what (things)? esJ^S (nelerln) of what (things); &c. tfX (S$n$i vulg. h&ngi) which ? is both substantive and adjective,—declined or invariable accordingly. These three words, as substantives, take the possessive suffixes. Thus, ~+S (klmlm) my who ? ^AJ (nem) my what ? V&jf (kimln) thy who? d^S (nen) thy what? ^Jc$ (q&ngM) its which, which (one) of it ? +j\ •.«.,•> (klmlerim) my what pero - x o c »» sews ? *^ stantives and JrJ Jj* A5 (vulg. ne turlu) what sort ? \ adjectives. SECTION V I I . THERE IS NO RELATIVE The Relative Pronoun. PRONOUN IN TURKISH, though attempts are made to use the Persian relative and conjunction, A-5|kl), as such, in literary composition. junction A_$IS a very different thing. The Turkish con- Its use by Europeans ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 91 peans and others, as a relative pronoun, is greatly to be avoided. This avoidance of all use of the relative pronoun is the prime distinction of Turkish from all Aryan and Semitic tongues. It is the perfection of language. The numerous active and passive participles of the Turkish verb obviate the necessity of a relative. The active par- ticiples take the place of our relative when it is nominative to a verb ; and the passive participles do so when our relative is the accusative, or any indirect object of a verb. (See this explained in the paragraphs on the Participles, in Section V I I I . , on the Verb.) There is a peculiar Turkish relative, however, to which we have no parallel in English,—the suffix S(kl). to nouns and pronouns substantive in two ways. It is attached If the sub- stantive be in the genitive, the combination is a substantive, and indicates that which belongs to (the substantive) ; thus, bb, diiljlj, Ss_fol^ (b^bdninkl) the one which belongs to a (or the) father, {j^JX (bab&minkl) the one which belongs to my father, LAJG^GC (b&bMniiiki) the one belonging to his (or her) father, his father's one; &c. If the substantive be in the locative case, the combination is sometimes a substantive, sometimes an adjective. The substantive combination then indicates that which exists in (the simple substantive) ; the adjective combination expresses the (substantive) which exists 92 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. in (the first substantive). Thus, ^jftxS^ (babamdekl) the thing, the one that exists, that is in (the possession or keeping of) my father, which my father has or holds; JA ^S&J^UU c (babaslndekl illm) the science possessed by his father, that is in his father. The substantive combinations form the plural, and are declined; the adjective combination is invariable. With a noun of place or of time the same particle, ^\, forms a relative combination, substantive or adjective, having relation to the place or time named. In the case of the noun of place, the locative* preposition may also be employed. Thus, ^iU.1 the foot, or lower 'part, S~&i»\ and ^ j ^ l i l that which is at the foot; - L ^ l the evening, {Ss^zj^\ that which was or will be (present) in the evening. SECTION V I I I . The Derivation of the Verb. As a general rule, each primary Turkish verb forms, itself included, a system of twelve affirmative, twelve negative, and twelve impotential verbs, by regular derivation ;—thirty-six in a l l ; one half being verbs active, the other half verbs passive; the active verbs being transitive or intransitive; the passives having for their nominative the direct or the indirect object of the transitive, the indirect object only of the intransitive primitive. In another mode of subdivision, on the other hand, these ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 93 thirty-six verbs divide into two equal classes, in pairs, one of each pair being simple, and the other causative (which is also permissive, as the sense may show). Each simple and causative pair of verbs is either determinate, indeterminate, or reciprocal; so that, by a special division of the same thirty-six, there are twelve determinate, twelve indeterminate, and twelve reciprocal verbs ; thus (giving the imperatives of each, for economy of space):— ACTIVE. CLASSES. TRANS. OR IN TRANS. TRANS. OR INTRANS. INTRANSITIVE. Determinate. 'A > Simple H < £ S *4 > O Causative [Permissive) * Simple Causative {Permissive) * Indeterminate. Reciprocal. (t*p) hick (him); kick. J (tepln) kick about, dance (in pain, with joy, &c). (teplsh) kick mutually one another. jX~J (tepdir) ?na7^ or Ze£ (him) #0 kicked;...kick. jSJ^J (teplndlr) make (him) kick about. *•-*-> (fepmd) Kc& (him) wo£; #zc& wo£. H O Causative (Permissive)' L*J (teplshma) kick not mutually one another. ^ ; ) . ; ; ) (teplndirma) 6^jSl^ (teplshdlrma) **jjJ» (tepdlrma) wa&0 or Z? 7^2 (him) fo make not (him) kick about. make (them) not kick one <£ another mutually. kicked; ...kick. &A6~5 (teplneme) A*A*1J (teplsheme) #e unable to kick (him); ... to kick. be unable to kick about. be unable to kick one another mutually. AASJX^J (tepdlrerne) (tipllmll) Simple } AJL*3 (t^plnllmd) he not kicked. he not kicked about in. i^jSJ (t6pdlr6lm&) Causative \ (Permissive) 1 he not made to he kicked. A*JLJ (t£pll£m&) Simple t+ijXJ (t&plndlrllm&) he not made to he kicked about in. A*ALJ (t£plnll&m&) } he unahle to he kicked. he unahle to he kicked about in. Causative \ {Permissive) 1 (tApdtrflJmA) he unahle to he made to be kicked. i*AjX*3 (t£plndliil£m&) | Reciprocal. J J i i (tiplshll) he mutually kicked in, &c. J ^ j i i (tJplshdlrll) he made to kick mutually one another. ^ 4 (%lshllm4) he not mutually kicked in. A J ; J ^ J (t£plshdlrllm&) he not made to mutually kick one another. | **dltJ (t£plshll£m&) he unahle to he mutually kicked in. \ &*djXtJ (t£plshdlrll£m6) he unahle to he made to he he unable to be made to mutually kick one another. kicked about in. 96 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Remarks on the foregoing Table. The imperative singular is the root, or simplest form in the conjugation, primitive or derivative, of the Turkish verb. This conjugation—unique for all the thirty-six forms, as will be seen further on—consists in adding certain vowels and consonants to the end of this conjugational root. When the conjugational root of the simple affirmative form ends in J , or in a vowel, it forms its passive by adding ^ O J instead of J . O J J Thus : J^> (bul) fnd, dominating) be found; ^ (bulun, the titurft %\$ (qapla) cover, ^%\3 o J J J (qaplan) be J covered; js>j\ (6qu) read, ^jsj) (6qun) be read. In the fore- going case of the vowel-ending, the passive sometimes takes both the £ and the J , the ^ always preceding; thus, J A l S (qaplanil, as &%}*>), be covered, J 5 ^ l (oqunul, as &J>j\) be read. When the root of the simple affirmative has more than one syllable, and ends in J , j , or a vowel, its causative is formed 0 . - o o by adding a letter o in lieu of the syllable ,,>. ^ Thus, JUi (qisal) become shorter, e J U i (qlsalt) make or let (it) become O J O J O O J O J shorter; shorten (it); ^-*^=>jl (uksur) cough, i2>jj*„j\ (uksurt) make or let (him) cough; j-> (suweyle) speak, say, eJuj-*» (stiweylat) make or let (him) speak or say, make or let (it) be spoken or said (by him); jjj\ (oqu.) read, recite, Ojijl (6qut) make or let (it) be read or recited (by him), make (him) read. 97 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. Many simple affirmative verbs ending in consonants also form their causatives in ?, preceded by a servile esere, sometimes written Ja, and even J j , with uturu ; not in . 3 . No rule appears to exist on this subject, and the dictionary alone, o or experience, can help the student in it. drink (it), j ^ \ (Ichlr) or jjg) o Thus, f\ (Ich) (Ichur) make or let (it) be drunk - o < » (by him); o b (bat) sink (thou), J\> (batir) make or let (it) sink, sink (it); J& (qach) flee, escape, jJ& (qachir) make or let (him) flee or escape. When the simple verb, affirmative, negative, or impotential, is transitive, its causative governs the same accusative ; and the nominative to the simple then becomes a dative to the o o x causative. o o o* Thus, -^jLi ^ '* * + o ^ „ (ben an! yazdlm) I wrote it, o * ttJ-V^i & (V^ cr* ( s ^ u ^ band yazdirdin) ZAow madest it to be written by me (thou causedst to me the writing it), thou madest or lettest me write it. When the simple verb is neuter, its nominative becomes the accusative of its causative; as, **jij\ (uyudum) / O JO J J * slept, Ox d j j ^ y I** ^ (san benl uyutdun) thou madest or lettest me eleep. An indefinite series of causatives of every verb may be O O o formed by repeating the causative suffixes, o after ^ , and ..3 o after o . " They are sometimes useful, but are generally used in irony; each augment adds an agent to the chain ; as, j>*}li, H 98 OTTOMAN T U R K I S H GRAMMAR. O XO O x O/OO O x O^O OO O X I3*J^JS\\I , &c.; this last means to cause (a thing) to be caused (by a second) fo fo caused (by a third) to fo written (by a fourth agent). The indeterminate is also called the Reflexive form. two uses. I t has More generally it has the same intransitive sig- nification with the simple form, as to the action, but betokens that this action is then performed without any determinate O /O X exterior object. ^ Thus (sUiJ is, to kick one's feet or heels about as one lies or stands (like a dancer, a man in a passion, a dying animal, & c ) ; j ^ i l ? (baqiumaq) is, to look about, here and there, in a perplexed or inquisitive manner ; &c. But, at other times, this form is transitive, and then indicates that the agent is either the direct or indirect object, also, of the action,—that the act is done to or for the agent's self. Thus, ij^U^i -15 (qilij qush&nmaq) to gird a sword on to one's self; O .»0 Ox OxO < » dUijjl j ! (&v £dlnm£k) to acquire a house for one's self; ,j*jJi»ls (qashinmaq) to scratch one's self (with one's nails) ; dl*ij> o / O ^x- xO (glyinmek) to put on one's clothes, (sUi-S **}-&. (chizma glylnmek) O x ^S x XO to put on boots, ^ i&i)^}^ (chlzmalerlml glylneylm) let me put on my boots; &c. Passive verbs of neuters are defective ; they are conjugated in the third person singular only, and in inflexions over which person and number exercise no influence. They signify, to be such that the neutral action takes place in, to, for, by, on account ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 99 of, &c. (as expressed), something named, as the act of some or any indeterminate agent. Thus, jJ^J &-ij> (buyle teplnllmaz) the act of kicking about is not thus performed, j^S **\)j> (burada teplnllmaz) the act of kicking about is not allowed here; &c. W e have such passive verbs in English; as, to he slept in, to he fought for; &c. The Turkish passive verb always has, inherent in it, the sense of to he —able. Thus, ^ J L S (keslllr) it is cut (often), it will be cut (then), it is cuttable ( a l w a y s ) ; y ^ (yenmaz) it is not eaten (as a rule), it will not he eaten (then), it is not eatahle (either now, or by nature). SECTION I X . The Turkish Conjugation. All Turkish affirmative verbs, active or passive, transitive or intransitive, are conjugated in one and the same invariable manner, modified, as to their servile vowels and consonants, by the laws of class and euphony alone. The negative and impotential verbs differ from the affirmative, as to conjugation, merely in the form of the aorist active participle, and of the analogous aorist tense indicative. So that only one sole con- jugation exists, in reality, in the Turkish language. The conjugation consists of one simple and three complex categories of moods, tenses, numbers, persons, participles, verbal nouns, and gerunds; all four categories, simple and 100 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. complex, being fundamentally alike, but each modified in a certain special manner, to express a modified variation of the action. Each category has six moods : the imperative, indicative, necessitative, optative (also subjunctive), conditional, and infinitive. The imperative mood has one tense, the future. The indicative has eight tenses, in four pairs ; the present and imperfect; the aorist and past; the perfect and pluperfect; the future and past future. The necessitative, optative, and conditional, have one pair each, the aorist and past. The infinitive has but one tense, the present. Each category has five active participles; the present (which is the general active participle, applicable, in one sense, to any time, past, present, or future), the aorist, the past, the perfect, and the future. In Turkish, the present or active, the perfect or passive, are not confused together as in European languages ; each is distinct in form and in sense, and is different from the gerund in form, as it is, in grammar and in sense, different from the verbal noun. T h e active participles of the passive verbs denote the direct recipients of the action of verbs transitive; the passive participles of the same apply to the indirect objects thereof. The active participles of the passives of intransitives denote the 101 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. indirect objects of the intransitive action ; the passive participles of such passives are not in use. Between the five active and two passive participles of each category, a Turkish conjugation thus furnishes twenty-eight participles for every verb, primitive or derivative. By the use of these numerous participles, it entirely avoids all necessity for a relative pronoun. The present active participle adds an ustun and the letters o o ^ 1 , or only the letter ^ , to the root that ends in a consonant; o o the aorist adds a vowel and the letters J , or only the letter^,, o o o with an ustun, ^ with an uturu, a n d ^ only (or sometimes^) with an esere, for which no rale can be given; the past adds o iJL* (mlsh, mish) to all roots, whatever their ending; as the o o perfect adds ista (dik) or j p (dlq). Of The future adds an ustun < * and the letters dc*» (&j&k) or j&.s (&j&q) to consonantal roots, O f f Of f and CSUAJ or J£>AJ , with ustun, to vowel roots, including the negatives and impotentials. Thus, ^ O* (tepan), J^J f (qiran) O f f are present active participles; as, ^ T (teplnan), ^ ^ J (teplshan), ^%S (tepllan), ^%.J (teplnllan), and J%2*J (teplshllan), are those of the simple affirmative derivatives. o o The causatives o o in j ^ and in J,^ add the ustun and ^\; while those in o change ' O O f Of O fO it into ^ before the letters , j l ; thus, &\J±J (tepdlran), O f Of (oturdan), J%jS^ O f (tepdlk) ; f f O (tepdlrllan), &c.; O * Of O yU+i (tepmlsh) ; sfOf (*UA-J (tepejek), (SUA-**? (tepmey&jek), 3 J 0\^j\ O f Of djj ff ff eU^au) 102 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. (tepemeyejek), the final s of the negative particle A* being elided as useless. When the root ends with a vowel, as is the case with all the negatives and impotentiais, the syllable ^G (yan, yan) is added in the present participle, the final & or ^ of the root being suppressed, and by some even the I ; but the « is kept intact. -cjL«duJ Thus, (JIJ^JIS or ^jUbls (qaplayan), ^L^J (tepmeyan), (teplnemeyan), &\*jjji (yuruyan), ^Ij^l (6quy&n). The Turkish present active participle, in colloquial language, as a remanet from eastern Turkish, takes after it the preposition t± de, da, to form an adverb of past or future time; as, jjjjui (gldande) when (I, thou, &c.) went, or shall go. The aorist active participle, of the same form as the third person singular of the aorist tense of the indicative, always o o + ends in a letter . in affirmatives, and in the syllable j - o (maz) in negatives and impotentiais. Thus, ^ J (teper), j+J (tepmaz), U J J (tepemez). In the simple affirmative, the vowel added to the last cono sonant of the root, to which the final j is then appended, cannot be defined by rule. Of course, it must be hard or soft according to the dominant in the root; but different verbs have us tun, others esere, others again tituru, for their vowel; and with the ustun, all hard verbs add I, as do some soft verbs ; while other soft verbs dispense with this letter. Thus ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. o *• o * o J S we have: J\^J (qirar), jxS o . -»^ jfi (gelur, vulg. gellr), j 103 * ( g l d e r ) , ^ y U (sanur, vulg. sanir), o ^ (slylrir). The simple reflexive forms its aorist in ftturu and ^ (gene- o rally pronounced as esere and^j). The simple reciprocal does O 3 " the same. We have, therefore, jyjj 0 3* (teplnur, vulg. t£plnir), ' jy2~> (teplshur, vulg. teplshlr). All the simple and causative O J passives follow this rule; thus, JJ-L-J (teplnllur, t&plnlllr), jj£J x O J < (tepllur, teplllr), jj-k-*-> (teplshllur, teplshlllr) ; ^ i ^ j j i (tep- dlrlllr), jjijX~> ( t e p l n d l r l l l i ^ ^ j l ^ j i i (tepishdlrlllr). I t will be observed that a vowel ^ is intercalated before the J in these words. This is a mechanical rule. The preceding j is a letter that does not join on to its follower; this is the sole reason for the addition of that ^ , when the following J has a vowel. The same rule is applied by many to the . of the o • causative ,.>, in like cases ; that is, when it has its vowel, as it always has in the aorist. O J O' The words above given may O J O * O J o * therefore be written, jjtj,±+>, jjtj.±~> ? jj*jb>££ ; but this has no effect on the pronunciation. The aorist passive participle has the same form as the active perfect, and the future passive is identical in form with the future active: is)jJ (tepdlk) ; ISUJJ (tepejek). There are three verbal nouns ; the present or general, formed by adding A* (me, ma) to the root, exactly like the negative imperative ; the perfect, identical in form with the 104 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. perfect active and aorist passive participles ; and the future, identical with the two future participles. d J J (tepdlk); eUAJ (tepejek). Thus, &+J (tepme); The form *•*> (tepme) of the present verbal noun is also that of a verbal adjective passive, signifying done, made, effected as the result of (the action of the verb); thus, A*J , as such adjective, means caused by a kick or kicks. This derivative of the transitive verb active simple and causative can also take the passive sense; thus, A*15 (kesme), which naturally means an act of cutting, often means also an act of being cut; as, fjV^S ^LiS cut. (kesmesl qolay) it is easily I t is also much used as a passive adjective when the verb is transitive ; as, ^jy 6+~S 6as?\ (Inje kesme tutan) finely cut tobacco; and as an active adjective when the verb is intransitive ; as, JU AJU ^\Ai (babadan qalma mal) property remaining from (one's) father. Leaving the gerunds for the present, we may now inquire into the mode of formation of the tenses of each mood. But before doing so, we must indicate the differences that serve clearly to distinguish the active participles, the passive paro o ticiples, and the verbal nouns, of the two forms in (•***? art thou he who is to go ? Thirdly, the passive participle always qualifies the name of the direct object, or of the indirect object, of the action, and is always accompanied by a possessive pronoun indicating the actor of that action. The first of these two facts distinguishes the passive participle from the verbal noun; the second distinguishes it from the active participle of the same form. Thus, C-JI^J **i*yj\ (oqudughum kitab) the hook which I read (now or formerly); L^\J£ JK»UJSJ\ (6quyajaghim kitab) the book which I am going to read. direct object qualified. These are instances of the So, ^Uj JLJI±JSJ\ (6quduglrum zeman) the time in which (i.e. when) I read; and ,jJls? ^i^aajSjl ^^S (kltabl iquyajaghlm mejlls) the meeting in which I am going to read the book, are instances of indirect objects; as is also atjl Ji>.vyJ\ (uyuyajaghlm 6da) the room in which I am going to sleep. As instances of the substantival nature of the verbal noun?, let us take, ^ ^ 5 o ^ j 5 ,*».*& (teplyor). I t indi- ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 107 cates a present action (actual or habitual) ; he is kicking (now); he now habitually (jjAjjtJ kicks. Add the auxiliary ^j±)\ to this, (teplyor Idl), and it forms the imperfect, he was kick- ing (then). A final o more frequently changes to ^ ; as, dL*ii, j£±S (gldlyor); <&Ual, jjiJJ>1 (edlyir); &c. The aorist indicative varies in form of the servile syllable, but always ends in j in the affirmatives, and in \* (mez, maz) in the negatives and impotentials, being identical with the active aorist participle. It indicates a present habit (not a present action), or a future assurance, a future promise, as the context or circumstances may require. Thus, ^ J (teper) he O x kicks; he shall or will kick; j\Js (qirar) he breaks; he shall or O t will break; jjj$. he reads; J O 3 * (yurur) he walks; he will read; JJto\ he will walk ; jj$j\ (oqur) (IsMr) he bites; he will bite; \+J (tepmaz) he does not kick ; he will not kick; he cannot kick. The auxiliary ^ J J I , added to this, forms the past tense (showing a past habit, or an unfulfilled (jsA^J (tepemez) condition); (teper Idl) he used to kick; he would kick (if he could);. he would have kicked (had he been able); in which two last senses, the expression is a virtual negative : he kicks not, because he is not able; he did not kick, because he was not able ; ijSi]j*J> (tepmaz Idl) he used not to kick; he would not kick (if he could); he would not have kicked (had he been able); \£±*\j*±* (tepemez idl) Tie used not to be able to kick; he would 108 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. not be able to kick (if so and so); he would not have been able to kick (had not so and so); &c. The perfect indicative is formed by adding the syllable (dl, di), in all cases, to the root. ^ I t is used in a determinate, and also in an indeterminate past sense, referring the action to Ox a given past time, or to all past time. Thus, (jxS (tepdl) he kicked (then) ; he has kicked (without defining when). Add the auxiliary \ ij±J (tepdl Ox y Ox Idl), or .&+> he is about to o x kicky he is going to kick; o x x„ox dL^A-*J he is not going to kick ; xx xx .A~odu) he will not be able to kick. Add the auxiliary ^ j j l , o , ^x and the past future results ^$±A (*UAJ he was going to kick, Ox ^ ^/O/ ij±A d > ^ ^ Ox xx x.» he was not going to kick; tjsA d^^dJi he was unable to be about to kick. Final o in the root generally changes to a, and a final vowel requires the addition of a conO x x Ox x - > 4 sonant ^ : dUaJj), C s U ^ j j . The aorist necessitative is formed by adding the syllables jL (meli, mali) to the root. I t indicates a present duty to perform a future act; and corresponds with our must or ought ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. Thus, j L J he must kick, he ought to kick; 109 JL©A*J he must not kick, he ought not to kick ; JLLAJ" he ought not to be able to kick. With the auxiliary \, we have the past necessitative, ^ X J I JJ*J he ought to have kicked, he should have kicked; ij±A ^jLLJ he ought not to have kicked; ^ J J ! J L L A J he ought not to have been able to kick. The aorist optative is formed by adding an ustuu and vowel 5 to a consonantal root, or a syllable *J (ye, yi) to a vowel root. Sometimes 1 is used in place of ». The tense is a quasi-imperative, implying optation, or it is a subjunctive. Thus, *J (tepe) let him kick, may he kick; (that) he may kick; A**J (tepmeye, with suppression of the s of the negation) let him not kick, may he not kick; (that) he may not kick; A-*A*> (tepemeye) may he not be able to kick; (that) he may not be able to kick. Add now the auxiliary ^j^A, and we form the past tense, a virtual negative, expressive of regret; thus, ijxA AJ (tepe Idl, more frequently written and pronounced \jxJ tepeydi) had he kicked, if he had kicked; kicked; 0 that he had ^ J ^ A ^ J (tepmeyeydl) had he not kicked, if he had not kicked; 0 that he had not kicked; ^ j - ^ a J (tep&meyeydl) had he not been able to kick, if he had not been able to kick; 0 that he had not been able to kick. The aorist conditional is formed by adding the syllable **» (se, sa) to any root, consonantal or vowel. This performs the 110 OTTOMAN T U R K I S H GRAMMAR. function of our conjunction if in appearance; but, as^j£»l (eyer), if can be placed before it, it really is a subjunctive tense-ending. As a present, it admits the possibility of the action ; as a future, it virtually denies the occurrence. Thus, A~J (tepse) if he Icicle, if he were to kick; a~»J (tepmese, the & of negation elided) if he kick not, were he not to kick; A~+*&J (tepemese) should he not be able to kick. is desiderative, 0 that he kick! &c. Sometimes it With ^A>I added, we have the past conditional, which is always a virtual negative. Thus, (j****** (tepseydl, for ^ J J U - J ) had he kicked, if he had kicked; ^ A , ^ , , , ) (tepmeseydl) had he not kicked; ^ A ^ d,.,„> (tepemeseydl) had he not been able to kick. The present of the infinitive is formed by adding dU (mek) or j * (maq) to any root. (q&plamaq) to cover. Thus, (&LJ (tepmek) to kick; j*5Us The negative and impotential are fre- quently written with \, and sometimes without a vowel-letter to end the root; as, isLLJ, &++J (tepm&mek), for dua^J ; O x / / / C x O x / / / x x/ O . / ' O / isLUaJ, d***J (tepememek), for dloA*AJ ; JJ (tepub qirar) he kicks and breaks, will kick and break (it) ; ory kicking (it), he will break (it). Conversationally, this gerund is pronounced with o esere in lieu of dturu ; and with p in place of c-»; as, teplp, qirip, &c. The second gerund is formed by adding ustun, and the letters t^s (erek) or j ^ s (araq),to a consonantal root, d,«u (yerek) or J5,AJ (yaritq) to a vowel-root. I t is sometimes used in lieu of the first gerund, to obviate its too frequent recurrence; but its distinctive use is to indicate that, of two contemporary sustained actions expressed, the one, subsidiary, accompanies the other. Thus, ^JO-S <2)jdJ» kicking, he went off; i. e., he 112 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Ox Cx x J went off, kicking away (all the time) ; fj& d ^ ^ g he came, laughing (all the time). The third gerund, in ASS (tnje, inja), after a consonant, or A5& (ylnje, yinja) after a vowel, and the fourth (used in writing O x Ox only, and much more rarely), in d^s (Ijek) or j ^ s (ijaq) after C x OX a consonant, disji (yijek) or j ^ j i (y^jaq) after a vowel, has the sense that its action is to be a kind of signal for the occurrence of the other expressed in the sentence ; it may, then, be rendered by our on ... (with a gerund), also by our as soon as ... (with a verb). Thus, ^ A J A ^ ^ ( g y u r u n j e tepdl) on seeing (him), he kicked (him) ; AIJI *jUl J i ^ l ^\j (vasll 61ijaq, ma'lum 61a) on reaching (as soon as it reaches), fo (it) known (that ). The fifth gerund is identical in form with the aorist optative, repeated. I t expresses repetition of one act as a means to the performance of a second. Thus, (j±j3 AJ AJ (tepe tepe qirdi), kicking, (and) kicking (it), he broke (it). o The sixth gerund is the infinitive with esere and ^ added; the Persian d softened into Turkish eJ (y value), and the into c . j I t expresses the verbal reason precedent for the O second action. O x Ox Thus, fJ^Li ^ O yS X Ox J t^X »>> j \ Atf kicking, I fled; i. e., because he kicked, I fled. The seventh gerund expresses the beginning of a time commencing with the occurrence of an action and lasting until 113 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. now, during which another action has repeatedly or continuously occurred ; it is equivalent to our ever since In form it is the fifth gerund (not repeated) with the syllable J (lu) or J (li) added to it. Thus, jjila$\ JlaJ (tepelu aqsayir) ever since he kicked, he has limped. The causal gerund-like locution is equivalent to the sixth gerund in sense. It is the infinitive, with its final consonant softened down, and with the preposition ^ by my kicking, I kicking. There is another form into which this idea is cast, and in which a perfect verbal noun, with a suffixed possessive pronoun indicative of the agent, and the ablative preposition (dan) are employed. Thus, ^JW*JX_J>_*J (tepdlylmddn) by my (past) act of kicking. ijxStS^sJ ^ This pronoun varies as is required: (tepdiylndan) by thy act of kicking; &c. The gerund-like locution of verbal, i. e., of actional proportion is formed of the perfect active participle, with the adverbial suffix of manner, ^ (je, ja), added to it. I t defines a duration of time for two concurrent actions, the first circumscribing that duration for the continued or repeated occurrence O J O * of the other; as, o^W ^ o , *S" O •» O S **»*+> ^ (hen tepdlkje, san tut) while I kick, so long as I kick, do thou hold (him). I t sometimes 114 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. expresses the rate (proportion) of rapidity of the two actions \ O J ' " ^ 0^~ O O^ as, jy^kj>\ **?±s* u>5j (waqt gechdlkje, Irlleshlr) as time goes by, it grows large (larger). The six verbal times indicated, in reference to an action, are the following: 1, the time before the action; 2, the time when the action is just about to occur; 3, the time while the action occurs ; 4, the time when it occurred; 5, the time just when it has occurred ; 6, the time after its occurrence. The first is the present verbal noun in the ablative; as, ^x+J (tepmeden), to which, for precision's sake, the adverb Jjl (avval) or *ji* (muqaddam), anteriorly, is subjoined. The expression Jjl ^IA+J (or Jjl ^jJ^Ji), then, means anteriorly to (earlier than) the action of kicking; i.e., before kicking. Sometimes this is vulgarly expressed as Jjl &$•*> before (the agent) kicks not; i. e., while (as yet) he has (or had) not kicked. The second gerund-like locution of time is the future active participle with the auxiliary gerund O IK* o + L ^=o1 (Iken), during, +, added to i t ; thus, ^ p o l SJUAJ during (the time of being) about to kick; i. e , when just about to kick. The third is the aorist active participle with the same addition : Cj-5C^ J2 during (the time of being) kicking; i. e., while kicking. The fourth is the perfect verbal noun or active participle, put in the locative (of time). I t may be used impersonally, ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 115 'with no addition in i t ; and it may be used, for precision, with the possessive pronoun of the agent between the verbal noun and the preposition. In the former case, the verbal derivative is possibly a participle ; in the latter, it is doubtlessly the verbal noun. Thus, *±S±^ ^ kicked; or *±£±sJ ^ when I (became) one who has when I (performed) my (past) act of kicking; i. e., when I kicked. The fifth is the past active participle with the auxiliary ^ ^ X J ! ; as, {^S^A u^UJ during (this time of the condition of) having kicked; i.e., now that kicking has occurred, since (J, &c.) have kicked. The sixth is the perfect verbal noun in the ablative (of time), followed by the adverb *>jC* (s6nra, s6ra), after; if~* yS&Ji (tepdlkdan s6r&) after the act of kicking. thus, The possessive pronouns may be introduced into this locution before the preposition; as, a^X-* y±&i±$ (tepdlylmdan s6ra) after my action of kicking. SECTION X. The Numbers and Persons of the Verb, In all the tenses the first person singular is expressed by o the personal suffix * added to the verb, with esere given to the tense-root, when this is a consonant; and suppressing the final fj of the tense-root where it occurs ; adding one where wanted. 116 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. o I t is wanting in the imperative. •* * Thus : * i>*i-J (teplyirim) I am kicking; ^SAJJ+JS (teply6r-ldlm) I was kicking; ^ J (teperlm) I kick; I shall or will kick ; A±>)J£ (teper-ldlm) I used to ° z" kick; I would hick; I would have kicked; +x3 (tepdlm) / ° c" ° °" kicked ; I did kick ; I have kicked; +£>_±J (tepdidlm) or ^ J J I *JJI (tepdlm-ldl) / had kicked; ,%£-&•**> (tepejeylm) I am going to kick; O ° x - *» ^x O J/O/ * *JJ\_&.AJ (tepejekdlm) I was going to kick ; *jji*J (tepmellylm) O J S Ox I must kick; ^jjl jU J (tepmell-ldlm) i" should have kicked, o ,* ought to have kicked; o o xx *AJ (tepem) that I may kick; pS-^-J 0 , 0 * o o * ex (tepeydlm) that I had kicked; +*~J (tepsem) if I kick ; *^~~J (tepseydlm) * / / had kicked. The second person singular, in all the tenses in (j*, is formed by changing the vowel jjz£ (teplyorsin), \j^J (tepersln), V^JZ^AJ £^*IJUJ (tepmellsln), C ^ . A J (tepesln). Thus, (tepejeksln) ; The first person plural, likewise, in all the tenses in ^5.3, is ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 117 formed by changing the vowel ^ into Arabic d (k value); excepting that of the perfect, which, in hard words, always O O ° forms this person in ^> tepejekdlk), djj»l J Q (tepm&ll-ldlk), djujJ (tepeydlk), d j ^ J (t£pseydlk). With a hard word like j ^ G (baqmaq), the perfect forms jpiU (bHqdiq). If this per- son in the past future indicative, in the past optative, and in the past conditional, is used in the contracted form, these also, O O O O " - X with hard words, use j instead of d ; as, J J ^ A S U O C O , (baqajagh- O' O * diq), j j J J b (baqaydiq), (baqallm), JtJkj** (suweyO + J J O ' J J leyellm), JjijSjl (6quyallm, for J*ijj\). In hard words, the o present of the conditional forms this person with j ; also ; as, O x O # » O ^ O ^ O > J J jA-Jb (baqsaq, sometimes written ,J-J1J), J , with £ser& added to the final consonant of the tense-root of the indicatives, and o with that vowel given to the ij of ji in the necessitative ; 118 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. thus, jjx+i (teplyirlz), j ^ (teperlz), J«X_».AJ (tepejeylz, the O J/o/ Arabic d changed into Turkish d , y value), J>jL*> (tepmSliyiz). In hard words, the future indicative is in c (softened j ) , with esere before the final j ; as, J«*ASb (baqajaghiz). The second person plural, again, in all the tenses in ^ , is formed in \S±± (dlnlz ; which is hard in the perfect of hard words, d!xi!z). Thus, J _ X J O ^ J (teply6rdlnlz), JSJ^^J (teper- dlnlz), J _ X J O J (tepdlniz), yS*-y£>\ (bdqdinfz), J-X-JJJ>JJ (tepdidlnlz), jS^jsS^s^iJ JSJXJ (tepejey dlnlz), ^-XJJM JUJ (tepmell-ldlnlz), (tepeydlnlz), JSJXU~J o o (tepsey dlnlz). The imperative ^ has two forms, in d and i n j J , both preceded by esere, and a consonant ^ in vowel-roots ; as, dLJ (tepln), jS (teplnlz, written ako }S-Jf) ; dsb (baqlii), jSj\> (baqiniz); d b i L U (qaplayln), jS^iyj\ (6quyuMz ; the uturu dominating). All the other tenses form it in j_X_«> (slnlz, sfnfz), except the present conditional, which has ustun for its first vowel, often o ^ + written J-SA-* (sanlz, sanlz, to distinguish it better). jJs^jyJ (tepiyorslnlz), ^S^J (tepersliilz), J \ « * X ^ A J (tepejek- slnlz; hard in hard words, j-X~i»A$b baqajaqsiniz), (tepmellslnlz), yS^dJ Thus, jS^*JuJ (tepeslnlz; hard in hard words, ^X*»ASC baqasln!z),jjA^' (tepsenlz; hard in hard words,j - W s b baqsdniz). The third person plural is formed from the same person of ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 119 the singular, with the syllable^ (ler, lar) added. Thus, Jjj~~> (tepstnler); j £ ^ J (teplyArlar), °Jl^ (teperler), J L J 2 ? (tepdller), J&>.AJ (tepejekler), Jjj+j (tepseler). (tepmeliler), ^ J j J (tepeler), J&~J The tenses in ^ J J I may be formed in this way, ijsA becoming J±±A (idller); or, the plural sign may be given to the radical element, and l be kept unchanged; as, {jSiJJjfJ or Jj&) jpj; and so throughout, except the past optative, which prefers J±$. SECTION XL Of the Complex Categories, The Complex Categories of every Turkish verb, active or passive, transitive or intransitive, affirmative, negative, or impotential, are formed, even as to their roots, with an auxiliary o < o J verb, (teper illyir Idlm) I was continually kicking. Aorist. o-» J J os* *j$j\jf (teper ilurAm) I am continually kicking; I shall be ever kicking. Past. j»jjl ,Jij\ jJ> (teper 61ur Idlm) I used to be always kicking ; I would be, or Would have been, always kicking. 122 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Perfect, ^ j j j l ^ (teper 61dAm) I became a constant kicker. Pluperfect. o i q S o*' (^JJI pjJjl^-> (teper oldftm Idl) I had been or become a constant kicker. Future. j^>JjljJ (teper olajaghim) I am about to become a constant kicker. Future Past. +±i>>Jjl^J (teper olajaghdim) I was about to become a constant kicker. Necessitative. Aorist. ^JUjl^Jf (teper ilmaiijim) I must be, or become, a constant kicker. Past. AJJI^LJJI^ (teper olmaiiyldlm) I ought to have been a constant kicker. Optative. Aorist. ^jjjl^j (teper 6laylm) That I may be a constant kicker. Past. I j J j i J j (teper Alaydlm) That I had been a constant kicker. ACCIDENCE OH ETYMOLOGY. 123 Conditional. Aorist. o * o J o++ +*+Jj\jJ (teper 6lsam) Were I, should I become, a constant kicker. Past. O CO J 0+* ^JJ^JJI^J (teper 61saydlm) Had I been a constant kicker. Active Participles. Present. O " J 0«.»» &tyj£ (t£per 6lan) Who or which is, was, will be, a constant kicker. Aorist* O J $ O** jjj\j*> (teper 61ur) (perhaps unused, as a cacophony.) Past. t r * b W (teper ilmush) Who has been a constant kicker. Perfect. OiO J O " JJJJI^J (teper 61d4q) ja.A!jl jj (teper ilajaq) Who was a constant kicker. Future. Who is to be a constant kicker. Passive Participles. Aorist. o jo J-' o++ JJJJI^J (teper ildftq) Who or which (a kicker) has constantly kicked. 124 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Future. Or * J O,* &?AJ\JJ (teper ilajaq) Who, which (I, &c.) am about constantly to kick. Verbal Nouns. Present. *>0 J 0,+ AJJ\JJ (teper 61ma) The act of being (at any time) a constant kicker. Perfect. O JO J O" j j j j l ^ (teper olduq) The act of having been (then) a constant kicker. Future. O + * J O** (ja-JjI^J (teper ilajaq) The act of being about (now) to become (hereafter) a constant kicker. Gerunds. O J J O" 1st. S i ^ j W ( ^ P ^ r ol4p) Being a constant (and ). 2nd. ^ A J J I ^ J (teper olaraq) Continuing to be a constant kicker (so and so also occurs). 3rd. **P)\j£ (teper olunja) "<- i J 4th. or* J ^ j l ^ ' (teper dlljaq) kicker N /As soon as becomes r (became, will become) a J constant kicker, ...... ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 5th. Jjl AJJ! JZ (teper 61a 61a) 125 By continually being a constant kicker, 6th. ^^iJjl^Ji (teper 61maghin) By reason of being a constant kicker, J 4 ? W 0^P^ r 61ali) 7th. SECTION X I I I . Ever since became (has been) a constant kicker, The Second Complex Category. Infinitive. Present. j\ JZ-+? (tepmlsh Amrdum) I should have kicked. Perfect. *jjjl IJL+J (tepmlsh oldum) I became one who had kicked, I had kicked. Pluperfect. JO J O O, ^ j j l *JJJ! jji**) (tepmlsh 61dAm idl) I had become one who has kicked. Future. o <» x •» o o«» j»i^Jjl ijUJ (tepmlsh Alajaghim) I am about becoming one who has kicked; I am going to have kicked. Future Past. O O * * J O O* «»Jjlj>^^,j£**>(t6piiilsh olajaq Idlm) I was about kicked. to have Necessitative. Aorist. (•ijQjl u W (tipmfah Almaliyim) I must (now) have kicked (then). Past. ^ J J I J U J I yj*+* (tepmlsh Almally Idlm) I must (then) have (already) kicked (before). Optative. Aorist. ^ J J iJUJ (tepmlsh olayim, AAJJ) 61am) That I may have kicked. ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGT. 127 Past. O O, J O C *±Jj\ Ju*> (tepmlsh Alaydlm) That I had kicked. Conditional. Aorist. O 'O^ J O c* +&~3j\ IJL+J (tepmlsh Alsam, ~Jj\) Had I kicked (then). Past. o o «»o > ls^jj\ o o«» yjUf (tepmlsh Alsaydlm) Had I (already) kicked (before then). Active Participles. Present. J)lj\ j,*»J (tepmlsh Alan) Who has (already) kicked. Aorist. O J J jjj\ O O^ JU+> (tepnilsh Alur) Who will have (already) kicked. Past and Perfect, perhaps not used. Future* j>>*Jjl JJ^UJ (tApmlsh Alajaq) Who will become one who has kicked. Passive Participles. Aorist. jfjjjl yi^J (tepmlsh AldAq) Which (a kicker) had (already) kicked. 128 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Future, jj*Jjl {JUJ (tepmlsh olajaq) Which (a kicker) will hare kicked. Verbal Nouns. Present. dJJ\ (jS^J (tepmlsh 6lma) The (present state of) having (already) kicked. Perfect. j j L i J * J 6* o 5th. Jjl J J \ JL+*J (tepmtsh 61a 61a) By continuing to have kicked, .*... 6th. u « J j l ... ( ... 6lm&ghin) By reason of kicked, .... 7th. je-JJjt ••• ( ••• ol^O SECTION XIV. 129 having Since — became one who had kicked, .... The Third Complex Category. Infinitive. Present. J j j l d b . ^ (tip^jik 61maq) To be about to kick (ready to kick). Imperative. Future. Jjl dUaJ (tepejek 61) Be thou about to kick. Indicative. Present. O J J O X ,+ j^jJjl CiU*J (tepejek 6Uy6rim) I am (often) on the point of kicking; I become on the point .... Imperfect, ^ j j j ^ j j l d i a J (tepejek 6Hy6r Idlra) I was (often) on the point .... Aorist. O i i l Os +jjLj\ C*UAJ (tepejek 6lurum) I am (habitually), I shall be (then) on the point ... 130 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Past, o jo J J o jo J J a o> *.» **jjj\ *&>•*£ (tepejek olurd&m) Perfect. fjJji d i ^ (tepejek ildum) I used (habitually) ; I should be (then) on the point .... I was (then) on the point .... Pluperfect. OJO J O «» ^jjl ^JJJ! (*U.AJ (tepejek oldAm idl) I had been (before then) on the point.... Future and Future Past. J^Aj\ d i i i j (tepejek ilajaghlm) ^ »'" * I Not used, as being caco*Ji>Jjl i2U*o O ^ P ^ k 6lajaghdim)J ^ Aorist. *£jLl/ .A^ (tepejek 6lmdliyim) I must be on point .... the Past. /O J O * *' *jjl jUjl (tepejek ilmaliyldlm) I ought to have been on the point .... Optative. Aorist. O * J O + J%AJJ1 e U ^ j (tepejek olam) That I may be on the point .... 131 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGT. Past. fjjjl C^UAJ (tepejek olaydim) That I had been on the point .... Conditional. Aorist. AA-JJI CfcUaJ (tepejek ilsa'm) Were I to be or become on the point .... Past. *jlJ«l CSJ^AJI (tepejek olsaydlm) Had I been on the point .... Active Participles, Present. Ji)\ db-aJ (tepejek 61dn) Who or which is or becomes on the point .... Aorist. jjj\ db-ai (t£p&jek 6lnr) Who or which is (naturally) or will be (some time) on. the point «... Past and Perfect. J%,\ £ £ ( t e p ^ k olmish) j ^^-(tep^koldAq) W h o ) w which hag been or was (then) on the point.... Future. j v J j l «^>**J (tepejek olaj&q) Not used) as being cacophonous* 132 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Passive Participles. Aorist. jpJ^I ^ U A J (tepejek ildAq) Which (a kicker) was on the point .... Future. Cacophonous ; not used. Verbal Nouns. Present. AJJI (SUAJ (tepejek Alma) The act of being or becoming (at any time) on the point.... Perfect. o Jo J +* o* JJJJI di>aJ (tepejek 6lduq) The past act or state of being (then) on the point .... Future. Cacophonous ; not used. Gerunds. 1st. I->JJJ\ (SUAJ (tepejek 6lup) Being about (and ....) 2nd. j^Jjl ... ( ... olaraq) Continuing to be about to kick (and ....) 3rd. ... ( ... ilunja) As soon «,s ( — is, was, will be) about to kick, A-S^JI O^ I i 4th. . ^ ^ 1 ... Cacophonous. to kick 133 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGT. 5th. ijj\ Aj\ &?**> (tepejek 6la 61a) O 6th. By continuing to be about to kick, .... /O J tyoeJj! ..* ( ... 6lmaghin) By reason about .... 7th. J A J ^ ... ( ••• ilall) SECTION XV. of being Ever since — became on the point .... The Combined (true Turkish) Conjugation. Infinitive, O / C O/O J O / / OX Present O/O j C J O'" O Ox O Ox o ox J j j l eU^j Imperative, O J O J Future, O X Indicative. Present. o c J * J J,J-J i " °'» ? ° J "* O J x Imperf. \S*jjs£ Aorist. jJ o J Past. ij$j3 Ox* Perfect. ^jj O x JO J o J -» J tf^jl ^JJJJ Future. «UAJ O * J JO J J FutPast^jSo.^ Jo J J J J JO J JO •» tfjjt... J JO 3 Ox X J J JO J V^JJJJJ! J •. JO J tfjfcjjjl ... Ox x J (not used) x^ ° x ' xx o ... ^ j j j j j l .... Piuperf. J &iaU - Ox - , x „ - J Ox x J (not used) „„ 134 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. " Necessitative. * O J Aorist. j . !•>.) j-LJjl^J x ox Fast. .OJII i , U i 4* + JAJJ\ +o J JUS >o J *X ' + " X x> xo J ^ J J J J J J . . . (^JJIJUJI * Ox j - L J j l &*&+> ..» (^JJIJUJI ^ " + ' Optative. O •J Aorist. Past. AJJI^ V AJJI U Ox 1»J Aj\ <&»&+> tfiJjl Ij±m+-*J ... Conditional. x O X Aorist. x o J o x x o o* + o J V x O -» O x^ Ox O J O^O O xO J J Fast. (^XMJJI Active 0 <•<» xx * ^ J ' *-*T"v O x«* o ... Participles. x j o xx o *j •* o e> O -. J O x ^x Fresent. o xx O J J O J O J 3 Aorist > ^ 1 O Ox* Fast. OJO ^UJjl ... o o> ' Perfect. O Jo J * ' j j l j ! ... o<» xx O x ... OJo J y x J (not used) o jo OJ O J JJJJI O X x j ... J (wo* used) Future* Passive Participles. OJO Aorist. x r\ Future. J O XX O JO J O Ox OJO J Ox x-» dJ> CJO ... J J J ^ I ... x J (J*^* "•' (not used.) - .. .Gerunds. O O Jx J J o O^x J J o O C ^ J O x xx 1st. ^w 2nd. x° - 3rd. O 4th. ' <• **x x,» 5th. X •> OX X J Ox x J XC, jyljl J V ^x- /O* 6th. ^ 1 . . . ^ 1 &fy ... &ij ... ... Ox Ox • J ij/i j/> O xO J ... xO 1 J x„ V O C J j j j l ... JJUJ! * O ... XO J 1 J &p ... jj/l Jjl ... O XO J • 7th. SECTION XYL ^i... j j / l ... xJ4>« - The Negative and Impotential Conjugations. The Negative and Impotential Conjugations, twenty-four in number to each simple verb, as a general rule, are formed precisely on the lines of the simple affirmative conjugation in its four categories, as above given, with the exception of the aorist of the indicative, as to its root-word of the third person 136 OTTOMAN TUEKISH GRAMMAR. singular, and the corresponding aorist active participle, which ox o end in J* (maz), instead of the final . of the aflBrmative. Infinitive. Present. * ° " O X- "VOx Ox x xx x x "*• U - ; LdJl '^^ Imperative. Future. O x c O J O/O/ J O XOx O J Ox X«»Ox A40 ^ xx O' OX xx XX XX ...^J^UAJ A*dJ Indicative. Present. O J O J Ox •> O x o x O J J O «"Ox O J J O x - xx<>" J*2 O J O Ox •'x xx x O * xx •*' xx . . . (£UjuAdU> . . . JJIOUAJ Imperfect. JO J J OxOx JO J J O xOx JO J J Ox x x C O x *»^ ... ... j*&*> Aorist. O J J O'O x O J J O xOx O J J O * / ' O / xA'xV Ox 'X O X XX . . . fji+U&J . . . db.A-xdJ ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 137 Past. oxOx JO JO i J O / O / OX 3 J O ,* JO J J ,o* o xxOx - xx- . . . (StUjUAjJ ... > A J VfJ>*f OS Perfect. JO J J O J OxOx xox Ox x xx O xOx » : » • JC J O <* xXOX" *, ... dc^j^*jJi Pluperfect. O J i£±yy*i (^JjjJjl^O O -Ox ) J O , - »OX j^^jJj^ ^JIAWJ x x ' ... (^JjJuoAJ J*AJ . • ^^UAJ * ~V ... (^^.A^AJ Future. O «. . / O / O * x J O -O x Ox x J -Ox O (not used) Ox X- *, ... VoA*> Ox • • • .JIAIAA*) x J0,0- (not used) Future Past. Ox"x ^ ' O / Ox x J /O/ O (not used) x * ~» V X X X * O- x - ... ^*AJ o ... x V xx- ^JLOUAJ (not used) Necessitative, Aorist. x -Ox *X xO J O / O / xO J O xOx -O J Ox XXOX V jUUaJ • • • J**£ • * • ^£*UAJ . . . (Sl^A****) 138 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Past. /o J x ,, x v (^JjljLloAJ v x x" x- x x x o ^o-» s '* *o J (J*** L A J V*A o x xxev **v x s x* C^>A^»AJ Optative, Aorist. x J xxOA~«0 o xOx AU -* ox dl>3uwCO * ~ v ^ *l*A ... o O- J dli>.A~oAJ Past. ^J> W x~ -o< O , /^O/ "v Ox ... ..J*d*g ,J«*^ ... x» xx <£UA-*AJ Conditional, Aorist. x-Ox A~~CO x O J OxCx xO J O ^O x JjlJ^J O X *.X ,j***U . ^ A Active *o j o - / / < • / A - J j l Uj)l>A~CO Oxx ^ x ...(^>A^«AJ Participles. Present. O xxOx O XX XX i O x J CxOx O xOx O x .» O x x x c x . . . ,J1AU4U> ,..do-Ax-*Axj' O x .» O X Xx' w ^ 139 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY, Aorist. O J J 0x0o O X oX lodJ O JJ C Xo O XOo O o Xo . . . ^J^LAJ O J J O x xXOx . . . (£1>4U*AJ . .. v Past. Ox""j J *> - O x o ; n J o x *xOx (ftOf WStfd) • o x oo ... O , xX >AJ (no£ used) ... O o o x XX dl>A~eAJ Perfect. o xOx OJJ J O / C / O JO •* O oOX ... iptltdtJ O J>0 J O o rf«,0x OX* Xx x * . . . (S^-AX-OAJ Future. o x" „oO o C*UA-*J O x x3 O xOx (not used) OX o x ... Passive ^^OUAJ (not used) Participles. Aorist. o ».Oo OjO .» O ,»0 x 0 JOJ ,O ' O ' o Jo J o - x^ox OX o x AJ V X* ... > V o x x'0> O x ^ J O oO * . . . &)b.A£AAJ Future. O x -• J O xO(wo£ ws^d) O o ox ei*.A^iuJ ... > * J • •• .jMX»\x»dU> (no* wsecT) 140 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Verbal Nouns. Present. Jjlj^J Aal*-J AJJ! jji^Uo AJ.I d^A^^J AoLdU) ... d»A~oAJ ... d>A^*Aj Perfect. o Jo J o «»cv o * ^ o «» * * • **• Future. (not used) d>dUedJ (not used) ftMwoloA*) ...>oA*) Gerunds. O 1st. O J' J J O /O - O J J O ^O^ O J J O * S'O* ±>Jj\ d>A**J , . O' ^-v - J O ^C * ... |JM*U O * -» * . . . d>A~«AJ O / O ' O^ ^ J * u V O - ^ ° ^ j l j j j l d»A*^j» 2nd. . O x •»*> - x [djA^AJ >v ... ... JJ»**L ^OjJ ,W A-S^ 3rd. ... ^OAJ 0 * » * * 0 .» AST«1 d>A-w*Jl IU*OIAA*> ... O^ , J o (SUA-AAJ O *~;^ * C / d>A?tAj O j + **0 © "^ • J O ' - " O ^ JS^I d^A-^J JJM-ftu ... db»A*«AJ 141 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. ^ J A-<0 ' J O *>0 ^ x J *• J O » * * J O* **0* ^O J O" ^<»0*» 4UCO 5th. o ••• >V ... o *o j Jjlj o ^o- O CMAAUO 6th.. ... ^ A J ,- J o *o ... ,J1.«UA«J - .ML> 7th. >V . . . JJ^UAJ SECTION X V I I . The Dubitative, Potential and Facile Verbs, fyc. o The Dubitative Verb is formed by adding the syllable ^jlo (mlsh, mish), or the word (JUi\ (Imlsh), to any personal verb, indicative or necessitative, active or passive, affirmative, negative, or im potential; but, in the perfect indicative, it displaces the syllable ijs (dl) of the root. It casts a doubt on what is said; and is often added, in conversation, by another speaker, to express that he considers what has been affirmed by the former speaker to be questionable, or hearsay, or mere assumption. When the first speaker uses it himself, he does so to express that what he relates is either doubtful, hearsay, or erroneous assumption, from some other person. It is a gross vulgarism, to which Armenians and European novices are addicted, to use this dubitative syllable, in conversation, where 142 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. the fj± of the perfect indicative, or of any compound tense, is required. In writing, there is no denying that this form iff systematically used, by the best authorities, in place of the tense they would employ in speaking. The form has a more musical sound ; and it is, in my opinion, a fruit of imitating Persian verb-forms in Turkish; initiated, probably, by the Persian scribes of the early reigns. o I n dubitative conjugation, this syllable ^Ju follows the simple tense-root and its plural, preceding the compound and personal terminations, singular or plural; unless it be spoken by another person. In this last case, it naturally comes alone, O after all other words. O J * Thus : ~ 1 ^ _ J (teplyormlshlm) it is said, supposed, pretended, suggested, ($*c, that I am o o o J kicking; - djol jjl^^j-J (teplyirmlsh Idlfi) it is said, fyc, that thou wast kicking; ^ l ^ l ^ J (teper Imlsh) it is said, fyc, that he kicks; &±i\ fjl+rt (t^permlsh Idlk) it is said, 8fc, that we used to kick; j-X*» jjlfio (tepmtsh slnlz) it is said, fyc, that you kicked or have kicked ; JUAJb-s**** (tepejekler Imlsh) it is said, $c, that o they are going to kick. (This word or syllable, ^J^} , o UU, is really the past active participle of the obsolete verb eU>!.) The Potential Verb is formed of the fifth gerund (not repeated) followed by the verb d j b (bllmek) in its entire conjugation, the gerund remaining unchanged throughout. This auxiliary verb then means to be able, and answers to our ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY, English can. O J 143 E x . : dub *J (tepe bllmek) to be able to kick; " ( V ^ ^ (t&pe" billy 6rlm) / am a£te to kick, I can kick ; &c. The Facile Yerb is formed by the root of a verb, to which an eser& is added, followed by a vowel ^j and the auxiliary .verb &*£• (vlrmek, vulg. vermek). With a vowel verb other than one in \j, a consonantal (j, with es£re, is added between the root-vowel and the servile JL£J.> (dushuiiup y& tm&q) to remain (lie) pondering, in a brown study; j ^ l j A1A> (bayM yazm&q) to give one1 s self up (write) as about to faint; &c, &c, &c. SECTION X V I I I . The Verb Substantive. In Turkish there is no extant verb substantive, answering in all its moods and tenses to our verb to be. In one sense, the Turkish , j j y performs the office, as an auxiliary and as an independent verb ; but as such, it is a verb adjective, and continually lapses into the parallel idea of to become. The Turkish originally had a true verb substantive, dUil (Imek) to be. This exists fragmentarily in Ottoman Turkish; perhaps in certain persons of the present, certainly in the perfect of the indicative, in the aorist conditional, in the past active participle, in the perfect verbal noun, and in the gerund, apparently modified from the present active participle (which in eastern and old Turkish was and is formed in ^ or J6, even o - J$ , traces of which are numerous in Ottoman, as adjectives). Thus : Indicative. o o Present. ^ (1m, im), ^ o (yim, yfm) / am; ^ thou art; J_J I (Iz, iz), jj sinlz) you are. (ylz, yiz) we are ; (sin, sin) L d (slnlz, ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. o 145 o Perfect. *JJ1 (idhn) I was, &±,\ (Idin) thou ivast, ^cjA (idl) he was; eJjjJ (tdlk) we were ; JSJ±>\ (Idlnlz) you were; 0 , j-k±>\ (Idller) they were. Conditional Aorist. *w>\ (Isam) if I am, \ (Isel&r) 2/ £te/ ar#. Pas* Active Participle* [J^}\ (linlsh) who or which was. Verbal Noun Perfect. o djuil (Idlk) the fact of having been. Gerund. o *y o ' Jx>l (Iken, oZd ^fol Ikan) during the fact of being. These fragments are made negative by prefixing the adverb (J*-i-> dlyll) not. Thus, JCjo (dlylllm) / am not, +xJ\ j £ - p (diyll Idlm) / was not; *A-^I JXJA (dlyll Isem) ?/ / am not; o o ^ djjl J x p (dlyll Idlk) not used as a verbal noun, but replaced o *o J 0-0 by J J U J I (olmadiq) the negative verbal noun perfect of j>jy ; c W J^i-* (<%!! Iken) wMtf wo£ fom#. The present tense indicative of the foregoing fragmentary verb is completed, as to its third persons, singular and plural, L 146 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. by using, when necessary only, the special, unique, and most distinctive Turkish invariable particle of affirmation,^^ (dlr, dir) is, and its conventional (unnecessary) plural, Jj± (dlrler^ dlrlar) are (which is just as well expressed by the singular). O O •» This word ^ , written in eastern Turkish }^ (dur), as it is still pronounced in provincial Ottoman, is often found also, in ° * J old and eastern writings, under the uncontracted form of . j . j j (durnr). This circumstance leads to a suspicion that the word O .. O J is, originally, the aorist of the ordinary verb J ^ J A (durm&q) to remain. However that may be, the peculiarity of the word is that it is not special to the third person singular, or to the two third persons, singular and plural. I t is often used, in writing and in conversation, after a verb of the first or second person also, singular or plural, of any simple tense of the indicative, with or without the plural sign J, when the sense admits it. I t is, in fact, an exact equivalent to the French inchoative expression dest que, and the Latin constat quod, which can be used to o introduce any indicative proposition, as the Turkish j$ is used to conclude and complete any such. And, as the French and Latin clauses can be omitted without the sense suffering, so o also can the Turkish ..>. In conversation it is much more dispensed with than used. The negative of j± is j * J>o^ (drvll dlr) is not; pi. j±jXi± 147 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. (dlyiller dlr) and J y j C > (dlyll dlrler) are not (just as well expressed without the J). SECTION X I X . The Verb of Presence and Absence, of Existence and Non-Existence, T H E R E ARE NO SUCH VERBS IN T U R K I S H . What there are, and what Europeans have erroneously chosen to designate as o o + J such, are two adjectives, \j (var) present or existent, jfjj (y6q) absent or non-existent Like any other substantive or adjective, o these may be followed by the verbal particle of affirmation j * , which, in this case, as in any other case, may be omitted in conversation. I t may be convenient, occasionally, for a novice in Turkish O O * O ^ O •* Oj O •> to suppose that Jj or s*J\j means there is; that jjjj Wj* {jji means there is not. But, unless rightly understood, those ren- derings are misleading. The expressions really say and mean he, she, or it, is present (or existent); he, she, or it, is absent (or non-existent) ; as, Jj u%\ (atesh var) fire (is) present (here), or existent (somewhere); J;J> yj*\ (atesh yAq) fire (is) absent (here), or non-existent (anywhere). J ° °" Then, such a phrase as J^l Jj (var ol) be thou present (or existent), J^l jf^-j (y6q 61) be thou absent (or non-existent), becomes clear. The first is a kind of prayer, Mayest thou ever exist, and be at hand, ready to help the afflicted! while the 148 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. second is a condemnation, a sentence • of banishment annihilation, or a wish in the nature of a curse, Avaunt! or Away! &c. By using a locative with these two expressions, they become o - * *• + o o* special instead of general : J\J *jj sJ*-~&. (jeblmdd p&ra var) in my 'pocket money is present (I have some money in my pocket) ; ^±>\ \ &* ~> (b&nlm sana Ihtlyajlm y6q idl) any need of mine to (lean on) thee (for assistance) was non-existent (i. e., I had no need of thee). SECTION X X . Of the Compound Verbs. Besides the Turkish verbs already described, the Ottoman language has been indefinitely enriched with whole classes of 14£ ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. compound verbs, active and passive, transitive and intransitive, formed by a Turkish auxiliary verb preceded by a substantive or adjective of Arabic or Persian, even of foreign, origin. An active compound verb is formed, generally, by an Arabic, rarely by a Persian verbal noun, or by a foreign substantive, o ^ o followed by one of the auxiliaries dU-iol (Itmek, vulg. etmek), (»UJLJI (eylem&k), Jjl ^ U ^ I J (peshlman dlmaq) to be regretfully or penitently sorry (for some act) ; (sJUql &z-iji) (vlzlte itmek) to visit, to pay a visit. Transitive verbs of this class form their passives with the auxiliary j W (Irsal buynrukn&q) to be con- descendingly sent, to be kindly sent. Reciprocal verbs active of this class are formed with the o -»o o - o reciprocal of i»L«ol, that is, with the auxiliary dlcwJ^^ (IdlshO «* O o X J J mek) ; as, csL^jjl o*j,a&. (khusumet idlshmek) mutually io exercise hostility, litigation, or spite, towards one another. Causatives of the simple and reciprocal are formed by the causatives of &J&\ and (&U£ji1, namely, ISUJXA, iiiL^xSo^l; thus, i!&t>jXj\ JU,I to cause or let (a thing) be sent; dL^J-^l e^wai. to cause or let (two or more) mutually attach each other. Negatives and impotentials, as also dubitatives, potentials, and faciles, are constructed with those forms of ISLSJ>I and the O <* ' O O * O O ^ ^ ^ O ^ O other auxiliaries. Thus, 12LU0I JL^,I not to send; duL*Jj»l JUjl 0 0 o ^o not to be able to send; ^ju*-*} Jl-,1 it is said that he sent; •0*0 + o ^o 0*0 o ^o tsUj »JJ\ JL-^I Io 60 aote Io send; d u ^ j ^ JL^l Jwsl Io smd. 151 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. SECTION X X I . Of the Interrogative Verb, and Interrogation in general. All interrogations, in Turkish (when an interrogative pronoun is not present in the phrase, as such), are made by introducing the interrogative particle or adverb * (ml, m!) into its proper position in the phrase. The proper position of this particle in the phrase is the end of the word on which the question turns. We have no equi- valent for it in English ; in Latin the word an, and the enclitic particle ne, are its equivalents; also' the French est-ce que ? This may be best shown by an example of five elements, each of which may be the word on which the question specially turns, so that the adverb ^ is successively joined to each of them to indicate that speciality. Thus : 1. iyuMX_>A-Jj 4JAJ »c J^JQJ — Lo ^ J u (sdnml sdbah benlmld 'drdbayd blnejeksln) Is it thou who art to ride with me to-morrow in the carriage! 2. ^^J-MX-*.^ * i * ^ 4^*? ( 5 ^ " * cJ"*** ( s sabahml benlmla arabayd benejeksln) Is it to-morrow that thou art to ride with me in the carriage ? 3. c ^jC*.duj i a ^ ($»&? r C * i^-** ( s ^ n s ^>ah benlml&mi 'arabaya blnejeksln) I s it with me that thou art to ride in the carriage to-morrow ? 152 4. ^frS^i^i OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. ^wAJyC AU> -.L© C^*» (san sabah bemlmla'arabayami blnejeksln) Is it in the carriage that thou art to ride with me to-morrow ? 5. ^ ^ ^ • x ^ . j j j Ai*?^ A!-*? ^ W cr» ( S ^ n s&baQ benlmla 'arabaya blnejekmlsln) Art thou going to ride with me to-morrow in the carriage ? This does not, however, exhaust the possible points of the question in the case of this sentence, nor the proper places of the adverb ^ * in it. The phrase itself may be in question, as to whether these words were used, or some others, by the person to whom the interrogation is addressed. In that case, the adverb ^ would stand after the personal ending of the verb; ^ ^J\^i^> *i&je- AL«O —L* ^ (san sabah benlmla 'ara- baya blnejeksln ml), which means, Dost thou say, thou wilt ride with me to-morrow in the carriage ? The last two instances call specially for the explanation that, in compound verbs the proper place of the adverb ^ between the two elements of the verb. may be Thus we may ask, di>.5jjil ^ J W Is it to send (and not himself carry, for instance) that he is going to do ? and (jr%-X-&.8jjl JL^I (Irsal Idejekml) Is he going to send ? In Turkish simple or derivative verbs, supposing that the adverb _* is to follow the verb in the sentence, and not some 153 ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. other member thereof, then a further question is seen to arise in No. 5 above given, as to the exact part of the verb itself that takes this word after it. first to be considered. In this respect, the tenses have The simple tenses take the adverb at the end of the tense-root, and their compounds also, before °J °J . their auxiliary ^ j j l ; thus, igj$.y*} is he doing ? ij±A vms he doing? ^jjiSA Next, a distinction has to be made between the third persons, singular and plural, as one group, and the first and second persons, singular and plural also, as another group. The first-named group of tenses have no personal endings, the second group have special personal endings, and the interrogative precedes these, following the tense-root still; thus, ~*jj~3 (teplyormlylm) am I kicking ? {ji~~+jji>J (teplyor° •* " mlsln) art thou kicking ? ^JJ» * (teplyorml) is he kicking ? * o o j ' * o y*r o J , jt*jXr$ (teplyormlylz) are we kicking ? jS~~*jj~-*> (teplyorml&lnlz) are you kicking? ^Jjj^J (teplyorlerml) are they kicking ? The perfect tense indicative forms an exception to the foregoing rule, as it takes the interrogative after the personal O endings. Thus, ^XJ Of (tepdlmml) have I kicked ? did I kick ? ^ J ! J J (tepdlnml) hast thou kicked? didst thou kick? (tepdlml) has he kicked ? did he kick ? O y* have we kicked? did we kick? ^yS^xZ kicked ? did you kick ? ^JJSJ did they kick ? %_\y_J e-^sJ (tepdlkml) O* (tepdlnlzml) have you (tepdllerml) have they kicked? 154 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. SECTION X X I I . Of Adverbial Expressions. As explained in Section II., every Turkish adjective is also an adverb. O ^ O ^X Every noun of time is also used as an adverb ; as, J> — L* (sabah gal) come to-morrow; {jtf! {:^=[} (erken galdl) he came early ; jjb A£J»\ (akhsh&m gelir) he will come in the evening. Adjectives of relative place, like all adjectives, are used as O ' J adverbs; thus, j ^ tjJSji (yuqari chiq) mount up, walk climb up, ascend ; j £ ^ ^ up, (ashaghi g&l) come down, descend ; o J f )J*J\ (llerl git) go forward, advance ; JS^--> (gerl gal) come back. But substantives of place, like all substantives, can be used adverbially by the sole means of being joined to prepositions; O J J J » * J 4hus, jjijj>j\ *±>J$ym (yuqarida 6tnrly6r) he is sitting higher up ; £jji$ c P ^ l i l (ashaghidan gellyorim) I am coming from below; iz+3 a i L (sagha git) go to the right; &Q. A possessive pronoun may enter into such an adverbial expression ; as, j^Ji-*. A « ^ I (ustftma chiqdi) he mounted on to the top of me. An adjective, substantive, and preposition may join to form an adverbial expression; as, 1&J0 e J l (alt tarafda) on the lower" side, lower down; ^ji^? v^Jl (alt tarafdan) from the lower side * from lower down. ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. 155 So an adjective, substantive, possessive, and preposition may * + O O J be combined in an adverbial expression ; as, A*\J wz^l (ust yanimd) to the side above me; sjXib e>JI (alt ydnlndd) on the side below thee; ^xjjo c C (sagh t&rafind&n) from his (her, its) right-hand side. With certain special exceptions, any Arabic substantive or adjective becomes an adverb by adding an ustun and vowel ( to i t ; this being often marked with a double ustun sign, and read an ; or, if the word is a feminine in s , by putting two dots, with or without the double ustun sign to it, without an I ; thus, V_ > (tulan) in length, longwise, in jL longitude; f a o* L^«c (*&rzan) in breadth, breadthwise, in latitude; i^*s j L-> J St , (berr&n ue bahr&n) by land and by sea; Lji* (muq&ddema) formerly; \j>>y> mfcakhkharan) latterly, recently; ii>\ij Ulo» (qaV&n ve qatibet&n) decidedly and entirely. The first ten Arabic ordinals are thus much used adverbially; as, Vjl (avvala) firstly; G\S (sanlya) secondly; UJC (sallsa) thirdly; UK (rabfa) fourthly; (sadlsa) sixthly; C*U (khamlsa) fifthly; L o C UJU (sablea) seventhly; L«\J (samlne) eighthly; U-U (tasl'a) ninthly; \Ju\& ("ashlraj tenthly. 156 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. SECTION X X I I I . Of Prepositions. They always follow the substantive or pronoun. Besides those given in the chapter on the substantive, there are but four or five others : 5>)jl (uzere) upon, *>. (je, ja) according ton ja» (siz) and ^ J - (slzln) without, &A (leyln) at the time of, after the manner of SECTION X X I V . Of Conjunctions. The conjunctions »> (da) and ^ o (dakhi) also, follow the . word they unite to a preceding one; as, *jX>£=* *JJJ d ^ > ^ = » (gidersan, ben-da glderlm) if thou wilt go, I also will go; ^±j, (bu dakhf) this, too. All other conjunctions head the clauses which they connect. The principal of these a r e : J (ve, in Persian couplets read u, A) and; L*l (amma), {jSJi (lakln), ^,^-AJJ (ve-lakln) but; j-jsil (anjaq) only; j£=*\ (&y&r, eger) if; ^ . L ; (yakhod) or; ...li , . \ (ya...ya...) either... or...; ...A> ...AJ (ni...ne\..)w^A0r... nor...; jf* (h&tta) insomuch that; o *£=*+ (m^yer, meger) unless; o _ i*" o j (jxc) (Imdl) therefore, wherefore; \j>\ (zira) for, because ; AX-3J>> (chunku) since, by reason that; order that; as far as. & (kl) that; U (ta) sotfftaf,in Of these, some are Turkish, some Arabic, others Persian in origin. ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY. SECTION XXV. Of Interjections. These are mostly Arabic or Persian in origin. cede, as in English. 157 They pre- The principal are : ^1 (ey), U (ya) 0; » 1 (ah) ah; aljjl (eywah) alas; ^Ju^ (khayf) woe; sx* (nieded) O *t* help; ^j\ (aferln, vulg. aferlm) bravo. There is, however, a peculiar Turkish interjection I (a) 0, that joins on to the vocative following it ; as, Gil (a-baba) 0 father; lill (a-ana) 0 mother. It also follows nouns, pronouns, and verbs, taking the sense of Yes! Indeed! I told you so! You see now ! as, lol (adam-a) a man; you see ! Yjji (gyuzel-a) nice ; indeed I l^j (benlm-a) mine; in sooth ! \>Xt*jjS (gyilremadin-a) thou couldst not see ; after all ! ( 158 CHAPTER ) III. T H E OTTOMAN SYNTAX. SECTION I. Conversational brevity. Precision in writing. COLLOQUIAL and written Ottoman Turkish, as far as Syntax is concerned, are the very antipodes of each other. As in the orthography the rule is given : " Never introduce a vowel-letter into a Turkish or foreign word without removing a possible doubt as to pronunciation ; never leave out a vowel in such a word, if by the omission a doubt is created as to pronunciation,"—that is, be always as concise as is possible without falling into ambiguity; so also, in colloquial syntax the chief rule is : Never repeat a word, or introduce its equivalent, and never use a subsidiary word, unless for the sake of emphasis; whereas the golden rule for written language is, Never omit any word that tends to make a sentence clear and explicit. On the contrary^ introduce freely as many new words as may, in the requisite degree, elucidate the sense sought to be conveyed. In other words, Spoken Ottoman Turkish should be as concise as possible, even to the verge of ambiguity; SYNTAX. 159 written Ottoman Turkish must be as full, verbally, as to leave no doubt on the mind of the reader at any distance of space or time. The reasons are obvious and eminently practical, philosophical; namely: If, by reason of a speaker's conciseness, a doubt as to his meaning should arise in the mind of the person addressed, a question can be put, and the doubt at once removed ; if, on the contrary, a written document be left obscure in any part, the doubt thence arising must remain unsolved, and the meaning guessed at, because the writer is either dead or away at a distance. Hence, if one be asked, j± (yemam) / will not eat (it). In this last question, the omission of " i t , " even by the asker, is to be remarked. As instances of the omission of all possible subsidiary words from phrases in conversation, may be mentioned that of the 160 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. affirmative j$ (dlr) is, it is, he or she is, on all occasions of ordinary assertion or negation. The personal and corrobora- tive possessive pronouns are never employed in conversation ° J ' unless for emphasis or distinction ; as, *s£y> (fdviyArlm) I O J , * love (thee, you, him, her, it), *jjiy*> ,A— (sanl savlyorim) i" love thee (you), *jjif~> ,$•**» ^ (ben sanl ...) I, personally, love thee; ijjK A>\> (b&b&ui galdl) my father came, or has come. As a consequence of the desire to leave no doubt as to the meaning of a writing, nouns and verbs in apposition, in pairs, are much used ; such are, o*s^ j ^ (vldd I!L mahabbet) friendJoJ J o o < •> o j j _ ship, ^ j J ^ ^ - k - J j JJ£ (tahrir u tastlr olundu) has been written, A result of the avoidance of unnecessary repetition is that the third person singular of a verb is often employed instead of its plural when the nominative plural is expressed; as, {jd^ h±\ (adamlar g&ldi) some men, or the men have come, or came. Another such result is the use of a singular substantive with a plural cardinal number; as, o i _;! (uch &t) three horses, *-+>-£• U*L-J (bin 'araba) a thousand vehicles (carriages, carts, waggons, &c). To make written composition still more precise, it is very usual, after introducing a common substantive or a proper name into a paragraph or article, letter, dispatch, &c, never to use a personal pronoun to designate the thing or person 161 SYNTAX. so named, but to repeat the substantive or proper name as often as may be required, either preceded or followed by one O Jo , O J O *> of the indicative adjectives, j^y* (m&zbur), jj£s*.x* (mezkyur), O i for things or persons, jjJ O - ~* (mesfur), for a contemned or / J OO/ criminal person, A-J1 ~*J-* (muma lley-h), for a reputable o o * * -» J person, and a-Jl^ll* (mnsharun lley-h), for a person of rank and consideration. These words all mean, in reality, the afore^ said, the afore-mentioned, the said, &c. In the case of a person first mentioned by name, or by a common substantive, these words may be used as substantives,—we might say,—as a kind of personal or demonstrative pronoun, in all the cases of the declension; but, in the case of a thing, they must be used as; adjectives to its name, repeated each time. SECTION I I . Syntax of the Substantive, A common noun substantive singular may be either definite or indefinite, and may represent, according to circumstances or the context, either an individual or the individual, several individuals, a portion of the species, or the whole species; as, °1 Mf6jf\> (bdghcha gyuzel shey) a garden (is) a pretty thing; ij±J£ »L£oC (padlshah galdl) the monarch came, or has come; j j > ^%MJ&>\ (Ingllterada geml ch6q) in England (there are) 162 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. O • O *» ? <• O ^ many ships; y J O J d U ^ b dL£^ (chlchek baghchanlfi zinetl dlr) flowers are the ornaments of the gardens, of the garden ; O O J *sg\ ye (sA Ichdim) I drank (some) water, I drank water (not O •«* J wm£, & c ) , ^Isi j ^ (su aqar) water flows. In the accusative case indefinite, the substantive is as in the O * O J nominative; as, dL*-sslj*© (su Ichmek) to drink water (some water). If the declensional accusative is used, it is always O O J definite; as, ^Assl ^y* J (suyu Ichdim) / drank, or have drunk, the water. There are four different Turkish methods of constructing two substantives in a sentence. First, by simple juxtaposition; second, by adding the possessive suffix of the third person to the second substantive; third, by putting the first in the genitive, and still adding the possessive suffix to the second ; and fourth, by putting the first in some other prepositional case, and leaving the second unchanged. In simple juxtaposition of two substantives, the first indicates a material, the second a form; or, the first indicates a J 1 O 0»* quantity, the second a material; as, \fp &yA\ (altfn qutu) a gold box; A-J \ L^SjJt (blr klle arpa) a bushel (of) barley; Jji d i k s U ^ j l (Ikl sa'&tlikyil) a distance of two hours journey; s J O 0«» O •> A5J>. d J ^ - * -.jl (uch s£trlllk choha) broadcloth enough for three eoats. SYNTAX. 163 With the possessive suffix alone added, a relation of genus and species is indicated, the genus standing last, and the combination remaining indefinite; as, ^ l i ^\SS book-cover; iS^,y (kltab qaui) a j \ (&• kyupeyi) a house (domestic) dog; ^4==**)^ uW (y^han urdeyl) a duck of the wilderness {wild duck). If the first is a proper name, the second is the species, the first the name of the individual, and the combination is definite ; as, ^ j , ^ jljl (azaq denlzi) the Sea of Azof. With the first in the genitive, real possession is indicated, the name of the possessor being the first, and the combination is definite; as, ^Jl^e. tsU^i (qiralln 'askerl) the king's * o army; * + (jj\ (sLbb (babamin &vl) my father's house, When the first is put into a prepositional case, the second remains without a suffix, and the combination may be definite or indefinite, an active participle being always understood; as, Jji ij^j (shehre yil) a (or the) road to the town; ^ j ^ a &W** (demlrdan kyupru) a bridge of iron; i^S j-> *&>\ (ayda bir kerre) once in a month ; &c. When two substantives are in apposition, no change is made in either 5 as, \z\ ^ U (chawushagha) Mr. Sergeant; ^j^i) J£\\J (yazljl efendi) Mr. Clerk; UA* ^JLo (mushir pasha) the Pasha (who is) a Mushir. Here, the generic word stands last, and the combination is definite. Sometimes, the specific word or 164: OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. term is complex and obeys its own rules; as, \t\ ^At cj\ O * (in- O '#* O bashl agha) Mr. Corporal; dL> ^ V l ^ * (mir-alay bey) Squire Colonel; L ^ L J I^J y - . * (mirl-llva pasha) the Major-General Pasha. There are two exceptions to the rule that the generic word stands last, when the other word is a proper name. In all other cases with proper names, this rule holds good; as, ^IkL U»*»l (esma saltan) Princess Esma, Vj* o ) - c (izzet molla) O ^x o x (jX-iJl v-i^lc ( e arlf efendl) ilfr. *Arif; &c. Judge Izzet; The o «- o> exceptions are: 1, the word ^UaL*, when applied to the soveII JO/ O /OJ reign before his name ; as, J«yg' j^c ^UaL* (sultan 'abdu-'lhamid); 2, the word Vj*, when applied to a student or schoolboy, also before his name ; as, ±JL\j )ly (mdlla rashld) schoolboy Rashid. Any number of substantives may be in apposition, and one of them may be the proper name of the individual; as, O •* J^J jJLljJi O *^» O J O J + \ c.j\ (ighlum qAlAnuz) your servant, my J O x O - OJO son; 3 J - £ J j i ^ J ^ J JLCJI (6ghlAm r£fiq b&y quluiiuz) your servant, my son, Refiq Bey ; j J O j i db jJ, <^H J-* JL£jl (oghlum mir- al&y ^refiq bey quhiiiuz) #owr servant, my son, Colonel Refiq Bey; &c. When a string of substantives in construction would in strictness require several of them consecutively to be put in 165 SYNTAX. the genitive case, the monotonous cacophony of the repetition of the preposition is avoided by omitting it once or twice ,_/ OJJO J O + O ,» O *» O * * where most appropriate; thus, J>1 dUl^jl dL^-jib (SJU-JJU^I d^l^U (pashanin enlshteslntn daylsinin ighlnnun at!) the horse of the son of the uncle of the brother-in-law of the pasha, may be expi-essed in either of the following ways: .***Hlb , , - A ^ J I dLili»\j Jjl d L l c j l , or ^3\ dLlcjl t ^ H l ^ (»L-»JU^)\ U»b, or *»AI£J\ UA> Jii (sJLl^j! d L ~ - j b , or J[l ddc^l du-».ob ^ A ^ J I ISISUAJ; the last genitive preposition being, perhaps, the most frequently re* tained and necessary. Two or more Arabic or Persian substantives may be put in Persian construction with each other. Their order is then the reverse of what it would be in Turkish construction, just as in English the king's horse is in reverse order with the horse of the king. I n Persian construction each preceding substantive of a series must be vocally connected with its consequent. This vocal connexion is effected by making the final quiescent consonant of the preceding substantive movent with &sere; thus, »Li2» ^ L ^ J (fermanl shah) the command of the king; ° ** ' *°* JO, ^\jA »U. ^1^9 tfj+^L* (muzmunu fermanl shahl Iran) the tenour of the command of the king of Persia, But, if the last con- sonant of a preceding substantive is movent, and followed by a vowel-letter, a servile consonant must be introduced to support the 6s£r& vowel of connexion ; and this consonant varies 166 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. with the final vowel of the word. When the final vowel-letter is \ or j , the servile consonant is ,j; as, u-^-^1 ^ U ^ L * (ja-yi o , 9 pa-yl esb) ^ 6 j>Zac£ of the foot of the horse; edu ^j yu ru-yu seg) /^£ hair of the face of the dog. vowel-letter be a ^ , > ^y> (mu- If the final this letter is converted itself into the servile consonant required ; so that no written addition is needed; thus, - ^ *U < ^ (peri-yl chah-1 burj) the fairy of the well of the tower. Ignorance often writes a hemze over such final (bere-1 felek) the lamb of the sphere (i.e., Aries); and otherwise it is less correctly placed over the vowel 8; as, dlls ij>. Of two substantives in Persian construction, the first is often the metaphorical name of the thing literally expressed by the second, the pair really representing one idea under two images ; as, JJX&J J>JL> (sa>lqi taqdir) the drover, destiny; e^*^)-c ^Lc (Inanl *azlmet) the reins (of) departure. Whether in Turkish or Persian construction, the same remark holds good of a pair of substantives, one of which is SYNTAX. 167 the word^ol (emr), or one of its synonyms, SJL (madde), ijoj*** (khusiis), o~ip (keyf lyyet), ^ 0 personage named Ahmed; «> O * O ' yfe* *li ^ l i (qirim nam jezire) the island (peninsula) named Crimea* The two words «-^ ^ ^ (hazret), c_>L-». (jenab), which originally mean presence and szefe, are used before or after the names or titles of individuals held in honour, with a meaning varying from that of His Divine Majesty down to that of plain Mr, or Mrs,, &c. When they precede, they remain unchanged to the eye, but are in Persian construction; as, I o ** o (hazr&t-l khAda) His Divine Majesty, God; ( — peygamb&r) His Sanctity, ~ the Prophet; j*+. »LioLj o L i ^ . (jenab-i padlshah) His Majesty, the Sovereign; c^L^lju* ^U*. ( — sadaret-ma>ab) His Highness, the Repair of the Vezirate (the Grand Vezir). When they follow, they are in Turkish construction, and generally take the possessive pronominal 168 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. suffix of the third person plural, but sometimes that of the •Ox O , third person singular; as, ^jjo^ O* O ' O* O CtO i d^&lL -JL-VI &£» (sheyktm- '1-lslam tahlr b&y h&zretlerl) His Eminence Chancellor', Tahir Bey; O' the Lord High .e-jt^ (jXJ\ I^WM> £*A»:ZJI* &UJ*J ^Durusa muftlsi hasan efendl jenabl) His Honour the State Counsel of Brusa, Hasan Efendi; ^JJSJM* l£l> ^a*» (s&fIr pasha — ) His Excellency the Pasha Ambassador; ^UU&» csb d^rj (terjuman hey — ) His Worship the Interpreter Bey; & c , & c , &c. ° - © ^ Generally, the word c^a^ before a single name indicates one of the prophets, saints, or patriarchs of old; as, -j3 o ^ (hazretl nuh) the patriarch Noah ; ^j-* prophet Moses; — ( — miisa) the ^ L J L — (— suleyman) the prophet (king) o • o „ Solomon; *-^-* — (— meryem) Saint Mary (the Virgin Mother) ; -** c — ( — fIsa) the Prophet Jesus; ^-** — (— mesih) the holy Anointed One (Christ); &c, &c, &c. SECTION I I I . Syntax of the Adjective. Nearly everything requisite in a sketch has been said on -this subject in the former Chapter (II.), Section I I . If several adjectives qualify one substantive, they follow one another simply in Turkish construction, and are all connected vocally in the Persian construction ; as, J ^ J * - L-^s^jtal Jj»/(gyuzel, SYNTAX. 169 edebll, mabjiib chdjuq) a pretty, well-behaved, modest child; \y-3 —js (jUJ OW^-J (jU (ja-yl blhlsht-n&ma-yl fer&h-feza) a paradise-like, joy-giving place. One adjective may qualify several substantives in a sentence; as, HJLJ J L ^ l j f%-ot (amem u ejyall satire) the other peoples and nations. An Arabic or Persian adjective is never placed after a Turkish or foreign substantive; and whenever either is placed before one of these, it remains, like a Turkish adjective, unc .. o i changed as to gender or number; as, clL> J a c ('azim dagh) a great mountain; o ' C o *l£oU ^Jac ('azim padlshah) a great monarchy » " » o l j ^ *Jafi (^zim devlet) a great state. Some adjectives take a substantive as a complement to restrict their application. In Turkish construction, this com- plement precedes, with or without a preposition; as, J^oy» (su d61u) full (of) water, JJJL *y yo (su lid ddlu) filled with water. In Persian construction it follows ; as, jij> J J y (laylq- i beyan) worthy of exposition ; xJo {JJ\J* (muwaffq-f tdb') conformable with nature. The Turkish adjective ^ i (glbl) like, follows substantives, the personal pronoun of the 3rd pers. plur., the demonstratives plural, the interrogatives singular and plural, and the compound relatives, when its complements, without any change occurring in them ; as, ^ - . ^ » y > (su glbi) like water; > ic*^= jl^\ (anler 170 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. glbl) like them; ^Jjljj> (bunlar glbl) like these; (klm glbl) like whom ? ^$ Jlj (neler glbl) like what things ? ^ ^ 3 ( j C j C l b (b&bUmlnkl glbl) like the one belonging to my father; ^S^StX^ (bendekl glbl) like the one I have. All other pronouns are put in the genitive, when complements to this word; as, ^S ^ (benlm glbl) like me; ^-S c*Jil (anln glbl) like him, her, it; ^^S ^r* (slzln glbl) like you ; ^_--S dij> (b&nun glbl) like this; &c. SECTION IV. Syntax of the Numerals. . The Turkish and Persian cardinals always precede their substantive, and this is usually left in the singular, whatever the number ; as, ioi». jjol (Ikl chlft) two pairs; jihan) the two worlds (present and future). ^ l ^ . j (du But the Arabic cardinal follows, the construction is made Persian, and the * O* "i substantive is made plural; as, ***•»• c ^ l ^ (jlhatl sltte) the six directions (in space), six sides (of a solid). The Turkish and Persian numerals precede the adjectives of the same substantive; as do also the Arabic (though after the substantive); thus, ^jg &L- ^ J I (Ikl slyah kechl) two black goats; *jj*z* ^ \ c^ia> (heft lqlim-1 ma'mure) the seven climates SYNTAX. of the habitable earth; 171 *• o* »,alU g^+i. ^y «o (quvayi khamse-1 za* hire) the five external senses. But if, instead of an adjective, a descriptive phrase should qualify the substantive, the Turkish numeral comes between O O ,OJ J O * •> the two; as, <^\j\ »JJ^ dodkjl (idanin biyunda blr Ip) a string of the length of the room; ^ U l l y* (her blrl besh keyse aqcha eder yedl elmas) seven diamonds, each of the value of five purses of money. A Turkish cardinal number can be placed after a substantive in the genitive, singular or plural. It does not then define the number of that substantive, but of a definite portion of what this represents ; as, j\ (odalarin Iklsl) two of the rooms. Very often, between the Turkish cardinal number and its substantive, another substantive is introduced, with the sense of individual or individuals, as in our phrases " ten head of cattle," "six sail of ships," &c. This substantive varies in Turkish according to the nature of the things defined by the numeral. o c*> For men it is^aj (nefer) individual; o for beasts it is • ^ L (re^s) head; for bulbs it is ^ZXJ (bash) head; for ships it is ixki (qit'a) piece; for cannons, ships, and villages, it is IJJ (pare, 172 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. vulg. p&rd) piece; for things usually counted it is s±c ('dded) number; for things not usually counted it is aJta (dane, vulg, tan&) berry; for swords it is ^ A .a (qabza) /h7£; for elephants, o ^ s i j (zenjir) c k m . Thus : **\ Ju Ji> five men; ^j^ ten sheep; ^Uj*? ^ b {S^\ ^\j two onions; AUI* axks Lc-t^i ^\ twenty ships; Aifeu s^lj ^C,_X_J> twenty vessels; L^JO *JO ^J\ ten cannon (pieces of artillery) ; ^jj> i^lj jj*j-i ±±& j£ JO - *> O ^ r a hundred eggs ; js*l\ «ub ,J>^} two pearls; O O O ^ -"O^ O J JU A^J ~J\ three O swords; J-j9 J^-J j) one elephant. The Turkish ordinals precede their substantives ; as, O (blrlnjl geyje) ^ first night; ,»•» J OJ J ^ \ ^SJjjUh •* O O *£^Jt C"» ^ ,•».:;J1 (Ultmish d6qu.zu.nju. alay) the sixty-ninth regiment. The Arabic ordinals follow; as, . ^ t i . <> > (babl khamls) _L chapter the fifth. The Persian ordinals generally precede, but sometimes follow. The Turkish distributive numerals are used to express the rates of collection as well as of distribution; as, Ji±ji) ifo j2*> OS* *,0* (besher pdrd verdll^r) they contributed five paras each ; ^t> s/jl O ^ x ^ ^ J J ^ - J J tjj (&nl&r& basher p&ri verlldl) to them five paras each were distributed. For emphasis sake, the simpler distributives are often 173 SYNTAX. repeated; but they are then generally used as substantives ; as, **%Ji0 jj{ jj> (blrer blrer t6pladim) I collected (them) one by one; y>^\jl^\ JtJ&\ (Iklsher Iklsher aliniz) take ye (them) two apiece each (of you), or, take you (or thou, them) two together each time* SECTION V. Syntax of Pronouns. The demonstrative pronoun, when an adjective, precedes all other qualifications of its substantive; as, M^S tsJj-H JT^ j> O O o j* (merhum pederlin) my late father, may be rendered in the Persian form, ++J>-JA »JJ (peder-t merhumum) ; so also, j*&\j>>jio\L ^ (vejh-f khatir-kh'aMmiz) the manner desiderated in mind by us (i. e.5 by me); ^ C l c ^ - *Jj2*J&i\ ^St-ttjj-sJe (dqtar4 sharqiyy£ ser-'&sker-l zHfer-rehberl) the O *" O - J victorious commander-in-chief of the eastern districts; jA el£l? y .^Lsil K^J^J (jl^-iJU -J, (bu b&ghifi her blr ja-yi jan-feza-yl blhlsht-lntlmasl) each soul-enrapturing, paradise-prognosticating spot of this garden* The corroborative of the suffixed possessive pronoun of 174 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Turkish construction precedes the whole combination to which the possessive is suffixed ; and this corroborative is always in the genitive, whether it be a substantive or a pronoun ; as, *,j-j (^-=^-0 (%-^-J (benlm m&rhum pederlm) my late ^tjJ father; («^j C^AWJI (6danin blyuk qapusu) the great door of the room. One possessive suffix may qualify several substantives ; as, {cj\~>-\ j cjjte j L A - S H j Ji (al A ds-hab A 'Itr^t u. ahbabl) his family, companions, posterity, and friends. SECTION V I Syntax of the Verb. Verbs of the first and second person agree with their nominatives in number and person; as, +±jy ^ (ben gyurdum) / saw, have seen (him, her, it, &c.) ; yX->j>jj) y*» (slz gyiirdunftz) you saw, have seen (me, us, them, &c.\ A verb of the third person must also agree with its subject, -» O Jy if understood; as, \£±j£ (gyurdu) he, she, it saw, has seen (it,&c); Jl±jjf (gyurduler) they saw, have seen (it, &c). When the subject is expressed of a verb of the third person, the verb does not always agree with it in number, A singular subject soraetimes has its verb in the plural, out of respect or politeness; a plural subject often has its verb in the singular, so as to avoid the cacophony of repetition. Thus : JJUxiJf JJIJ SYNTAX. 175 (bab&m gltdller) my father went, has gone, is gone ; ^S& {jJ&\Z>j\ (ushdqlerl gdldl) his or their servants came, or have come, are come. So a verb with several subjects expressed, when all of the third person, singular or plural, may be in the singular; as, .3 £)\>\2> J\ji& \-jy»oj c>W; <—SJ)I (uluf-i rlzvan u sunuf-i gufran shayan dlr) thousands of prayers for God's acceptance, and all hinds of wishes for God's mercy (on him, &c.) 25 (are) fitting. * If one of them be of the second person, singular or plural, and the other or others of the third person, the verb must be of the second person plural; as, J j ^ j I i ^ l ^ J x l ^ J j lj±ij ^ (sdn v& pMerlm ve q6nshAfiuz beraber gltdlnlz) thou and my father, with your neighbour, went together. And if one be of the first person, even singular, whether the others be of the second or third, singular or plural, the verb J J o J^ o , o ~ * o * , o , must be in the first person plural; as, eb^jf dliljj,3 j ^ j ^ (ben, ve s&n, ve qarndashln, gyurdtik) 7, and thou, and thy brother, saw (him, & c ) . In conversation, ,^ and its plural J.$ are generally omitted at the end of a phrase, affirmative, negative, or interrogative; as, i* j>\jSZL^ {khyilniz lyl ml) is your health good ? y\ (lyl) it is good; Jyi j>\ (lyl dlyll) it is not good. But, in repeating the affirmative or negative words of another, ,.> must be introduced ; as, (^JJLJI jjiXa? j j o ^ AL-JJ-* 176 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. (buyl& dlr, d6yu, tdsdiq eyledl) he confirmed, saying, Ci It is so." In relating the words of another, no alteration is permitted in number, person, or tense of the verb; as, ^ J J J +J$ (gellrlm, didl) he said, " / will come " (not as in English, " he said he would come"). "When the object of a transitive verb is definite, it is put in o r»* *» the accusative ; as, ^jJl Jfl (at! dldfm) / bought, have bought (or taken) the horse. But, if the object be indefinite, it remains in o c«* ^* the nominative; as, *jJI o l (it aldun) / bought a horse or horses. Intransitive, like transitive, verbs, govern their indirect objects by means of different prepositions, i.e., the substantives or pronouns are put into different cases according to the verb. 0/.CO J O ' O J i Thus : (J*S,jS &X*Jj\ (Alumdan qirqmaq) to be afraid of death ; ,3*>lJ ^ J ^ J j l (ulumdun qachmaq) to run away from death; j^jiU UJJJ (pdrdyabdqmdq) to look at money (i.e., to take money into account or consideration); isL)ji isj* (sudd yuzmek) to swim in the water; &*#£=>*j£=a±(denlzfe girmek) to go into o^ o i /Ac sea (i.e., to bathe in the sea); j*jj\ * o AA - L i (qillj lid wur- mdq) to strike with a (or the) sword; {J*-J\) &y?\ Jo\*. (khatlr ichln ydpmdq) to do (a thing) out of regard (for some one) ; i*U> A-JljX (haywdnd blnmek) to mount on a beast (horsf); SYNTAX. 177 eU^ ^(C*-J (gemlye blnmek) to mount (go) on board ship; j£jL)Li AftU (ayagha qalqmaq) to m e to one's / e ^ (i. e., to rise, get up, stand up). Nouns of time and place are often used adverbially (as also is the case in English) without prepositions after verbs; as, $ tfji (yarln gal) come to-morrow; ^ 1 ,PU»T (ashaghiln, vulg. en) descend, come or go down; j mount; i. e., come or go up. ^ ijj&ji (yiiqari chiq) ascend, Still, on occasions, prepositions are used with them; as, c->U A]^> (sola baq) Z00& £0 tfAg left; e ^ 5 jj+3 (gird, vulg. gerl git) #o 5ac&; JJ ^ ^ ^ 3 (gerldan gal) come from the rear, from behind. A transitive verb has sometimes two direct objects, one o«» o o J _• definite, the other indefinite; as, JjSzA *«£»» ^1 (ani nmshir etdller) ZAey made him a mushir (duke, or field-marshal). An Ottoman compound verb, active or passive, often takes its direct or indirect object into the body of the verb, as the Persian complement of its nominal factor; as, J ^ a ^ juiAflJ^jj i£&\ s^JJij (bu d&qiqaya tahsili vwftquf &yledl) he acquired cognizance of (about) this subtle point; ^jJLi A^LO> ol>}* uJ,-» (sarf-l mnzjat-1 blza'a qlllndi) expenditure of the modicum of capital was made (i. e., the modicum of capital was spent). N 178 OTTOMAN TUEKISH GRAMMAR. SECTION V I I . Syntax of the Participle. In conversation, the substantive qualified by a particle, active or passive, is sometimes understood, and the participle is used as a substantive; as, JSJ AJS (gelane ver) give (thou it) to him (or her) who comes; A*S\J *S^X>S (gldlylmd baqmll) look not at that which I wear; i*jyo ^ i ^ b (yapajaghim! sorma) ask not what I shall do. The active participle present of ^.ft (rnb'l meskyunda vwaqi memalik u buldan) £A# countries and towns situated in the inhabited quarter (of the globe); ^jj^oj^y^j^=>'x^ »JJLX^=»^ (bn kltabdd mez- kyur fdnun u ma'arlf ) ^ 6 sciences and matters of knowledge mentioned in this hook. Active participles govern all their objects in the same way as the verbs from which they derive; so also do the passive participles, excepting only the object they each qualify as an adjective; as, ^Ul ^J (qapu dchdn) he who opens a door; \ S O * 4J1 JI (ellm He dchdfghfm q&pii) the door that opened with my hand; I < *» » J J O - A ^ J J ! JJ-S j , ^ ^ll> (khaliq-l h&r dnjlhan), ^JU. d b l ^ j ^ ^ (her du jlhanin khallqi) the Creator of both worlds; Jj.S-s S-i J j - L i 0 (makhluq-u yed-1 qudretl), J JO * O /O/OJ *. jjjls.* db^t',S9 J_J (yM-1 qudretlerlnin makhluqu) the creature Opt J ,0* *i* of the hand of Ris almighty power; ^\j ^\ &x^j>\ (aferinende1 in u an) the Creator of this and that (all things); g»jx-L) &<**»*> j ^ \ ±j>. (reside3! kyungyure- 3 ! charkh-i esir) which has reached the battlement of the ethereal sphere. But sometimes Arabic active participles of transitive verbs 2 o / govern their direct objects as do their verbs ; thus, 0 ^ 9 c£-~* ^ s ^ ^ s j ^ (keyf lyyet-1 mezkyure-1 mubin) which explains the said circumstance. SECTION VIIL Syntax of the Verbal Nouns and Infinitive. Turkish verbal nouns are constructed with their subjects, when substantives, as any two substantives ; thus, ^JS nz)x*o*\ (ahmedln galmesl) the coming of Ahmed, Ahmed's \hl&dj^^l coming; (ahmedln g&ldiyl) Ahmed's (past action of) having come; jJ^AJsTd.u&.l (ahmedln gelejeyl) Ahmed's (future action of) coming. When the subject is a pronoun, it is put in the genitive still, 180 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. and the Turkish verbal noun takes the possessive suffix of the O xO , O «« subject's number and person ; as, *AJ6 +*> (benlm galmein) my coming ; duSo±b du:«* (sanln galdlyln) thy having come ; c^JLii ijJ&o>6& (anlerln galejeklerl) their future coming. Turkish verbal nouns and infinitives are constructed with their objects, direct or indirect, exactly as their verbs; thus, ?*>*jy ,jl (anl gyurmem) my seeing him (her, it) ; cslX-^db *^*)t (izmire galejeyin) thy future ifi^i coining to Smyrna ; &±+*\ A^,JJ L-JJJLA-© ,JJ^ (pedeiina ahmedlii dun mektub yazdigh!) } Ahmed s having written a letter to his father yesterday. Arabic verbal nouns are constructed with their agents sometimes in the Turkish, sometimes in the Arabic, and sometimes o J JJ in the Persian manner; o o'„ as, +*jjj (vurud^im) my oC arrival; ouifC Jo j r>L*s? (tahsilm) thy study; \£jij£ (tahrirl) his writing; 4iJl xi*> siinM 'llah), AJI SC^> (sune-l llah) the act of God ; J^J\J^J ztjd (Idare-i pergyar-1 &fkyar) a revolving of the compasses of the thoughts. Arabic verbal nouns are constructed with their objects in the same manner as the compound verbs formed of them ; as, c_^_*> fjjjsJLo (maqdurl sarf ) an employing one's utmost; ^^J j U * ALOSS ^ U S ] ^ (fann-1 jagraflyay! tahslla medar) a help to un acquiring the science of geography. But they may also be- constructed with them as two simple substantives, either in SYNTAX. 181 O " O J J O* the Turkish or Persian manner; as, J^> t ^ j i * o r ^ j i * u - i ^ ; and again, AJLOSJ diUKi>. ^ or «wUI»*>. ^ J ~ o ^ ; &c. In all cases excepting their construction with their subjects or objects, the Turkish verbal nouns and infinitives are constructed in sentences exactly like any other substantives; as, J* LJJ^ O^J? tsUlj' (dlmek bunddn evli dlr) to die is better than O , * + O JO J this; (j±£]\>. a,y, » LJ^i (q^rtalrndghd ch&lishdi) he laboured at escaping; +±u\ ±-+i>J yjg} j^Sl* (y&qmaq ichln tertlb etdlm) / arranged, have arranged (it) for burning; J^S ^jV .^-la (g&lmesl lazim dlyll) his coming (is) not necessary; o / o ^ cJ t+JL^dLjtxf . \) +* & .> (glde-bllejeylme sh&b-hem var) wy doubt exists, i. e., ;> / have a doubt as to my being able to go. SECTION I X . Syntax of the Gerunds. The gerunds are not much used in conversation; there the discourse is broken up into as many sentences as may be needed, each with its personal verb; as, *±j>jjj» +±& ?*jf p & (gltdlm, gyurdAm, gdldlm, kh&ber verdlm) I went; I saw; I came; I gave information. But, in the literary style, one long phrase, ending with one personal verb, will contain a number of clauses, each ending with a gerund (which thus acts to the ear, as well as to the eye, like our commas and semicolons); as, *sSjJ& csl^jj C^JSS 1?2 o o OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. o*, tif-y^j^ ( g ^ P > gyurerek, galdikde, khaber verdlm), / , going and seeing, on coming back, reported. When compound verbs are used, the auxiliary gerunds may O JJ > O^ o be omitted once or twice in a long sentence ; as, £cjj ijuot* j> ^^sA ^-sti S±**y *JJI j (blr mevzi a vurud, ve anda blr mtqdar qu'ud Mup,....) ... arriving at a certain place, and sitting down there awhile, .... In this case, however, a conjunction requires to be introduced in lieu of the gerund omitted; as is seen in the example given. The subjects, and direct or indirect objects, of the gerunds are constructed as with their verbs. But, as the gerunds cannot indicate the person and number of their subjects, the appropriate personal pronoun must be expressed before them, when the subject is not a substantive ; as, u^j-jj-ijl c->Ls-5 +$\ (adam kitab oquyub) man, reading a booh (or boohs), ; j £ ^ l J^l^ *y»> A*J (ftrmanlm size vwasil olijaq) at what time my command shall attain unto you, shu adam! gy&rerek) / , seeing that man, SECTION X . ; tsK»»y #$\ jZ> ^ (ben, ; &c. Syntax of the Adverb. The adverb precedes the verb or adjective qualified by i t ; as, ^jsh c ^ W (sabahleyln galdi) he came in the morning; J j / ( J j ^ ( c l l ^ l g y u z a ) ^ry pretty. SYNTAX. 183 The negative J $ J (dlyll) not, precedes the verb substantive, expressed or understood, but follows the substantive or adjective which it negatives; as, +Jb * ^S young; (genj dlylllm) / am not ^uJS^jJ&i (Hqlsiz dlyllsln) thou art not unintelligent; j i JS^ +±\ (ad&m diyil dir) he or it is not a man; &c. The adverbial suffixes e*h (dek), ^-^»>> (deyin), follow a noun of time, place, or condition, in the dative; as, [^*^=»^ A»L<» (sabahd deyln) until morning; ^MjjS)J O ^ as London; (lindurayadek) as far - J J &±&*Jj\ (tUnmed&k) until death. They follow the third gerund also, put in this same dative case, and thus form a verbal limit of time; as, d-iA^jJs^ (gellnjeyedek) until (I, thou, &c.) come, came. The agent must be named or under- stood; as, &*&n& sS tf (b£n gldlnjeyed&k) until I go (or went); ts)±v.*fj\j ±>\jj\ v>^$L* (mektubum 6raya varinjayadek) until my letter reach (or reached) there. The tense of this gerund is decided by the context, in like manner as its agent and object. The adverb »;>-> (gyAre) according, also follows a dative; as, »,^A*ia£ (e&qlima gyure) according to my judgment; *jS& (bUna gyure) according to me; &c. The adverbs ISJ (yaiia), ^ V > (d6layi), JJ)J\ (utdru) rela- tively, follow substantives or infinitives in the ablative ; as, L ,j^lLS^ (kltabdan d)\ ^±5* »:•> (gltmekdan uturu) relatively to (about, concerning) going. Although it is not grammatically erroneous, in answering a question, to use the affirmative adverb o j l (evet) or ^ (bell) ygs, or the negative j|j) (y6q) o r ^ i , (khayr) wo, when appropriate, it is unidiomatic to do so. The more general custom, whether one of those adverbs be used or not, is to repeat the word or words of the question on which the interrogation turns, with such grammatical modifications as may be necessary. Thus, turning back to the five questions instanced in Chap. I L , sect. 21 (p. 151-2), the respective answers may be : 1, ^ (evet, ben) yes, I (am to ride); 2, &fjlj\ ojl JJJ> ' (yoq, olblr gyun) no, the day after ; &c. SECTION X L Syntax of the Preposition. The Turkish preposition always follows the word it governs, noun, pronoun, or verbal derivative, as is seen in Chap. I L , sections 1 (p. 51), 4 (p. 82), 5 (p. 88), 6 (p. 89), 7 (p. 90), and in Chap. III., section 8 (p. 179) ; but the Arabic and Persian prepositions always precede; as, j J - c ^ U, (eale 't-tahqlq) in truth; j\j*j> (ber qarar) in permanence (without change); * A S ^ ('ala hide) singly; *i1jjl <3 (fi '1-waqf) in / a c t ; JU> ^l> (bl-eyyl halin) in any case; t^jJ&II io ^ (*&la SYNTAX. 185 kela 't-t&qdireyn) upon either supposition; j>j*»j\ (ez ser-1 nev) from a new beginning (over again, again). A preposition may govern two or more substantives in a sentence; as, A^L>.IJ O ^ C • c^U^lj Jl to his family, companions, posterity, and friends. But, as the Arabic and Persian preposition precedes the adjectives that qualify, as well as the substantives qualified, so the Turkish preposition is placed after all these; consequently, in Persian construction, and when the substantive is followed by the possessive suffixes, the Turkish preposition is separated from the substantive it governs, sometimes by a considerable distance; as, dLl *GC (baba-m lie) with my * 0 • Mi J father; J »ji^L> c-*s? J) (b& muhlbb-i sadiq-da) in this faithful friend; ^£lj (£b#Ud (j^j *J> ^ t e (qallyun-l kyuh-ntlnmn-i httmayunun bash!) the head of the mountain-like imperial galley. SECTION X I L Syntax of the Conjunction. All conjunctions, except the enclitic »^ (de, da), or ^s (dakhi), too, also, head the phrase they belong to. The enclitic conversational »a, or literary ^ o , is placed after the word of a phrase to which special attention is directed; thus : (jjJS C J J L ^ O ^ J J J J U J (Istanboldan dakhl, or Istanbodarida - O l O x - O J O x O top galdl) cannon came from Constantinople also ; i_>jL^jJjJUJ 186 o^ <^j& OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. * Lr &o (Istanbildan t6p dakhi galdl) cannon, too, came front Constantinople. This enclitic is repeated after each member of a phrase linked together by its use; as, »JJ«*> *j±f »JJJ (ben-dd gederlm, san-da) / , too, will go, as also thou ; j , j ^ » j*>-j\ »jJjl »J^*» »J^ (b&n-da, san-da, 6-da, uchumuz glderlz) I, thou, and he too, will all three go. I t is often placed after a verb in the conditional, its sense being then, in English, rendered by even; as, »^ A13> (galse-de) even should he come; *.3A~J>1 ^ ^ ^ ( g a l m l s h Ise-de) even though he be come; S ^ J I I J S (galseydt-da) had he even come; m+Jj\ dts*dJ (galejek 6lsa-da) even should he be about to come (even should he think of coming, or resolve to come). After other verbs than conditionals, it is enclitic with each that enters a phrase, and answers to our both, followed by and or also; as, sj^jjS »jwo,j!& (gelliim-da, gyururum-da) / will both come, and see also; sj^jll *I±*JJJ3 *x*jj-6 ( — , —, beyanlr-lse-m, alirlm-da) I will come, and I will see, and if I admire, will also buy. The conjunctions j w l , K&J, U , in the sense of whether ... , or whether, jhs»\ (eyer) if, with *>J> (ger-chl, vulg. gerche) or A ^ ^ a l (eyer-chl, vulg. eg&rche) although, put the verb or verbs of their phrase in the conditional; as, A-1J$U A-JTU (ha gals£, SYNTAX. 187 ha galmasa) whether he come, or (whether he come) not; i.Jbj£s>\ (eyer galslt) if he come ; m^A J!n& ^j^=»\ (egerchl galmlsh Isada) although he be even come (even though he be come). When the copulative j joins one verb or phrase to another, it is pronounced ve, in conformity (to a certain degree) with its original Arabic pronunciation ; but when, in Persian construction, it unites two nouns, substantive or adjective, it takes the vowel-sound of u or u, and joins on, in pronunciation, as though in a syllable, with the consonant preceding i t ; as, JO V / OS, o *"-> J 'O' ij*J> j (jjJs (g&ldl ve gyurdu) he came, and he saw; J U I j t^Jj^ (devlet u Iqbal) fortune and prosperity; <^>~»,JJJj ^^ (qavl-yu ten-durust) strong and healthy. The Persian conjunction aT(ki) that, always connects two members of a phrase, and should never be supposed to be a relative pronoun in Turkish (as it really is in Persian, as well as a conjunction); as, *S Jjl ^jls* (ma'lum 61a ki) be it known that . . . . Sometimes the clause that follows shows the cause or reason of that which precedes ; the conjunction may then O yr O '\S~' ' ' O S * 0°'C " be rendered by for or because; as, ^ ^ < ^ D < 3 j 2dj\ JJ^Ui o m O * '•» Jo J OOX -x^O*' ^jaJ ^ J J J ! du.1 ^M*» JJ,A£* (nlyazmend ilalfin, ve nale-kyunan, kl jins-1 magferete sim-i eshk 6ldu. nuqud) let us be instant in supplications, and assiduous in moans, for the silver of (man's) tears has been made the coins payable for the wares of (God's) mercy* o J i Jo j •* n •> o J J (The inversion ^5J ^ j j j ! for ^jJjl sju is poetical.) iOS OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. After a verb signifying to say (which also may mean, to say to one's self, to think), or to ask, the conjunction *Sintroduces, what is,was, or will be said or thought; but the question must be in the mood, tense, number, and person, in the very words, used by the speaker or thinker ; as, ^1$ ^Jo £jfj (diyor ki, yarin gellrlm) he says, I will come to-morrow ; >* £ j A-S ijSjye (s6rdd kl, bii ne dlr) he ashed, What is this ? We see, then, that A, so used, is the equivalent of our sign of quotation, the inverted commas. We cannot alter the phrase as is our custom, and say, he says he will come, or he ashed what that was. Occasionally, in a certain style, this hj& is omitted ; as, ij\ )j?-*jjj*(g&frk dlyirler) they say, We will come; i. e., they say they will come ; UXJ± *±+jyS (gyurmadlm dldl) he said, I did not see (him, her, it, them, you, &c.) ; i. e., he said he did O «" not see. In this case, if the verb used be any other than dUi«>, J the Turkish conjunction JJO (dlyn, vulg. deye), which really is Ox o •» the first or fifth gerund, modified by usage, of e*U^, viz., i__>£j> or d p , is introduced before the verb used, and after the quotation ; it is the equivalent of our saying; as, JJO ^y\ JSJUS SYNTAX. O 189 O p y -*}Jlj*, (keyfinlz lyl-ml, dlyA, stibal etdlm) / asked (of him or her), saying, Is your health yood ? i. e., i" ashed how he was; Jfjjl^) J& j P jj3*k (belmeyiiiz, dlyu, Inkyar Idlyorler) they deny, saying, We know not; i. e., they deny, and say they know O O 'O ' J O ^^ O O/ not; * JJJ! U p . JJ^ j - X * jJ£ (galmazslhiz, dlyu, khulya etdlm) / formed an idea, saying (to myself), You will not come ; i. e., / imagined that you would not come; jS^s^^ AJ (ne dlyu, gai- dlniz) saying what (to thyself), ar£ £/iow come? i.e., w;/ia£ are yow come for ? The conjunction sometimes, as in Persian, serves to connect an incidental qualifying phrase to an antecedent noun, as though it were a relative pronoun; but in such case it never undergoes declension or takes a preposition, the following O J O + J O' phrase being complete in all its parts ; as, J^l Q - L - J ±+S» ^ a (j£^LfcLi«li O j j a g^ka5^J Ass jy&j J^>\ *j>y *> j^ ]/*» ASIC ^J Jj^lj^. (hamd n. slpas 61 khudav&nd-l bi-'lUete seza dlr, ki, vujud-1 enhar u qA'ur-i blhar yek-qatre-1 qudret-1 na-mutenahllerl dlr) glory and lauds are worthy of that uncaused Lord God, of whose infinite power the existence of rivers and the depths of oceans are but a single drop. T h e foregoing example shows that it is often difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the phrase that follows JLJ is a qualificative, or the exposition of a reason. We might 190 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. take it in this latter sense, and translate: for, the existence of rivers, fyc, are but one drop, fyc. But, in ethical works and the like, generally composed by members of the 'ulema class (Doctors of Canon Law) on a Persian or Arabic model, the clause that follows A) is generally qualificative, and the style is anti-Turkish. Thus : *J>{j£'Jt> dj\ e^^-o 4 ^ o i ^ J t ^ AW vs*** c ^ i (her kes kl dest-1 hlmmet lid hHbl-1 metin-1 edqld mtiteshebbis 6\k, ) ; every one who shall take hold of the firm cable of reason with the hand of endeavour, ; j±jja^> J^S.JA) A J^jf^>- j> (ML janverler kl > 5 n&zar-i 'Ibret-la m&nztir dnr, ) these animals which are looked upon with a regard for instruction, The conjunctions (ta kl) in order that, A-5^>)li (shayed kl) perhaps, lest, A-£_*tab (md-dam-kl) as long as, since, A> tallo (me-bada kl) lest, & j £ * (meyer kl) unless, require their verbs to be in the optative; as, A-JIS \*£ A-> U ( tdhdmmnin q&lmayd) in order that no power of endurance be left in him; Jdj\ *j&* A) jjli. ( mnnhezlm ilaler) lest they be routed; Jllljl »JO\1L A-£-cbL ( AJJ! 4-ij^ & \&>* ( ( h&yatdd ilaler) since they are alive ; u yle ola) tes£ it be so; A!JI J^S AS ^-X-* gy uzel 6U) wwZfSS Atf (sfo, it) be beautiful 191 SYNTAX. SECTION X I I I . Syntax of the Interjection, Some interjections are accompanied by nouns and pronouns, some by nouns only, others have no accompaniment, and some precede verbs. When accompanied by a noun, the noun is always in the nominative, excepting with the interjection j j L i (yazlq) ; as, J»IJLJ A) (vwakh babam) alas, my father ! jLcjl tf.j-sh (aferin, vulg. aferim oghlum) well done, my boy ! y^±\ \j±S (gldl edebO SO + Oi* slz) 0, impudent fellow ! * i l ^ i (j\ (ey qardashfm) well, brother! O J J J O O x#* Oxx *•• Ox (•^W eA^ (aman chojughum) 0, ^ child! +xJ>\ Ls^o (merhaba efeudlm) 6 W s blessing on you, sir ! They always precede the o nouo. * The word j j i j is used in this way also, but it further O x «»x O x permits its substantive to be put in the dative; as, ^-\_*l J;IJ> (yazlq emeylm), «ux_*l jfjl> (yazlq emeylme) alas my trouble ! alas for my trouble ! When accompanied by a pronoun, except the interjection i£X-S (gldl), the pronoun must be in the dative ; as, &J JJ\J (yazlq bana) poor me ! &-** ±\J (vwakh sana) aZas / o r thee ! s^lil ^.^-il (aferim anlara) 2^^ZZ done, they ! The exceptional is constructed with the accusative of the second person singular, which it may precede or follow; as, ^ sanl) or {jxf ^ ^s$ (gldl (sanl gldl) faugh, thou (good-for-nothing)! 192 OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR. Interjections indicative of a desire for the future or regret for the past, are constructed with the conditional, aorist or past accordingly; as, ( Q ^^ gilsln) just let him only come ! Arabic phrases are often used as interjections, generally after proper names; as, ^UJ y\ (jj** f^e &\j JJU? 4Jll jwo ^t> ^JL ^ U (jJJjsi > j * ! ^ ^ 1 -SVS Majesty, the champion of the faith, Sultan Selim Khan, the shadows of whose clemency may God spread over the crowns of. the heads of mankind, so long as the months repeat themselves and the years renew themselves I FINIS. ( 193 ) ADDENDUM. I N p. 45, after line 5, as a further remark on the uses of l e t t e r ^ , the following rule is not without its u s e ; viz.,— In a few words of Persian origin only, the letter j , following a letter +, and itself followed by a long vowel-letter 1, is suppressed and lost in the pronunciation. *\j> kh'ah, jj^alji. kh'ahlsh. Thus ^1^*. kh'an, The word A&.IJ£. kh'aja1, of this class, and its derivatives, JC^\^, J ^ J A J J ^ . , & C , have been corrupted in Turkish into khojd, khoj&gyan, khojaliq, &c. In Persian proper, a very few words beginning with j i . , without a following \ , elide the j in like manner in pronouncing ; but this is never observed in Turkish, unless it may be in the rhyme-words of ancient poetry. Thus the word J^. (usually read khush in Persian, khosh in Turkish) is made to rhyme with ijy vesh, for instance; and in consequence must then be read kh'&sh. ^ (usually khud, Turkish khid) is made to rhyme with j j bed ; something after the manner of our poets, who make wind rhyme with find, mind, &c. This is what is styled Aj±x*j\j (vwawl ma'dule), deflected j 9 in Persian, ( 195 ) INDEX. A. Accidence, p. 51. Active participles, 100, 105. „ „ aorist,100—102. „ „ future, 100, 101. „ „ past, 100, 101. „ „ perfect, 100,101. „ „ present,100,101. Active verb, 92. Addendum on 2j J*« J)J , 193. Adjectival expressions, 72. Adjectives, 61, 68—74. „ Arabic, 61, 69. „ Persian, 68, 70—72. „ „ Compound, 70-2. „ Syntax of, 168. „ Turkish, 68, 69,73-4. Adverbial expressions, 154. Adverbs, Arabic, 73. „ Syntax of, 182. „ Turkish, 73. Affirmative verb, 92. Alphabet by forms, 2. „ Numeral, 3. „ Semitic, Greek, and Latin, 3. Alphabet,Semitic,Greek,and Latin, Synopsis of, 4. Aorist active participle, 100—102. Aorist passive participle, 103. Aorist tense, 100. „ „ conditional, 109. „ „ indicative, 107. „ „ necessitative, 108. „ ,, optative, 109. Apposition, 160. Arabic active participles (nomen agentis), 59, 61, 62. Arabic adjectival expressions, 72. „ adjectives, 61,69. „ adverbs, 73. „ broken plurals, 55—60. „ chapters of derivation, 57, 62—64. Arabic diminutives, 60, 67. „ irregular plurals, 55—60. „ noun of instrument and receptacle, 60. Arabic noun of kind or manner, 60. „ „ place of abundance, 60. 196 INDEX. Arabic nonn of time and place, 60. „ „ unity, 60. Arabic ordinals, 78. „ passive participle (nomen patientis), 59, 61, 62. Arabic plurals, 55. „ „ irregular, 55—60. „ „ regular, 55. Arabic quadriliteral roots, 65. „ regular plurals, 55. „ substantives, 53, 54. „ triliteral roots, 56. „ verbal nouns (nomen verbi), 58, 61-2. Brevity, Conversational, 158. Broken(irregular) plural, 19,55—60. C. Cardinal numbers, 74-7. Categories of verbs, 99. „ Complex, 99,^119. Category, First Complex, 119,120. „ Second „ 119, 125. „ Simple, of verbs, 99,119. Third Complex, 119,129. Causal gerund-like locution, 113. Causative verb, 93. „ „ Compound, 150. Closed syllable, 27. Combined (true Turkish) Conjugation, 133. Complex Categories of Yerb, 99, 119. Complex fractional numbers, 80. Compound Persian Adjectives, 70. Yerbs, 148. „ Active, 149. „ Intransitive, 149. „ Passive, 149. „ Transitive, 149. Conditional mood, 100. Conjugation, 99. „ Combined (true Turkish), 133. Conjugational root, 96. Conjunctions, 156. „ Syntax of, 185. Consonants, 15. ,, Hard, 47. „ Movent, 31, 32 ter, 33 ter. Consonants, Neutral, 48. „ Quiescent, 27. Soft, 47. Conversational brevity, 158. D. Dates of documents, &c, 81. Declination of Demoustratives, 88. „ Interrogatives, 89. „ Nouns, 51. „ Personal Pronouns, 82. Defective Yerbs, 98. Demonstrative Pronouns, 88. Derivation of Yerbs, 92. Determinate Yerb, 93. 197 INDEX. Digits, 81. Diminutive, Arabic, 67. „ Persian, 67. „ Turkish, 66, 73. Directing vowels, 27. « Distributive numbers, 78. Documents, Dates of, 81. Dominant (letter or vowel), 48, 49. Dubitative Verb, 141. „ „ Compound, 150. E. Esere, 16 bis. Etymology, 51. Euphony, 15, 48—50. Expressions, Adjectival, 72. „ Adverbial, 154. F. Facile Verbs, 141* „ „ Compound, 150. First Complex Category of Verbs, 119, 120. First Person Plural of Verbs, 116. „ „ „ Pronoun, 82. „ „ Singular of Verbs, 115. „ „ Pronoun, 82. fi Formation of the Tenses, 106. Fractional numbers, 79. Future Active Participle, 100, 101. Passive „ , 103. Tense, Imperative, 100. „ Indicative, 108. „ Past, 100. Verbal Noun, 104. G. Gender, 51. General Verbal Noun, 103. Gerund, Fifth, 112. „ First, 111. „ Fourth, 112. „ Second, 111. Seventh, 112. Sixth, 112. r, Third, 112. Gerund-like locutions, 110, 111. „ „ Causal, 110, 113. Gerund-like locutions of proportion, 113. Gerund-like locutions of time, 111, 114,115. Gerund-like locution of time, Fifth, 115. „ First, 114, „ „ „ Fourth, 114. „ „ „ Second,114. „ >, », Sixth, 115. „ Third, 114. Gerunds, 99, 110. „ Syntax of, 181* H. Half, 79. Hard consonants, 47. „ vowels, 48. Hemze, 10, 30—33. „ omitted, 24. „ Radical, 30, 31. „ Servile, 30, 31. 198 INDEX. I. Identity of Semitic, Greek, and Latin Alphabets, 3. Imperative Mood, 100. Imperfect Tense, 100. „' „ indicative, 107. Impotential Verbs, 92. „ „ Compound, 150 Indefinite numerals (pronouns), 80. Indeterminate Verbs, 93. Indicative Mood, 100. Infinitive Mood, 100. „ „ Syntax of, 179. Iuterjections, 157. Syntax of, 191. Interrogation, 151. Interrogative Pronouns, 89. Verbs, 151. Intransitive Verbs, 92. „ „ Compound, 149. J. Junctional Letters, 9. L. 1 Junctional, 9. Names of the, 1, 10—14. Non-Junctional, 9. of prolongation, 17, of the Alphabet, 1, Eadical, 30, 31. Eeduplicated, 29, 30, 32. Servile, 28, 30, 31. Locutions, Gerund-like, 110—115. Letters, „ „ „ „ „ „ „ M. Medd, 24—26. Months, Signs for, in dates, 81. Moods, 100. Mood, Conditional, 100. „ Imperative, „ „ Indicative, „ ,, Infinitive, „ „ Necessitative, „ „ Optative, „ N. Names of Letters, 1,10—14. Necessitative Mood, 100. Negative Verbs, 92. „ „ Compound, 150. Neuter Verbs, 97. Neutral consonants, 48. „ vowels, 48. Noun Adjective, 68. „ „ Arabic, 68, 69. „ „ Persian, 68. „ „ „ Compound,70. „ „ Syntax of, 168. „ „ Turkish, 68. „ Substantive, 51. „ „ Syntax of, 161. „ Verbal, 99, 103-5. „ „ Syntax of, 179. Numbers and persons of verbs, 115. Numeral Alphabet, 3. Numeral s, 74 — 82. „ Cardinal, Arabic, 74-7. „ ,, Persian, 74-7. INDEX. Numerals, Cardinal, Turkish, 74-6. Distributive, 78. Fractional, 79. Indefinite, 80. Interrogative, 76. Ordinal, Arabic, 78. „ Persian, 78. „ Turkish, 77. Turkish Peculiar, 8Q. Syntax of, 170. 0. Open syllables, 27. Optative Mood, 100. Orthographic signs, 15, 28—33. P. Participles, 100. Active, 100—105. „ Aorist, 100,102. „ Future, 100,i01. „ „ General, 100. Past, 100, 101. Perfect,100,101. „ „ Present, 100-2. Passive, 101, 103,105. „ „ Aorist, 103. „ „ Future, 103. ,„ Syntax of, 178. „ Twenty-eight, 101. Passive participles, 101, 103, 1Q5. „ verb, 92. „ „ Compound, 149. „ verbal adjective, 104. Past active participle, 100,101. 199 Past future tense, 100. Past future indicative, 100, 108. Past tense, 100. „ „ indicative, 107. Peculiar Turkish numerals, 80. „ „ relatives, 91. Perfect active participle, 100, 101. Perfect tense, 100. ,, indicative, 107. ,, verbal noun, 103. Permissive verbs, 93. Persian adjectives, 68, 70-2. „ ,, Compound, 70-2. Persian diminutive, 67. „ letters, 2, 13. „ plurals of nouns, 54. „ substantives, 53, 54. Personal pronouns, 82. Phonetic values of letters, 15,34—50. Phonetic values of vowels,17,48-50 Pluperfect tense, 100. „ „ indicative, 108. Plural of nouns, Arabic irregular, 55—60. Plural of nouns, Arabic regular, 55. „ „ Persian, 54. „ „ Turkish, 51. Possessive pronouns, 83-8. Potential verbs, 141-2. „ „ Compound, 150. Precision in writing, 158. Prepositions, 156. „ Syntax of, 184. Present active participle, 100-2. „ tense, 100. „ „ indicative, 106. 200 INI Present tense infinitive, 110. „ verbal noun, 103. Prolongation, Letters of, 17. Pronoun, 82. „ Demonstrative, 88. „ Indefinite (numeral), 80. „ Interrogative, 89. „ Personal, 82. „ Possessive, 83—88. „ Relative, 90. „ „ Peculiar Turkish, 91. Q. Q derived from of adverbs, 182. ) of conjunctions, 185. 99 * of gerunds, 181. » of infinitive, 179. it of interjections, 191. ti of numerals, 170. » of participles, 178. 99 of prepositions, 184. ti » of pronouns, 173. of substantives, 161. V of verbal nouns, 179. > J of verbs, 174. ti T. Table of verbal derivation, 94-5. Tenses, 100,104,106—110. „ Aorist conditional, 109. „ „ indicative, 107. „ „ necessitative, 108. „ „ optative, 109. „ Formation of the, 106. „ Future imperative, 100. j, „ indicative, 108. INDEX. Tense, Imperfect, 100. „ indicative, 107. Past, 100. „ indicative, 107Future, 100. „ indicative, 108. Perfect, 100. „ indicative, 108. Pluperfect, 100. „ indicative, 108. Present, 100. „ indicative, 106, „ infinitive, 110. Teshdid, 32. Third Complex Category of Verbs, 119,129. Third person plural, 118. „ „ singular, 106. Transitive verb, 92. Transliteration, 15,17, 34—47. Turkish adjectives, 68, 69, 73-4. „ adverbs, 73. „ cardinal numbers, 74-6. „ „ interrogative, 76. „ conjugation (combined), 133. Turkish ordinal numbers, 77. „ plural of substantives, 51. „ substantives, 51. ,, true combined conjugation, 133. U. Ustun, 16. Uturu, 16. 201 Values of letters, 15—50. Verb, 92—153. Active, 92. Affirmative, 92. Auxiliary, 149. Causative, 93. „ Compound, 150. Combined conjugation of, 133. „ Complex Categories of, 99— 133. Verb, Complex Category of, First, 119, 120. Verb, Complex Category of, Second, 119, 125. Verb, Complex Category of, Third, 119, 129. Verb, Compound, 148. Conjugation of, 99. Defective, 98. Determinate, 93. Dubitative, 141. „ Compound, 150. Facile, 141. „ Compound, 150. Impotential, 92. „ Compound, 150. Indeterminate, 93. Interrogative, 151. Intransitive, 92. „ Compound, 149. Negative, 92. „ Compound, 150. Neuter, 97. 202 INDEX. Verb of Existence, Non-Existence, Presence, or Absence, 147. Verb, Passive, 92. „ „ Compound, 149. „ Permissive, 93. „ Potential, 141-2. „ „ Compound, 150. „ Reciprocal, 93. „ „ Compound, 150. „ Reflexive, 98. „ Simple, 93. „ Simple Category of, 99-119. „ Substantive, 144. „ Syntax of, 174. „ Transitive, 92. „ „ Compound, 149. Verbal adjective passive, 104. „ derivation, 92. Table of, 94. „ Nouns, 99,103—105. 1 as a vowel, 17, 23, 26, 27. „ numeral, < 1. \ „ consonant, 23. T24. 1 25. i£i 2. + 0 *c 0 ^\) JVxfo*>\ 5 7 . S^M! 1 6 . Verbal Nouns, Future, 104. „ „ General, 103. Perfect, 103. „ „ Present, 103. „ „ Syntax of, 179. Vowels, 15. „ Directing, 27. „ Hard, 48. „ Letters, 15,16. „ Long, 17, his. Neutral, 48. „, Points, 15, 16. „ Short, 16, 17. „ Soft, 48. W. Written digits, 81. „ signs for months in dates, 81. ^C j Q 57. ^ * r * 0 1 so (3V J "*1 57. ^ b ]%A\ 57. ^C j£Ji• 57 v • ^G JL^i 57. 203 INDEX. x o St o ^ J ^ 57. j C JlLJl 57. A ill* (pi. J,£l) 57. J f 82. x- • O/O ^C j!L5l 57. 4 82. ^ 1 19, 28. l&L 167. Wx Jjl 82, 88. " 0 0 J Jjjl 88. x* t5JjJ 1 0 6 . £j Cl 20. • . ' ' . * ' . © i 9> (sing, x* x —j > /OJ 4«oA^«... 9. a ox aJL»j . . . 9. O „ ox 167. • X J j j ^ l J ^ 20. o J o J ^>L&> 56. ^x J* 146, 160, 175. 204 INDEX. J^ 56. AJI^IIO, c^o y», ^ c ^ jj^«i, ^ 82- j consonant, 2 3 ; vowel, 17,20. o % 147. li, 29. 88, Jj***» 8«7. AJJJJW J\J in Addendum, 193. s consonant, 15, 19 ; vowel, 19—23 ; numeral, 4. fjj* 53. yo, j i 56, 57. ]%* 151—153. jjJLJ , < , j ) ^ AJ 9 0 . U ^\U1 164. j+t 161. Vj* 164. . >*>1 Ju*» O O . o AJ! ^ J * iyJL 10,30—33. 57. ^C j i s 57. ^ consonant, 1 5 ; vowel, 1 7 ; numeral, 4. ^ b j £ 57. ^ pronounced as \ when final, 10. ^,9, original of our letter y q, 4, 8, 4 0 . -IS (whence L5-^^) 76, J^i 147. 1. 10. .1 16. L 20. A as a conj unction, 187- -190. > J^ 90. 7 * ^89. 161. 16 20. JL 16. 1 ° J °* 20. L 28. 1. 24—26. o Jx,.° " 7 C J O ^ jjo~+* (also Jl 29. L 30—33. e 166. London: 'Gilbert & Rivington, Limited, St, John's Sq., Clerkenwell Road. A LIST OF KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO.'S' (LIMITED) PUBLICATIONS. 7.90. 57 and $9, Ludgate Hill; and i, Paternoster Square, London. A LIST OF KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO.'S (LIMITED) PUBLICATIONS. CONTENTS. PAGE GENERAL L I T E R A T U R E . . 2 THEOLOGY AND PHILOSOPHY. 31 ENGLISH AND FOREIGN PHILOSOPHICAL LIBRARY . 42 SCIENCE 44 INTERNATIONAL SCIENTIFIC SERIES . . .48 ORIENTAL, EGYPTIAN, ETC. . 52 PAGE TRUBNER'S ORIENTAL SERIES MILITARY W O R K S . EDUCATIONAL POETRY . . . . NOVELS AND TALES BOOKS FOR THE YOUNG PERIODICALS . 68 72 73 80 84 87 GENERAL LITERATURE. Actors, E m i n e n t . Edited by WILLIAM ARCHER. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. each. I. W i l l i a m C h a r l e s M a c r e a d y . By WILLIAM ARCHER. II. T h o m a s B e t t e r t o n . By. R. W. LOWE. ADAMS, W. H. Davenport.—The W h i t e K i n g ; or, Charles the First, and Men and Women, Life and Manners, etc., in the First Half of the Seventeenth Century. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 21s. AGASSIZ, Louis.—An E s s a y o n C l a s s i f i c a t i o n . 8vo, 12s. ALLIBONE, S. A.—A C r i t i c a l D i c t i o n a r y of E n g l i s h L i t e r a t u r e a n d B r i t i s h a n d A m e r i c a n A u t h o r s . From the Earliest Accounts to the latter half of the Nineteenth Century. 3 vols. Royal 8vo, £$ &s. A m a t e u r M e c h a n i c ' s ' W o r k s h o p ( T h e ) . A Treatise containing Plain and Concise Directions for the Manipulation of Wood and Metals. By the Author of " T h e Lathe and its Uses." Sixth Edition. Numerous Woodcuts. Demy 8vo, 6s. A m e r i c a n A l m a n a c a n d T r e a s u r y of F a c t s , S t a t i s t i c a l , Financial, a n d Political. Edited by AINSWORTH R. SPOFFORD. Published Yearly. Crown 8vo, *js. 6d. each. Regan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications. 3 AMOS, Professor Sheldon.—The H i s t o r y a n d P r i n c i p l e s of t h e C i v i l L a w of R o m e . An aid to the Study of Scientific and Comparative Jurisprudence. Demy 8vo, 16s. ANDERSON, William.—Practical Mercantile Corresponde n c e . A Collection of Modern Letters of Business, with Notes, Critical and Explanatory, and an Appendix. Thirtieth Edition. Crown 8vo, 3^. 6d. ANDERSON, W., and TUGMAN, J. ^ . — M e r c a n t i l e C o r r e s p o n d e n c e . A Collection of Letters in Portuguese and English, treating of the system of Business in the principal Cities of the World. With Introduction and Notes. i2mo, 6s. A n t i q u a r i a n M a g a z i n e a n d B i b l i o g r a p h e r (The). EDWARD WALFORD, M.A., Complete in 12 vols. £3 ne and G. W. REDWAY, Edited by F.R.H.S. tt. ARISTOTLE.—The N i c o m a c h e a n E t h i c s of A r i s t o t l e . Translated by F. H. PETERS, M.A. Third. Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s. ARMITAGE, Edward, R.A.—Lectures o n P a i n t i n g : Delivered to the Students of the Royal Academy. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. AUBERTIN, J. J.—A F l i g h t t o M e x i c o " With 7 full-page Illustrations and a Railway Map of Mexico. Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d. S i x M o n t h s i n G a p e C o l o n y a n d N a t a l . With Illustrations and Map. Crown 8vo, 6s. A F i g h t w i t h D i s t a n c e s . Illustrations and Maps. Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d. A u s t r a l i a , T h e T e a r - B o o k of, f o r 1 8 8 9 . Published under the auspices of the Governments of the Australian Colonies. With Maps. Demy 8vo, 10s. 6d. AXON, W. E. A.—The M e c h a n i c ' s F r i e n d . A Collection of Receipts and Practical Suggestions relating to Aquaria, Bronzing, Cements, Drawing, Dyes, Electricity, Gilding, Glass-working, etc. Numerous Woodcuts. Edited by W. E. A. AXON. Crown 8vo, 3J. 6d. B a c o n - S h a k e s p e a r e Q u e s t i o n A n s w e r e d ( T h e ) . ByC. STOPES. Second Edition. Demy 8vo, 6s. SAGEHOT, Waller.—The E n g l i s h C o n s t i t u t i o n . Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. L o m b a r d S t r e e t . A Description of the Money Market. Ninth Edition. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. E s s a y s o n P a r l i a m e n t a r y R e f o r m . Crown 8vo, $s. S o m e A r t i c l e s o n t h e D e p r e c i a t i o n of Silver, a n d T o p i c s c o n n e c t e d "with it. Demy 8vo, 5-r, A List of 4 BALL, K— T h e D i a m o n d s , Coal, a n d Gold of I n d i a . Their Mode of Occurrence and Distribution. Fcap. 8vo, 5^. A M a n u a l of t h e G e o l o g y of I n d i a . Part III. Economic Geology. Royal 8vo, ior. BARNES, William.—A G l o s s a r y of t h e D o r s e t D i a l e c t . With a Grammar of its Word-Shapening and Wording. Demy 8vo, sewed, 6s. BARTLETT, J. ^ . — D i c t i o n a r y of A m e r i c a n i s m s . A Glossary of Words and Phrases colloquially used in the United States. Fourth Edition. 8vo, 2is. BARTON, G. B.—The H i s t o r y of N e w S o u t h "Wales. From the Records. Vol. I. Illustrated with Maps, Portraits, and Sketches. Demy 8vo, cloth, 15J. ; half-morocco, 20s. BAUGHAN, Rasa.—The I n f l u e n c e of t h e S t a r s , A Treatise on Astrology, Chiromancy, and Physiognomy. Demy 8vo, $s. BEARD, Charles, LL.D.— M a r t i n L u t h e r a n d t h e R e f o r m a t i o n i n G e r m a n y u n t i l t h e Close of t h e D i e t of W o r m s . Demy 8vo, 16s. B e c k e t , T h o m a s , M a r t y r - P a t r i o t . By R. A. THOMPSON, M.A. Crown 8vo, 6s. BENSON, A. C— W i l l i a m L a u d , s o m e t i m e A r c h b i s h o p of C a n t e r b u r y . A Study. With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 6s. BE VAN, Theodore F.y F.R.G.S. —Toil, T r a v e l , a n d D i s c o v e r y i n B r i t i s h N e w G u i n e a . With Maps. Large crown 8vo, 7s. 6d. BLACKET, W. S.—Researches i n t o t h e L o s t H i s t o r i e s of A m e r i c a . Illustrated by numerous Engravings. 8vo, 10s. 6d. BLADES, W.—TYie B i o g r a p h y a n d T y p o g r a p h y of W i l l i a m Gaxton, E n g l a n d ' s First Printer. Demy 8vo, handmade paper, imitation old bevelled binding, £1 is. Cheap Edition. Crown 8vo, $s. BLEEK, W. H. / . — R e y n a r d t h e F o x i n S o u t h A f r i c a ; or, Hottentot'Fables and Tales. From Original Manuscripts. Post 8vo, 3s. 6d. A Brief A c c o u n t of B u s h m a n F o l k - L o r e , and Other Texts. Folio, 2s. 6d. BOTTRELL, William. —Stories a n d F o l k - L o r e of W e s t C o r n w a l l . With Illustrations by JOSEPH BLIGHT. Second and Third Series. 8vo, 6s. each. BRADLEY, F. JT.—The P r i n c i p l e s of L o g i c . BRADSJTAW.—'Dictiona.Ty H e a l t h Resorts. 2s. 6d. Demy 8vo, 16s. of B a t h i n g - P l a c e s a n d C l i m a t i c With Map. New Edition. Crown 8vo, Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & CoJs Publications. 5 BKADSHA W—continued, A B C D i c t i o n a r y of t h e U n i t e d S t a t e s , C a n a d a , a n d M e x i c o . Showing the most important Towns and Points of Interest. With Maps, Routes, etc. New Edition, Revised. Fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d. Bradshaw, H e n r y : Memoir. By G. W. PROTHERO. With Portrait and Fac-simile. Demy 8vo, 16s. BRENTANO, Lujo.—On t h e H i s t o r y a n d D e v e l o p m e n t of Gilds, a n d t h e O r i g i n of T r a d e - U n i o n s . 8vo, is. 6d. BRERETON, C. S. H.—The L a s t D a y s of O l y m p u s . A Modern Myth. Crown 8vo, is. 6d. BRIDGETT, Rev. T. £".—Blunders a n d F o r g e r i e s . Historical Essays. Crown 8vo, 6s. BROWN, Horatio F.—Life o n t h e L a g o o n s . With 2 Illustrations and Map. Crown 8vo, 6s. V e n e t i a n S t u d i e s . Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. BROWN, Marie A.— T h e I c e l a n d i c D i s c o v e r e r s of A m e r i c a , or, Honour to whom Honour is due. With 8 Plates. Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d. BROWNE, Hugh Junor.—The G r a n d R e a l i t y . Being Experiencer in Spirit-Life of a Celebrated Dramatist, received through a Trance Medium. Edited by H U G H JUNOR BROWNE. Large post 8vo, 7«f. 6d. B r o w n i n g S o c i e t y ' s Papers.—Demy 8vo, 1881-84. Part L, 10s. Part II., 10s. Part III., 10s. Part IV., 10s. Part V., lor. Part VII., IOJ. Part VIII., 10s. Part IX., 10s. Part X., iar. BROWNING. — B i b l i o g r a p h y of R o b e r t B r o w n i n g from 1833-81. 12 J. P o e m s of. I l l u s t r a t i o n s t o . Parts I. and I I . 410, icw. each. BRUGMANN, Karl.— E l e m e n t s of a C o m p a r a t i v e G r a m m a r of t h e I n d o - G e r m a n i c L a n g u a g e s . Translated by JOSEPH WRIGHT. Vol. I. Introduction and Phonetics. 8vo, 18s. ' BRYANT, Sophie, D.Sc—Celtic I r e l a n d . With 3 Maps. Crown 8vo, 5J. BURKE, The Late Very Rev. T. N—His Life. By W. J. FITZPATRICK. 2 vols. With Portrait. Demy 8vo, 30J. B u r m a . — T h e B r i t i s h B u r m a G a z e t t e e r . Compiled by Major H. R. SPEARMAN, under the direction of the Government of India. 2 vols. With 11 Photographs. 8vo, £2 10s. BURTON, Lady.—The I n n e r L i f e of S y r i a , P a l e s t i n e , a n d t h e H o l y L a n d . Post 8vo, 6s. A List of 6 BURY, Richard de.—Philobiblon. Edited by E. C. THOMAS. Crown* 8vo, i Of. 6d. CAMPBELL, Wm.—~An A c c o u n t of M i s s i o n a r y S u c c e s s i n t h e I s l a n d of F o r m o s a . Published in London in 1650, and now reprinted with copious Appendices. 2 vols. With 6 Illustrations and Map of Formosa. Crown 8vo, ior. T h e Gospel of St. M a t t h e w i n F o r m o s a n (Sinkang Dialect). With Corresponding Versions in Dutch and English. Edited from Gravius's Edition-of 1661. Fcap. 4to, 10s, 6d, CATLIN, George.—O-Kee-Pa. A Religious Ceremony; and other Customs of the Mandans. With 13 Coloured Illustrations. Small 4to, 14^. T h e L i f t e d a n d S u b s i d e d R o c k s of A m e r i c a , with their Influence on the Oceanic, Atmospheric, and Land Currents, and the Distribution of Races. With 2 Maps. Crown 8vo, 6s. 6d, S h u t y o u r M o u t h a n d S a v e y o u r L i f e . With 29 Illustrations. Eighth Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. CHAMBERS, John David.—-The T h e o l o g i c a l a n d P h i l o s o p h i c a l W o r k s of H e r m e s T r i s m e g i s t u s , C h r i s t i a n N e o p l a t o n i s t . Translated from the Greek. Demy 8vo, js. 6d. CHARNOCJC, Richard Stephen.—& G l o s s a r y of t h e E s s e x D i a l e c t . Fcap., 3J. 6d, N u c e s E t y m o l o g i c a e . Crown 8vo, 10s, P r c e n o m i n a ; or, The Etymology of the Principal Christian Names of Great Britain and Ireland. Crown 8vo, 6s, C h a u c e r Society.—Subscription, two guineas per annum. List of Publications on application. CLAPPERTOJST, Jane Hume. —Scientific Meliorism a n d the E v o l u t i o n of H a p p i n e s s . Large crown 8vo, 8s. 6d. CLARKE, Henry W.— T h e H i s t o r y of T i t h e s , f r o m A b r a h a m t o Q u e e n V i c t o r i a . Crown 8vo, 5*. CLA USE WITZ, General Carl von.—Oil ' W a r . Translated by Colonel J. J. GRAHAM. Fcap. 4to, IOJ. 6d, CLEMENT, C. E., and HUTTON, Z . — A r t i s t s of t h e N i n e t e e n t h C e n t u r y a n d t h e i r " W o r k s . Two Thousand and Fifty Biographical Sketches. Third, Revised Edition. Crown 8vo, 15^. CLODD, Edward, F.R.A.S.—The C h i l d h o o d of t h e W o r l d : a Simple Account of Man in Early Times. Eighth Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s. A Special Edition for Schools, is. T h e C h i l d h o o d of R e l i g i o n s . Including a Simple Account oi the Birth and Growth of Myths and Legends. Eighth Thousand. Crown 8vo, $s. A Special Edition for Schools, is. 6d. Kegan Paul, Trench, Triihner & Co.'s Publications. 7 CLODD, Edward, F.R.A.S.—continued, J e s u s of N a z a r e t h . With a brief sketch of Jewish History to the Time of His Birth. Second Edition. Small crown 8vo, 6s. A Special Edition for Schools. In 2 parts. Each is. 6d. COLEBROOKE, Henry Thomas.—X^ife a n d M i s c e l l a n e o u s E s s a y s of. The Biography by his Son, Sir T. E. COLEBROOKE, Bart., M.P. 3 vols. Demy 8vo, qzs. COLLETTE, Charles Hastings.—"Tine Life, T i m e s , a n d W r i t i n g s of T h o m a s C r a n m e r , L>,D., t h e F i r s t R e f o r m i n g A r c h b i s h o p of C a n t e r b u r y . Demy 8vo, js. 6d. P o p e J o a n . An Historical" Study. Translated from the Greek, with Preface. i2mo, 2s. 6d. *. . COLLINS, Mabel— T h r o u g h t h e G a t e s of G o l d . A Fragment of Thought. Small 8vo, 4s. 6d. CONWA Y, Moncure D.—Travels i n S o u t h K e n s i n g t o n . Illustrated. 8vo, 12s. COOK, Louisa . £ — G e o m e t r i c a l P s y c h o l o g y ; or, The Science of Representation. An Abstract Jof the Theories and Diagrams of B. W. Betts. 16 Plates, coloured and plain. Demy 8vo, 7s. 6d. COTTON, H. J.S.— N e w I n d i a , or I n d i a i n T r a n s i t i o n . Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 4J. 6d.; Cheap Edition, paper covers, is. COTTON, Louise.— P a l m i s t r y a n d its. P r a c t i c a l U s e s . 12 Plates. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. COX, Rev. Sir George W.\ M.A., Bart.—The M y t h o l o g y of t h e A r y a n N a t i o n s . New Edition. Demy 8vo, 16s. T a l e s of A n c i e n t Greece. New Edition. Small crown 8vo, 6s. A M a n u a l of M y t h o l o g y i n t h e f o r m of Q u e s t i o n a n d A n s w e r . New Edition. Fcap. 8vo, 3J. A n I n t r o d u c t i o n t o t h e j S c i e n c e of C o m p a r a t i v e M y t h o l o g y a n d F o l k - L o r e , " Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d. COX, Rev. Sir G. W„ M.A., Bart., and JONES, Eustace Hinton.— P o p u l a r R o m a n c e s of t h e M i d d l e A g e s . Third Edition, in I vol. Crown 8vo, 6s. CURR, Edward M.— T h e A u s t r a l i a n R a c e : I t s O r i g i n , L a n g u a g e s , C u s t o m s , P l a c e of L a n d i n g i n A u s t r a l i a , a n d t h e R o u t e s b y w h i c h i t s p r e a d itself o v e r t h a t C o n t i n e n t . In 4 vols. With Map and Illustrations. £2 2s. CUST, R. iV.—The S h r i n e s of L o u r d e s , Z a r a g o s s a , t h e H o l y S t a i r s a t R o m e , t h e H o l y H o u s e of L o r e t t o a n d N a z a r e t h , a n d St. A n n a t J e r u s a l e m . With 4 Autotypes, Fcap. 8vo, 2s. A List of 8 D a v i s , T h o m a s : T h e M e m o i r s of a n Irish Patriot, 1 8 4 0 - 4 6 . By Sir CHARLES GAVAN DUFFY, K.C.M.G. Demy 8vo, I2j. DAVITTy Michael.—Speech b e f o r e t h e S p e c i a l C o m m i s s i o n . Crown 8vo, $s. DAWSON', Geo.— B i o g r a p h i c a l L e c t u r e s . Edited by GEORGF, ST. CLAIR, F.G.S. Third Edition. Large crown 8vo, 7s. 6d. S h a k e s p e a r e , a n d o t h e r L e c t u r e s . Edited by GEORGE ST, CLAIR, F.G.S. Large crown 8vo, *]s. 6d. DEAN, Teresa H.—How t o b e B e a u t i f u l . Nature Unmasked. A Book for Every Woman. Fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d. DEATH, / . — T h e B e e r of t h e B i b l e : o n e of t h e h i t h e r t o U n k n o w n L e a v e n s of E x o d u s . With a Visit to an Arab Brewery, and Map of the Routes of the Exodus, etc. Crown 8vo, 6s. VE JONCOURT, Madame Marie.— W h o l e s o m e C o o k e r y . Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, is. 6d,; paper covers, is. Fifth DENMAN+ Hon. G.—T h e S t o r y of t h e K i n g s of R o m e . In Verse. i6mo, parchment, is. 6d. DONOVAN, J.— M u s i c a n d A c t i o n ; or, The Elective Affinity between Rhythm and Pitch. Crown 8vo, 3.?. 6d. DOWDEN, Edward, LL.D.— S h a k s p e r e : a Critical Study of his Mind and Art. Ninth Edition. Post 8vo, 12s. Shakspere's Sonnets. post 8vo, p. 6d. With Introduction and Notes. Large S t u d i e s i n L i t e r a t u r e , 1789-1877. Fourth Edition. Large post 8vo, 6s. T r a n s c r i p t s a n d S t u d i e s . Large post 8vo, 12s. DOWSETT, F. C.—S t r i k i n g K v e n t s i n I r i s h H i s t o r y . Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. D r e a m l a n d a n d G h o s t l a n d . An Original Collection of Tales and Warnings from the Borderland of Substance and Shadow. 3 vols. 6s. per vol., sold separately. D r u m m o n d , Thomas, Under Secretary in Ireland, 1835-40. Life and Letters. By R. BARRY O'BRIEN. Demy 8vo, 14*. DU PREL, Carl.—The P h i l o s o p h y of M y s t i c i s m . Translated from the German by C. C. MASSEY. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, cloth, 2$s. E a r l y E n g l i s h T e x t Society.—Subscription, one guinea per annum. Extra Series. Subscriptions—Small paper, one guinea per annum. List of Publications on application. EDMUNDSON, George.— M i l t o n a n d V o n d e l . A Curiosity of Literature. Crown 8vo, 6s. Kegan Paid, Trench, Trubner & Cols Publications. 9. EDWARDS, Edivard.— M e m o i r s of L i b r a r i e s , together with a Practical Handbook of Library Economy. Numerous Illustrations. 2 vols. Royal 8vo, £2 Ss. Large paper Edition. Imperial 8vo, £4 4s. L i b r a r i e s a n d F o u n d e r s of L i b r a r i e s . 8vo, iSs. Large paper Edition. Imperial 8vo, £1 10s. F r e e T o w n L i b r a r i e s , their Formation, Management, and History in Britain, France, Germany, and America. Together with Brief Notices of Book Collectors, and of the respective Places of Deposit of their Surviving Collections. 8vo, 21s. K i g h t e e n t h C e n t u r y E s s a y s . Selected and Edited by AUSTIN DOBSON. Cheap Edition. Cloth, is. 6d. E l l i s , W i l l i a m (Founder of the Birkbeck Schools). Life, with Account of his Writings. By E. KELL BLYTH. Demy 8vo, 14*. E m e r s o n ' s ( R a l p h W a l d o ) L i f e . By OLIVER WENDELL HOLMES. English Copyright Edition, With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 6s. E m e r s o n ( R a l p h W a l d o ) , T a l k s w i t h . By CHARLES J. WOODBURY. Crown 8vo, $s. E n g l i s h D i a l e c t Society.—Subscription, 10s. 6d. per annum. List of Publications on application. FIELD, David Dudley.—Outlines of a n I n t e r n a t i o n a l C o d e . Second Edition. Royal 8vo, £2 2s. F i v e o'clock T e a . Containing Receipts for Cakes, Savoury Sandwiches, etc. Eighth Thousand. Fcap. 8vo, cloth, IJ-. 6d.; paper covers, u . F o r b e s , B i s h o p . A Memoir. By the Rev. DONALD J. MACKAY. With Portrait and Map. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. FOTHERINGHAM, James.— S t u d i e s i n t h e P o e t r y of R o b e r t B r o w n i n g . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s. FOX, Charles.—The P i l g r i m s . An Allegory of the Soul's Progress from the Earthly to the Heavenly State. Crown Svo, $s. FOX, J. A.—A K e y t o t h e I r i s h Q u e s t i o n . Crown 8vo, js. 6d. FRANKLYN, Henry Bowles.—-The G r e a t B a t t l e s of 1 8 7 0 , a n d B l o c k a d e of M e t z . With Large Map, Sketch Map, and Frontispiece. 8vo, \$s. FREEBOROUGH, E., and RANKEN, C. E.—Chess Openings, Ancient and Modern. Revised and Corrected up to the Present Time from the best Authorities. Large post Svo, Js. 6d. ; interleaved, gs. FREEMAN, E. A.—Lectures t o A m e r i c a n A u d i e n c e s . I. The English People in its Three Homes. II. Practical Bearings of General European History. Post 8vo, Ss. 6d 10 A List of FRITH, /.—Life of G i o r d a n o B r u n o , t h e N o l a n . Revised by Prof. MORIZ CARRIERE. With Portrait. Post 8vo, 14?. Froebel's Ethical Teaching. Two Essays by M. J. LYSCHINSKA and THERESE G. MONTEFIORE. Fcap., 2s. 6d. F r o m W o r l d t o C l o i s t e r ; or, My Novitiate. By BERNARD. Crown 8vo, 5^. G a r f i e l d , T h e L i f e a n d PuhJUc S e r v i c e of J a m e s A . , Twentieth President of the United States. A Biographical Sketch. By Captain F . H . MASON. With a Preface by BRET HARTE. With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. GASTER, M.—~Greeko~Slavonic Literature a n d its Relation t o t h e F o l k - L o r e of E u r o p e d u r i n g t h e M i d d l e A g e s . Large post 8vo, *]s. 6d. GEORGE, Henry.—TProgvess a n d P o v e r t y . An Inquiry into the Causes of Industrial Depressions, and of Increase of Want with Increase of Wealth. The Remedy. Fifth Library Edition. Post 8vo, *js. 6d. Cabinet Edition. Crown 8v09 2s. 6d. Also a Cheap Edition. Limp cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, is. P r o t e c t i o n , o r F r e e T r a d e . An Examination of the Tariff Question, with especial regard to the Interests of Labour. SecondEdition. Crown 8vo, $s. Cheap Edition. Limp cloth, is. 6d. * paper covers, is. Social P r o b l e m s . Fourth Thousand. Crown 8vo, $s. Cheap Edition. Limp cloth, is. 6d. ; paper covers, is. GIBB, E. y. JF.—The H i s t o r y of t h e F o r t y V e z i r s ; or, The Story of the Forty Morns and Eves. Translated from the Turkish. Crown 8vo, 10s. 6d. GILBERT, Mrs.—Autobiography, a n d other Memorials. Edited by JOSIAH GILBERT. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo,. *]s. 6d. G l o s s a r y of T e r m s a n d P h r a s e s . Edited by the Rev. H. PERCY SMITH and others. Second and Cheaper Edition. Medium 8vo, 3J. 6d. G o e t h e ' s F a u s t . Translated from the German by JOHN ANSTER, LL.D. With an Introduction by BURDETT MASON. Illustrated by FRANK M. GREGORY. Folio, £$ 3^. GORDON, Major-General C. G.—His J o u r n a l s a t K a r t o u m . Printed from the original MS. With Introduction and Notes by A. EGMONT H A K E . Portrait, 2 Maps, and 30 Illustrations. Two vols., demy 8vo, 21s. Also a Cheap Edition in 1 vol., 6s. G o r d o n ' s ( G e n e r a l ) L a s t J o u r n a l . A Facsimile of the lasfc Journal received in England from GENERAL GORDON. Reproduced by Photo-lithography. Imperial 4to, £3 3. D . H o m e : H i s L i f e a n d Mission^ With Portrait. Demy 8vo, 12s. 6d. Gift of D . D . H o m e . Demy 8vo, IOJ-. H o m e r ' s I l i a d . Greek Text with Translation. By J. G. CORDERY, C.S.I. Two vols. Demy 8vo, 14s. Cheap Edition,translation only. One vol. Crown 8vo, 5^. HO OLE, Henry.-—The S c i e n c e a n d A r t of T r a i n i n g . A Han& book for Athletes. Demy 8vo, 3«r. 6d. HOOPER, Mary.—Little D i n n e r s : H o w to Serve t h e m w i t h Elegance and Economy. Twenty-first Edition. Crown 8vo, 2J. 6d. C o o k e r y for I n v a l i d s , P e r s o n s of D e l i c a t e D i g e s t i o n , a n d C h i l d r e n . Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. E v e r y - d a y M e a l s . Being Economical and Wholesome Recipes for Breakfast, Luncheon, and Supper. Seventh Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. HOPKINS, Ellice.—'WoT^L a m o n g s t W o r k i n g M e n . Sixth Edition. Crown 8vo, 3J. 6d. HORNADA Y, W. T.—Two Y e a r s i n a J u n g l e . With Illustrations, Demy 8vo, 21s. HO WELLS, W. D.—A L i t t l e Girl a m o n g t h e Old M a s t e r s . With Introduction and Comment. 54 Plates. Oblong crown8vo, 10s. HUMBOLDT, Baron Wilhelm J^w.—The S p h e r e a n d D u t i e s of Government. Translated from the German by JOSEPH* COULTHARD, J u n . Post 8vO, $S. HYNDMAN, H. M.— T h e H i s t o r i c a l B a s i s of S o c i a l i s m i n E n g l a n d . Large crown 8vo, Ss. 6d. IM THUR.N, Everard F.—Among t h e I n d i a n s of G u i a n a . Being Sketches, chiefly anthropologic, from the Interior of British Guiana.- With 53 Illustrations and a Map. Demy 8vo, iSs. 1NGLEBY, the late Clement ^ " . — E s s a y s , Edited by his Son. Crowifc 8vo, 7J. 6d. A List of €4 I r r e s p o n s i b i l i t y a n d i t s R e c o g n i t i o n . By a Graduate of Oxford. Crown 8vo, 3>r. 6d. JAGIELSKI, V.—Modern M a s s a g e T r e a t m e n t i n C o m b i n a t i o n w i t h t h e E l e c t r i c B a t h . 8vo, is. 6d. JAPP, Alexander H.—Days w i t h I n d u s t r i a l s . Adventures and Experiences among Curious Industries. With Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 6s. JENKINS, E., and RAYMOND, J.— T h e Architect's L e g a l H a n d b o o k . Fourth Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, 6s. JENKINS, E.—A M o d e r n Crown 8vo, $s. JENKINS, Paladin. Contemporary Manners. Jabez.—Yest-Pocket L e x i c o n . An English Dictionary of all except familiar Words, including the principal Scientific and Technical Terms, and Foreign Moneys, Weights, and Measures. 64mo, is, JENKINS, Rev. Canon R. C—Heraldry : English and Foreign. With a Dictionary of Heraldic Terms and 156 Illustrations. Small crown 8vo, 3^. 6d. J e s u s t h e C a r p e n t e r of N a z a r e t h . *js. 6d. By a Layman. Crown 8vo, JOHNSON, C. P.—Hints t o C o l l e c t o r s of O r i g i n a l E d i t i o n s of t h e W o r k s of C h a r l e s D i c k e n s . Crown 8vo, vellum, 6s. H i n t s t o C o l l e c t o r s of O r i g i n a l E d i t i o n s of t h e W o r k s of W i l l i a m M a k e p e a c e T h a c k e r a y . Crown 8vo, vellum, 6s. JOHNSTON, H. H., F.Z.S.—The K i l i m a - n j a r o E x p e d i t i o n . A Record of Scientific Exploration in Eastern Equatorial Africa, and a General Description of the Natural History, Languages, and Commerce of the Kilima-njaro District. With 6 Maps, and over 80 Illustrations by the Author. Demy 8vo, 21s. T h e H i s t o r y of a S l a v e . With 47 Illustrations. Square 8vo, 6s. J u v e n a l i s S a t i r s e . With a Literal English Prose Translation and Notes. By J. D. LEWIS. Second Edition. 2 vols. 8vo, 12s. -KARDEC, Allen—-The S p i r i t ' s B o o k . The Principles of Spiritist Doctrine on the Immortality of the Soul, etc. Transmitted through various mediums. Translated by ANNA BLACKWELL. Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d. T h e M e d i u m ' s B o o k ; or, Guide for Mediums and for Evocations. Translated by ANNA BLACKWELL. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. H e a v e n a n d H e l l ; or, The Divine Justice Vindicated in the Plurality of Existences. Translated by ANNA BLACKWELL. , Crown 8vo, *js. 6d. Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Cols' Publications. 15 KAUFMANN, Rev. M, M.A.— S o c i a l i s m : its Nature, its Dangers, and its Remedies considered. Crown 8vo, 7*. 6d. U t o p i a s ; or, Schemes of Social Improvement, from Sir Thomas More to Karl Marx. Crown 8vo, $s. C h r i s t i a n S o c i a l i s m . Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. KERRISON, Lady Caroline.—A C o m m o n p l a c e B o o k of t h e Fifteenth Century. Containing a Religious Play and Poetry, ""Legal Forms, and Local Accounts. From the Original MS. at Brome Hall, Suffolk. Edited by LUCY TOULMIN SMITH. With 2 Facsimiles. Demy 8vo, *js. 6d. KINGSFORD, Anna, M.D.—Tlie Perfect W a y in Diet, A Treatise advocating a Return to the Natural and Ancient Food of our Race. Third Edition. Small crown 8vo, 2s. T h e S p i r i t u a l H e r m e n e u t i c s of A s t r o l o g y a n d H o l y W r i t . Illustrated. 4to, parchment, ios. 6d. KINGSFORD, Anna, and MAITLAND, Edward.—The Virgin of t h e "World of H e r m e s M e r c u r i u s T r i s m e g i s t u s . Rendered into English. 4to, parchment, IOS. 6d. T h e P e r f e c t W a y ; or, The Finding of Christ. Thfrd Edition, Revised. Square i6mo, 'js. 6d. KINGSFORD, William.—History of C a n a d a . 3 vols. 8vo, £2 $s. KITTON, Fred. G.—John L e e c h , A r t i s t a n d H u m o u r i s t . A Biographical Sketch. Demy i8mo, is. KRAUS, J.—-Carlsbad a n d its N a t u r a l H e a l i n g Agents. With Notes, Introductory, by the Rev. JOHN T. WALLERS. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s. 6d. LAMB, Charles.—-Beauty a n d t h e B e a s t ; or, A Rough Outside with a Gentle Heart. A Poem. Fcap. 8vo, vellum, iar. 6d. LANG, Andrew.—Lost Leaders. Crown 8vo, $s. L a t h e (The) a n d i t s U s e s ; or, Instruction in the Art of Turning Wood and Metal. Sixth Edition. Illustrated. 8vo, IOJ. 6d. LEE, Frederick Geo.—A M a n u a l of P o l i t i c s . In three Chapters. With Footnotes and Appendices. Small crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. LEFEVRE, Right Hon. G. Shaw.—Veel a n d O ' C o n n e l l . Demy 8vo, ios. 6d. I n c i d e n t s of Coercion. A Journal of Visits to Ireland. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, limp cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, u . I r i s h M e m b e r s a n d E n g l i s h Gaolers. Crown 8vo, limp cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, is. C o m b i n a t i o n a n d C o e r c i o n i n I r e l a n d . A Sequel to "Incidents of Coercion." Crown 8vo, cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, is. A List of i6 LELAND, Charles G.—The B r e i t m a n n B a l l a d s . The only authorized Edition. Complete in I vol., including Nineteen Ballads, illustrating his Travels in Europe (never before printed). Crown 8vo, 6s. G a u d e a m u s , Humorous Poems translated from the German of JOSEPH VICTOR SCHEFFEL and others. i6mo, $s. 6d. T h e E n g l i s h Gipsies a n d t h e i r L a n g u a g e . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. F u - S a n g ; or, The Discovery of America by Chinese Buddhist Priests in the Fifth Century. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. P i d g i n - E n g l i s h S i n g - S o n g ; or, Songs and Stories in the China-English Dialect. With a Vocabulary. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, $s. T h e G y p s i e s . Crown 8vo, ior. 6d. L i g h t o n t h e P a t h . For the Personal Use of those who are Ignorant of the Eastern Wisdom. Written down by M. C. Fcap. 8vo, is. 6d. LOCHER* Carl.—An E x p l a n a t i o n of O r g a n S t o p s , with Hints for Effective Combinations. Demy 8vo, 5^. LONGFELLOW, H. Wadsworth.-lA.te. By his Brother, SAMUEL LONGFELLOW. With Portraits and Illustrations. 3 vols. Demy 8vo, 42J. LONSDALE, Margaret.—Sister D o r a : a Biography. With Portrait. Thirtieth Edition. Small crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. G e o r g e E l i o t : T h o u g h t s u p o n h e r Life, h e r B o o k s , a n d H e r s e l f . Second Edition. Small crown 8vo, is. 6d. L o t o s S e r i e s (The). Pot 8vo, bound in two styles: (1) cloth, gilt back and edges; (2) half-parchment, cloth sides, gilt top, uncut, 3^. 6d. each. T h e O r i g i n a l T r a v e l s a n d S u r p r i s i n g A d v e n t u r e s of B a r o n M u n c h a u s e n . Illustrated by ALFRED CROWQUILL. T h e B r e i t m a n n B a l l a d s . By CHARLES G. LELAND. Author's Copyright Edition, with a New Preface and Additional Poems. E s s a y s o n M e n a n d B o o k s Selected from t h e E a r l i e r W r i t i n g s of L o r d M a c a u l a y . Vol. I. Introductory— Lord Clive—Milton—Earl Chatham—Lord Byron. With Critical Introduction and Notes by ALEXANDER H . JAPP, L L . D . With Portraits. T h e L i g h t of A s i a ; or, The Great Renunciation. Being the Life and Teaching of Gautama, Prince of India and Founder of Buddhism. Told in Verse by an Indian Buddhist. By Sir EDWIN ARNOLD, K.C.I.E., C.S.I. With Illustrations and a Portrait of the Author. Kegan Paul, Trench^ Triibner & Cols Publications. 17 L o t o s Series (The)—continued. T h e M a r v e l l o u s a n d R a r e C o n c e i t s of M a s t e r T y l l O w l g l a s s . Newly Collected, Chronicled, and set forth in an English Tongue. By KENNETH H. R. MACKENZIE. Adorned with many most Diverting and Cunning Devices by ALFRED CROWQ/JILL. A L o v e r ' s L i t a n i e s , and other Poems. With Portrait of the Author. By ERIC MACKAY. The Large Paper Edition of,these Volumes will be limited to 101 numbered copies for sale in England, price \2s. 6d. each, net. L o w d e r , C h a r l e s i A B i o g r a p h y . By the Author of " St. Teresa." Twelfth Edition. With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 3*. 6d. LO WELL, James Russell—The B i g l o w P a p e r s . Edited by THOMAS HUGHES, Q.C. First and Second Series in 1 vol. Fcap., 2s.6d. LOWSLEY, Major B.—A G l o s s a r y of B e r k s h i r e W o r d s a n d P h r a s e s . Crown 8vo, half-calf, gilt edges, interleaved, 12s. 6d. LUCKES, Eva C. ^ . — L e c t u r e s o n G e n e r a l N u r s i n g , delivered to the Probationers of the London Hospital Training School for Nurses. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, is. 6d. LUDEWLG, Hermann E.—The L i t e r a t u r e of A m e r i c a n A b o r i g i n a l L a n g u a g e s . Edited by NICOLAS TRUBNER. 8vo, 1 or. 6d. LUKLN, J.—Amongst M a c h i n e s . A Description of Various Mechanical Appliances used in the Manufacture of Wood, Metal, etc. A Book for Boys. Second Edition. 64 Engravings. Crown 8vo, y. 6d. T h e Y o u n g M e c h a n i c . Containing Directions for the Use of all Kinds of Tools, and for the Construction of Steam-Engines, etc. A Book for Boys. Second Edition. With 70 Engravings. Crown 8vo, $s. 6d. T h e B o y E n g i n e e r s : What they Did, and How they Did it. A Book for Boys. 30 Engravings. Imperial i6mo, 3^. 6d. LUMLEY, E.—The A r t of J u d g i n g t h e C h a r a c t e r of I n d i v i d u a l s f r o m t h e i r H a n d w r i t i n g a n d S t y l e . With 35 Plates. Square i6mo, $s. LYTTON, Edward Bulwer, Lord.—Life, L e t t e r s a n d L i t e r a r y R e m a i n s . By his Son, the EARL OF LYTTON. With Portraits, Illustrations and Facsimiles. Demy 8vo. Vols. I. and II., 32^. MACDONALD, W. A.— H u m a n i t i s m : The Scientific Solution of the Social Problem. Large post 8vo, p. 6d. C 18 A List of MACHIAVELLI, NiccoVo. D i s c o u r s e s o n t h e F i r s t D e c a d e of T i t u s L i v i u s , Translated from the Italian by NINIAN H I L L THOMSON, M.A. Large crown 8vo, 12s. T h e P r i n c e . Translated from the Italian by N. H. T. Small crown 8vo, printed on hand-made paper, bevelled boards, 6s. MAIDEN, J. H.—The U s e f u l N a t i v e P l a n t s of A u s t r a l i a (ineluding Tasmania). Demy 8vo, 12s. 6d. M a i n t e n o n , M a d a m e d e . By EMILY BOWLES. With Portrait. Large crown 8vo, Js. 6d. MARCHANT, W. T.—lu P r a i s e of A l e . Songs, Ballads, Epigrams, and Anecdotes. Crown 8vo, IOJ. 6d. MARKHAM, Capt. Albert Hastings, R.N.— T h e G r e a t F r o z e n S e a : A Personal Narrative of the Voyage of the Alert during the Arctic Expedition of 1875-6. With 6 full-page Illustrations, 2 Maps, and 27 Woodcuts. Sixth and Cheaper Edition. Crown 8vo, or. M a r r i a g e a n d D i v o r c e . Including Religious, Practical, and Political Aspects of the Question. By A P RICHARD. Crown 8vo, 5^. MARTIN, G. A.— T h e F a m i l y H o r s e : Its Stabling, Care, and Feeding. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. MA THERS, S. L. M.—Tlcie K e y of S o l o m o n t h e K i n g . Translated from Ancient MSS. in the British Museum. With Plates. Crown 4to, 2$s. T h e K a b b a l a h U n v e i l e d . Containing the Three Books of the Zohar. Translated into English. With Plates. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d. T h e T a r o t : its Occult Signification, Use in F o r t u n e T e l l i n g , a n d M e t h o d of P l a y . 321110, is. 6d.; with pack of yS Tarot Cards, $s. MAUDS LEY, H., M.D.—Body a n d W i l l . Being an Essay concerning Will, in its Metaphysical, Physiological, and Pathological Aspects. 8vo, 12s. N a t u r a l C a u s e s a n d S u p e r n a t u r a l S e e m i n g s . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s. M e c h a n i c , T h e Y o u n g . A Book for Boys. Containing Directions for the Use of all Kinds of Tools, and for the Construction of Steam-Engines and Mechanical Models. By the Rev. J. LUKIN. Sixth Edition. With 70 Engravings. Crown 8vo, 3«r. 6d. M e c h a n i c ' s W o r k s h o p , A m a t e u r . Plain and Concise Directions for the Manipulation of Wood and Metals, By the Author of " The Lathe and its Uses." Sixth Edition. Illustrated. Demy 8vo, 6s. Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications. 19 Mendelssohn's Letters to I g n a z a n d Charlotte Moscheles. Translated by FELIX MOSCHELLES. Numerous Illustrations and Facsimiles. 8vo, 12s. METCALFE, Frederick.—-The E n g l i s h m a n a n d t h e S c a n d i n a v i a n . Post 8vo, I8J. MINTON, Rev, Francis.—Capital a n d W a g e s . 8vo, 15*. T h e W e l f a r e of t h e M i l l i o n s . Crown 8vo, limp cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, is. M i t c h e l , J o h n , L i f e . By WILLIAM DILLON. 2 vols. With Portrait. 8vo, 21 J. MITCHELL, Lucy M.—A H i s t o r y of A n c i e n t S c u l p t u r e . With numerous Illustrations, including 6 Plates in Phototype. Superroyal 8vo, 42s. M o h l , J u l i u s a n d M a r y , L e t t e r s a n d R e c o l l e c t i o n s of. By M. C. M. SIMPSON. With Portraits and 2 Illustrations. Demy 8vo, 15 s. MOODIE, D. C. i?.—The H i s t o r y of t h e B a t t l e s a n d A d v e n t u r e s of t h e B r i t i s h , t h e B o e r s , t h e Z u l u s , e t c . , i n S o u t h e r n A f r i c a , from the Time of Pharaoh Necho to 1880. With Illustrations and Coloured Maps. 2 vols. Crown 8vo, 36$. MORFIT, Campbell.—A P r a c t i c a l T r e a t i s e o n t h e M a n u f a c t u r e of S o a p s . With Illustrations. Demy 8vo, £2 12s. 6d. A P r a c t i c a l T r e a t i s e o n P u r e F e r t i l i z e r s , and the Chemical Conversion of Rock Guanos, etc., into various valuable Products, With 28 Plates. 8vo, £4 4s. MOORE, Aubrey L.—Science a t i d t h e F a i t h : Essays on Apologetic Subjects. Crown 8vo, 6s. MORIS ON, J. Cotter.—The S e r v i c e of M a n : an Essay towards the Religion of the Future. Crown 8vo, $s. MORRIS, Charles.—Aryan S u n - M y t h s t h e O r i g i n of R e l i g i o n s . With an Introduction by CHARLES MORRIS. Crown 8vo, 6s. MORRIS, Gouverneur, U.S. Minister to France.—Diary a n d L e t t e r s . 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 30^. MOSENTHAL, J. de, and HAR TING, James £ . — O s t r i c h e s a n d O s t r i c h F a r m i n g . Second Edition. With 8 full-page Illustrations and 20 Woodcuts. Royal 8vo, 10s. 6d. M o t l e y , J o h n L o t h r o p . A Memoir. By OLIVER WENDELL HOLMES. Crown 8vo, 6s. MULHALL, M. G. and E. T.— H a n d b o o k of t h e R i v e r P l a t e , comprising the Argentine Republic, Uruguay, and Paraguay. With Six Maps. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, »js. 6d. M u n r o , M a j o r - G e n . S i r T h o m a s , A Memoir. By Sir A. J. ARBUTHNOT. Crown 8vo, 3^. 6d. 20 A List of N a t u r a l H i s t o r y . " Riverside " Edition. Edited by J. S. KINGSLEY. 6 vols. 2200 Illustrations. 4to, £6 6s. NEVILL, J. H. N.—The B i o l o g y of D a i l y L i f e . Post 8vo, y.6d. NEWMAN, Cardinal,—Characteristics f r o m t h e W r i t i n g s of. Being Selections from his various Works. Arranged with the Author's personal Approval. Eighth Edition. With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 6s. %* A Portrait of Cardinal Newman, mounted for framing, can be had, 2s. 6d. NEWMAN, Francis William.—Essays o n D i e t . Small crown 8vo, cloth limp, is. M i s c e l l a n i e s . Vol. I I . , III., and IV. Essays, Tracts, and Addresses, Moral and Religious. Demy 8vo. Vols. II. and III., 12s. Vol. IV., IOS. 6d. R e m i n i s c e n c e s of T w o E x i l e s a n d T w o W a r s . Crown 8vo, y. 6d. P h a s e s of F a i t h ; or, Passages from the History of my Creed. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. T h e S o u l : Her Sorrows and her Aspirations. Tenth Edition. Post 8vo, 3«r. 6d. H e b r e w T h e i s m . Royal 8vo, 4s. 6d. A n g l o - S a x o n A b o l i t i o n of N e g r o S l a v e r y . Demy 8vo, 5*. N e w S o u t h W a l e s , J o u r n a l a n d P r o c e e d i n g s of t h e R o y a l S o c i e t y of. Published annually. Price 10s. 6d. N e w S o u t h W a l e s , P u b l i c a t i o n s of t h e G o v e r n m e n t of. List on application. N e w Zealand Institute Publications:— I. T r a n s a c t i o n s a n d P r o c e e d i n g s of the New Zealand Institute. Vols. I. to XX., 1868 to 1887. Demy 8vo, stitched, £1 is. each. II. A n I n d e x t o t h e T r a n s a c t i o n s a n d P r o c e e d i n g s of the New Zealand Institute. Edited by JAMES HECTOR, M.D., F.R.S. Vols. I. to VIII. Demy 8vo, 2s. 6d. N e w Z e a l a n d : Geological S u r v e y . List of Publications on application. OATES, Frank, F.R.G.S.—Matabele L a n d a n d the Victoria F a l l s . A Naturalist's Wanderings in the Interior of South Africa. Edited by C. G. OATES, B.A. With numerous Illustrations and 4 Maps. Demy 8vo, 21s. O'BRIEN^ R. Barry. —Irish W r o n g s a n d E n g l i s h R e m e d i e s , with other Essays. Crown 8vo, 5s. Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 21 O'BRIEN, R. Barry.—continued. T h e H o m e R u l e r ' s M a n u a l . Crown 8vo, cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, is. OLCOTT, Henry S.—Theosophy, Religion, a n d Occult Science. With Glossary of Eastern Words. Crown 8vo, *js. 6d. P o s t h u m o u s H u m a n i t y . A Study of Phantoms. By ADOLPHE DASSIER. Translated and Annotated by H E N R Y S. OLCOTT. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. Our P u b l i c Schools—Eton, H a r r o w , 'Winchester, R u g b y , 'Westminster, Marlborough, T h e Charterhouse, Crown 8vo3 6s. OWEN, Robert Dale.—Footfalls o n t h e B o u n d a r y of A n o t h e r "World. With Narrative Illustrations. Post 8vo, 7*. 6d. The Debatable Land between this World and the Next. With Illustrative Narrations. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, js. 6d. T h r e a d i n g m y W a y . Twenty-Seven Years; of Autobiography. Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d. OXLEY, William.—Modern Messiahs a n d W o n d e r - W o r k e r s . A History of the Various Messianic Claimants to Special Divine Prerogatives. Post 8vo, $s. P a r c h m e n t L i b r a r y . Choicely Printed on hand-made paper, limp parchment antique or cloth, 6s. ; vellum, *]s. 6d. each volume. S e l e c t e d P o e m s of M a t t h e w P r i o r . With an Introduction and Notes by AUSTIN DOBSON. Sartor Resartus. By THOMAS CARLYLE. T h e P o e t i c a l W o r k s of J o h n M i l t o n . 2 vols. C h a u c e r ' s C a n t e r b u r y T a l e s . Edited by A. W. POLLARD, 2 vols. L e t t e r s a n d J o u r n a l s of J o n a t h a n S w i f t . Selected and edited, with a Commentary and Notes, by STANLEY LANE-POOLE. D e Q u i n c e y ' s C o n f e s s i o n s of a n E n g l i s h O p i u m E a t e r . Reprinted from the First Edition. Edited by RICHARD GARNETT. T h e Gospel according to M a t t h e w , M a r k , and L u k e . S e l e c t i o n s f r o m t h e P r o s e W r i t i n g s of J o n a t h a n S w i f t . With a Preface and Notes by STANLEY LANE-POOLE, and Portrait. English Sacred Lyrics. S i r J o s h u a R e y n o l d s ' s D i s c o u r s e s . Edited by EDMUND GOSSE. A List of 22 P a r c h m e n t Library—continued. Selections from Milton's Prose W r i t i n g s . Edited by ERNEST MYERS. T h e B o o k of P s a l m s . Translated by the Rev. Canon T. K. CHEYNE, M.A., D.D. T h e V i c a r of W a k e f i e l d . With Preface and Notes by AUSTIN DOBSON. E n g l i s h C o m i c D r a m a t i s t s . Edited by OSWALD CRAWFURD. English Lyrics. T h e S o n n e t s of J o h n M i l t o n . Edited by MARK PATTISON, With Portrait after Vertue. F r e n c h L y r i c s . Selected and Annotated by GEORGE SAINTSBURY. With a Miniature Frontispiece designed and etched by H. G. Glindoni. F a b l e s b y M r . J o h n G a y . With Memoir by AUSTIN DOBSON, and an Etched Portrait from an unfinished Oil Sketch by Sir Godfrey Kneller. Select L e t t e r s of P e r c y B y s s h e S h e l l e y . Edited, with an Introduction, by RICHARD GARNETT. T h e C h r i s t i a n Y e a r . Thoughts in Verse for the Sundays and Holy Days throughout the Year. With Miniature Portrait of the Rev. J. Keble, after a Drawing by G. Richmond, R.A. S h a k s p e r e ' s W o r k s . Complete in Twelve Volumes. E i g h t e e n t h C e n t u r y E s s a y s . Selected and Edited by AUSTIN DOBSON. With a Miniature Frontispiece by R. Caldecott. Q. H o r a t i F l a c c i O p e r a . Edited by F . A. CORNISH, Assistant Master at Eton. With a Frontispiece after a design by L. Alma Tadema, etched by Leopold Lowenstam. E d g a r A l l a n P o e ' s P o e m s . With an Essay on his Poetry by ANDREW LANG, and a Frontispiece by Linley Sambourne, S h a k s p e r e ' s S o n n e t s . Edited by EDWARD DOWDEN. With a Frontispiece etched by Leopold Lowenstam, after the Death Mask. E n g l i s h O d e s . Selected by EDMUND GOSSE. With Frontispiece on India paper by Hamo Thornycroft, A.R.A. Of t h e I m i t a t i o n of C h r i s t . By THOMAS A KEMPIS. A revised Translation. With Frontispiece on India paper, from a Design by W. B. Richmond. P o e m s : Selected from PERCY BYSSHE SHELLEY. Dedicated to Lady Shelley. With a Preface by RICHARD GARNETT and a Miniature Frontispiece. Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 23 PARSLOE, Joseph.—OMT R a i l w a y s . Sketches, Historical and Descriptive. With Practical Information as to Fares and Rates, etc., and a Chapter on Railway Reform. Crown 8vo, 6s. PATOAT, A. A.—A H i s t o r y of t h e E g y p t i a n R e v o l u t i o n , from the Period of the Mamelukes to the Death of Mohammed Ali. Second Edition. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, *js. 6d. PAUL/, Reinhold.—S i m o n d e M o n t f o r t , E a r l of L e i c e s t e r , the Creator of the House of Commons. Crown 8vo, 6s. P a u l of T a r s u s . By the Author of "Rabbi Jeshua." Crown 8vo, 4f. 6d. PEMBERTON, T. Edgar.—Charles Dickens a n d t h e Stage. A Record of his Connection with the Drama. Crown 8vo, 6s. PEZZI, Domenico.—Aryan P h i l o l o g y , according to the most recent researches (Glottologia Aria Recentissima). Translated by E. S. ROBERTS. Crown 8vo, 6s. PFEIFFER, Emily.—Women a n d "Work. An Essay on the Relation to Health and Physical Development of the Higher Education of Girls. Crown 8vo, 6s. P h a n t a s m s of t h e L i v i n g . By EDMUND GURNEY, FREDERIC W. H . MYERS, M.A., and FRANK PODMORE, M.A. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 21 s. P h i l o l o g i c a l S o c i e t y , T r a n s a c t i o n s of. Published irregularly. List of Publications on application. PICCIOTTO, James.— S k e t c h e s of A n g l o - J e w i s h H i s t o r y . Demy 8VO, 12S. Pierce G a m b i t : Chess P a p e r s a n d Problems. PIERCE, M.A., and W, TIMBRELL PIERCE. By JAMES Crown 8vo, 6s. 6d. PIESSE, Charles H.—Chemistry i n t h e B r e w i n g - R o o m . Being the substance of a Course of Lessons to Practical Brewers. Fcap., 5*. PLINY.—-The L e t t e r s of P l i n y t h e Y o u n g e r . Translated by J. D. LEWIS. Post 8vo, $s. PLUMPTRE, Charles John.—King's College L e c t u r e s o n E l o c u t i o n . Fourth Edition. Post 8vo, 15^. POOLE, W. F.—An I n d e x t o P e r i o d i c a l L i t e r a t u r e . Third Edition. Royal 8vo- £ 3 13^. 6d. POOLE, W. F, and FLETCHER, W. / . — I n d e x t o P e r i o d i c a l L i t e r a t u r e . First Supplement. 1882 to 1887. Royal 8vo, £1 16s. P r a c t i c a l Guides.—France, Belgium, Holland, and the Rhine, u . Italian Lakes. I J . Wintering Places of the South. 2s. Switzerland, Savoy, and North Italy. 2s. 6d. General Continental Guide. $s. Geneva, is. Paris, is. Bernese Oberland. is. Italy. 4^. A List of 24 P s y c h i c a l R e s e a r c h , P r o c e e d i n g s of t h e S o c i e t y for. Published irregularly. Post 8vo. Vol. I. to III. IOJ. each. Vol. IV. 8s, Vol. V. IOS. PURITZ, Lttdwig.—Code-Book of G y m n a s t i c E x e r c i s e s . Translated by O. KNOFE and J. W. MACQUEEN. 32mo, is. 6d. RAPSON, Edivard J.— T h e S t r u g g l e b e t w e e n E n g l a n d a n d F r a n c e f o r S u p r e m a c y i n I n d i a . Crown 8vc, 4*. 6d. RAVENSTEIN, E. G., and HULLEY, John.—The G y m n a s i u m a n d i t s F i t t i n g s . With 14 Plates of Illustrations. 8vo, 2s. 6d. READE, Winwood.—The M a r t y r d o m of M a n . Thirteenth Edition. 8vo, Js. 6d. REND ELL, J. M.—C o n c i s e H a n d b o o k of t h e I s l a n d of M a d e i r a . With Plan of Funchal and Map of the Island. Second Edition. Fcap. 8vo, is. 6d. RHYS, y.Z>.—The I c e A g e i n N o r t h A m e r i c a , a n d its b e a r i n g u p o n t h e A n t i q u i t y of M a n . With Maps and Illustrations. 8vo, 2U. THE INTERNATIONAL SCIENTIFIC SERIES. I. F o r m s of W a t e r in Clouds a n d R i v e r s , I c e a n d Glaciers. By J. Tyndall, LL.D., F.R.S. With 25 Illustrations. Ninth Edition. 5*. II. P h y s i c s a n d P o l i t i c s ; or, Thoughts on the Application of the Principles of " Natural Selection " and " Inheritance " to Political Society. By Walter Bagehot. Eighth Edition. $s. III. F o o d s . By Edward Smith, M.D., LL.B., F.R.S. With numerous Illustrations. Ninth Edition. $s. IV. M i n d a n d B o d y ; t h e Theories of t h e i r R e l a t i o n . By Alexander Bain, LL.D. With Four Illustrations. Eighth Edition. $s. V. T h e S t u d y of Sociology. By \Herbert Spencer. Fourteenth Edition. 5^. VI. T h e Conservation of E n e r g y . By Balfour Stewart, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S. With 14 Illustrations. Seventh Edition. 5.?. VII. A n i m a l L o c o m o t i o n ; or, Walking, Swimming, and Flying. By J. B. Pettigrew, M.D., F.R.S., etc. With 130 Illustrations. Third Edition. 5*. VIII. R e s p o n s i b i l i t y i n M e n t a l Disease. By Henry Maudsley, M.D. Fourth Edition. 5J. IX. T h e N e w C h e m i s t r y . By Professor J. P. Cooke. With 31 Illustrations. Ninth Edition. $s, X. T h e Science of L a w . By Professor Sheldon Amos. Sixth Edition/ 5*. XI. A n i m a l M e c h a n i s m s a Treatise on Terrestrial and Aerial Locomotion. By Professor E. J. Marey. With 117 Illustrations. Third Edition. $s. XII. T h e D o c t r i n e of D e s c e n t a n d D a r w i n i s m . By Professor Oscar Schmidt. With 26 Illustrations. Seventh Edition. 5^, XIII. T h e H i s t o r y of t h e Conflict b e t w e e n R e l i g i o n a n d Science. By J. W. Draper, M.D., LL.D. Twentieth Edition. XIV. F u n g i : t h e i r N a t u r e , I n f l u e n c e s , r a n d U s e s . By M. C. Cooke, M.A., LL.D. Edited by the Rev. M. J. Berkeley, M.A., F.L.S. With numerous Illustrations. Fourth Edition. 5s. Regan Paul, Trench, Triihner & Co.'s Publications. 49 XV. T h e C h e m i s t r y of L i g h t a n d P h o t o g r a p h y . By Dr., Hermann Vogel. With 100 Illustrations. Fifth Edition. $s. XVI. T h e L i f e a n d G r o w t h of L a n g u a g e . By Professor William Dwight Whitney. Fifth Edition. 5*. XVII. M o n e y a n d t h e M e c h a n i s m of E x c h a n g e . By W. Stanley Jevons, M.A., F.R.S. Eighth Edition. 5*. XVIII. T h e N a t u r e of L i g h t . With a General Account of Physical Optics. By Dr. Eugene Lommel. With 188 Illustrations and a Table of Spectra in Chromo-lithography. Fifth Edition. 5^. XIX. A n i m a l P a r a s i t e s a n d M e s s m a t e s . By P . J. Van Beneden. With 83 Illustrations. Third Edition. 5*. XX. O n F e r m e n t a t i o n . By Professor Schiitzenberger. With 28 Illustrations. Fourth Edition. $s, XXI. T h e F i v e S e n s e s of M a n . By Professor Bernstein. With 91 Illustrations. Fifth Edition. 5*. XXII. T h e T h e o r y of S o u n d i n i t s R e l a t i o n t o M u s i c . By Professor Pietro Blaserna. With numerous Illustrations. Third Edition. 5^. XXIII. S t u d i e s i n S p e c t r u m A n a l y s i s . By J. Norman Lockyer, F.R.S. With 6 Photographic Illustrations of Spectra, and numerous engravings on Wood. Fourth Edition. 6s. 6d. XXIV. A H i s t o r y of t h e G r o w t h of t h e S t e a m E n g i n e . Bv Professor R. H. Thurston. With numerous Illustrations. Fourth Edition. $s. XXV. E d u c a t i o n a s a S c i e n c e . By Alexander Bain, LL.D. Seventh Edition. 5^ XXVI. T h e H u m a n Species. By Professor A. de Quatrefages. Fifth Edition. 5*. XXVII. M o d e r n C h r o m a t i c s . With Applications to Art and Industry. By Ogden N. Rood. With 130 original Illustrations. Second Edition. $s. XXVIII. T h e C r a y f i s h : an Introduction to the Study of Zoology. By Professor T. H. Huxley. With 82 Illustrations. Fifth Edition, 55. XXIX. T h e B r a i n a s a n O r g a n of M i n d . By H. Charlton Bastian, M.D. With numerous Illustrations. Third Edition. $s. XXX. T h e A t o m i c T h e o r y . By Professor Wurtz. Translated by E. Cleminshaw, F.C.S. Fifth Edition. 5*. XXXI. T h e N a t u r a l C o n d i t i o n s of E x i s t e n c e a s t h e y affect A n i m a l L i f e . By Karl Semper. With 2 Maps and 106 Woodcuts. Third Edition. $s. XXXII. G e n e r a l P h y s i o l o g y of M u s c l e s a n d N e r v e s . By Professor J. Rosenthal. Third Edition. With 75 Illustrations. 5J. s 50 A List of XXXIII. S i g h t : an Exposition of the Principles of Monocular and Binocular Vision. By Joseph le Conte, LL.D. Second Edition. With 132 Illustrations. $s. XXXIV. I l l u s i o n s ; a Psychological Study. By James Sully. Third Edition. 5-f. XXXV. V o l c a n o e s s w h a t t h e y a r e a n d w h a t t h e y t e a c h . By Professor J. W. Judd, F.R.S. With 96 Illustrations on Wood. Fourth Edition. $s. XXXVI. S u i c i d e : an Essay on Comparative Moral Statistics. By Professor H. Morselli. Second Edition. With Diagrams. $s. XXXVII. T h e B r a i n a n d i t s F u n c t i o n s . By J. Luys. With Illustrations. Second ^Edition. §s. XXXVIII. M y t h a n d S c i e n c e : an Essay. By Tito Vignoli. Third Edition. With Supplementary Note. 5^. XXXIX. T h e S u n . By Professor Young. With Illustrations. Third Edition. 5«r. XL. A n t s , Bees, a n d W a s p s : a Record of Observations on the Habits of the Social Hymenoptera. By Sir John Lubbock, Bart., M.P. With 5 Chromo-lkhographic Illustrations. Ninth Edition. 5* XLI. A n i m a l I n t e l l i g e n c e . By G. J. Romanes, LL.D;, F.R.S. Fourth Edition. 5*. XLII. T h e C o n c e p t s a n d T h e o r i e s of M o d e r n P h y s i c s . By J. B. Stallo. Third Edition. 5*. XLIII. D i s e a s e s of M e m o r y : an Essay in the Positive Psychology. By Professor Th. Ribot. Third Edition. 5*. XLIV. M a n b e f o r e M e t a l s . By N. Joly. With 148 Illustrations. Fourth Edition. 5*. XLV. T h e S c i e n c e of P o l i t i c s . By Professor Sheldon Amos. Third Edition. 5*. XLVI. E l e m e n t a r y M e t e o r o l o g y . By Robert H. Scott Fourth Edition. With numerous Illustrations. 5*. XLVII. T h e O r g a n s of S p e e c h a n d t h e i r A p p l i c a t i o n i n t h e F o r m a t i o n of A r t i c u l a t e S o u n d s . By Georg Hermann Von Meyer. With 47 Woodcuts. $s. XLVIII. F a l l a c i e s . A View of Logic from the Practical Side. By Alfred Sidgwick. Second Edition. $s. XLIX. O r i g i n of C u l t i v a t e d P l a n t s . Second Edition. $s. By Alphonse de Candolle, L. J e l l y - F i s h , S t a r - F i s h , a n d S e a - U r c h i n s . Being a Research on Primitive Nervous Systems. By G. J. Romanes. With Illustrations. $s. Regan Paul, Trench, Trilbner & Co!s Publications. 51 LL T h e C o m m o n S e n s e of t h e E x a c t S c i e n c e s . By the late William Kingdon Clifford. Second Edition. With 100 Figures. 5*. LII. P h y s i c a l E x p r e s s i o n : I t s M o d e s a n d P r i n c i p l e s . By Francis Warner, M.D., F.R.C.P., Hunterian Professor of Comparative Anatomy and t Physiology, R.C.S.E. With 50 Illustrations. 5J. LIII. A n t h r o p o i d A p e s . tions. 5^. By Robert Hartmann. With 63 Illustra- LIV. T h e M a m m a l i a i n t h e i r R e l a t i o n t o P r i m e v a l T i m e s . By Oscar Schmidt. With 51 Woodcuts. $s. LV. C o m p a r a t i v e L i t e r a t u r e . By H. Macaulay Posnett, LL.D. 5*. LVI. E a r t h q u a k e s a n d o t h e r E a r t h M o v e m e n t s . By Professor John Milne. With 38 Figures. Second Edition. $s. LVII. M i c r o b e s , F e r m e n t s , a n d M o u l d s . With 107 Illustrations. $s. By E. L. Trouessart. LVIII. G e o g r a p h i c a l a n d Geological D i s t r i b u t i o n of A n i m a l s * By Professor A. Heilprin. With Frontispiece. 5*. LIX. " W e a t h e r . A Popular Exposition of the Nature of Weathet Changes from Day to Day. By the Hon. Ralph Abercromby; Second Edition. With 96 Illustrations. 5^. LX. A n i m a l M a g n e t i s m . Second Edition. $s. By Alfred Binet and Charles Fere\ LXI. M a n u a l of B r i t i s h D i s c o m y c e t e s , with descriptions of all the Species of Fungi hitherto found in Britain included in the Family, and Illustrations of the Genera. By William Phillips, F.L.S. SSi LXII. I n t e r n a t i o n a l L a w . With Materials for a Code of International Law. By Professor Leone Levi. $s. LXIII. T h e Geological H i s t o r y of P l a n t s . Dawson. With 80 Figures. $s. By Sir J. William LXIV. T h e O r i g i n of F l o r a l S t r u c t u r e s t h r o u g h I n s e c t a n d o t h e r A g e n c i e s . By Rev. Professor G. Henslow. With 88 Illustrations. 55. LXV. O n t h e S e n s e s , I n s t i n c t s , a n d I n t e l l i g e n c e of A n i m a l s . With special Reference to Insects. By Sir John Lubbock, Bart., M.P. 100 Illustrations. Second Edition. 5s. LXVI. T h e P r i m i t i v e F a m i l y : I t s O r i g i n a n d D e v e l o p m e n t ; By C. N. Starcke. 5-r. LXVII. P h y s i o l o g y of B o d i l y E x e r c i s e . M.D. 5^. By Fernand Lagrange* A List of 52 LXVIII. T h e C o l o u r s of A n i m a l s s t h e i r M e a n i n g a n d U s e , e s p e c i a l l y c o n s i d e r e d i n t h e C a s e of I n s e c t s . By E. B. Poulton, F.R.S. With Coloured Frontispiece and 66 Illustrations in Text. 5-r. LXIX. I n t r o d u c t i o n t o F r e s h - W a t e r Algae. With'an Enumeration of all the British Species. By M. C. Cooke. 13 Plates. 5«r. ORIENTAL, EGYPTIAN, ETC. AHLWARDT, W.— T h e D i v a n s of t h e S i x A n c i e n t A r a b i c Poets, E n n a b i g a , ' A n t a r a , Tharafa, Zuhair, 5A1q u a m a , a n d I m r u u l q u a i s . Edited by W. AHLWARDT. Demy 8vo, 12.S, ALABASTER, Henry.—The W h e e l of t h e L a w ". Buddhism illustrated from Siamese Sources. Demy 8vo, 14.?. ALL, Moulavl Cherdgh.—The P r o p o s e d P o l i t i c a l , L e g a l , a n d Social R e f o r m s in t h e O t t o m a n E m p i r e a n d other M o h a m m e d a n S t a t e s . Demy 8vo, $s. ARNOLD, Sir Edwin, C.S.I.—With S a ' d i i n t h e Garden", or, The Book of Love. Being the " Ishk," or Third Chapter of the "Bostan" of the Persian Poet Sa'di. Embodied in a Dialogue held in the Garden of the Taj Mahal, at Agra. Crown 8vo, p. 6d. L o t u s a n d J e w e l . Containing " I n an Indian Temple," " A Casket of Gems," " A Queen's Revenge," with Other Poems. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, p. 6d. Death—and Afterwards. Reprinted from the Fortnightly Review of August, 1885. With a Supplement. Ninth Edition. Crown 8vo, is, 6d,; paper, is, I n d i a R e v i s i t e d . With 32 Full-page Illustrations. From Photographs selected by the Author. Crown 8vo, *js, 6d. T h e L i g h t of A s i a ; or, The Great Renunciation. Being the Life and Teaching of Gautama, Prince of India, and Founder of Buddhism. With Illustrations and a Portrait of the Author. Post 8vo, cloth, gilt back and edges; or half-parchment, cloth sides, $s, 6d. Library Edition. Crown 8vo, 7*. 6d. Illustrated Edition. Small 4to, 21s. I n d i a n P o e t r y . Containing " The Indian Song of Songs," from the Sanskrit of the Gita Govinda of Jayad^ra ; Two Books from " The Iliad of India j " and other Oriental Poems. Fifth Edition. 7*. 6d Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co!s Publications. 53 ARNOLD, Sir Edwin, C.S.I.—continued. P e a r l s of t h e F a i t h ; or, Islam's Rosary : being the Ninety-nine beautiful names of Allah. With Comments in Verse from various Oriental sources. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d. I n d i a n I d y l l s . From the Sanskrit of the Mahabharata. Crown 8vo, 7.?. 6d. T h e S e c r e t of D e a t h . Being a Version of the Katha Upanishad, from the Sanskrit. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 7*. 6d. T h e S o n g C e l e s t i a l ; or, Bhagavad-Gita. Translated from the Sanskrit Text. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 5^. P o e t i c a l W o r k s . Uniform Edition, comprising " T h e Light of Asia," " Indian Poetry," " Pearls of the Faith," " Indian Idylls," " T h e Secret of Death," " T h e Song Celestial," and "With Sa'di in the Garden." In 8 vols. Crown 8vo, cloth, 48J. T h e I l i a d a n d O d y s s e y of I n d i a . Fcap. 8vo, is. A S i m p l e T r a n s l i t e r a l G r a m m a r of t h e T u r k i s h L a n g u a g e . Post 8vo, 2s. 6d. A s i a t i c S o c i e t y . — J o u r n a l of t h e R o y a l A s i a t i c S o c i e t y of G r e a t B r i t a i n a n d I r e l a n d , from the Commencement to 1863. First Series, complete in 20 vols. 8vo, with many Plates, ;£io, or in parts from 4s. to 6s. each. J o u r n a l of t h e R o y a l A s i a t i c S o c i e t y of G r e a t B r i t a i n and Ireland. New Series. 8vo. Stitched in wrapper. 1864-88. Vol, I., 2 Parts, pp. iv. and 490, 16s.—Vol. II., 2 Parts, pp. 522, 16s. —Vol. III., 2 Parts, pp. 516, with Photograph, 22s.—Vol. IV., 2 Parts, pp. 521, 16s.—Vol. V., 2 Parts, pp. 463, with 10 full-page and folding Plates, 18s. 6d.—Vol. VI., Part I, pp. 212, with 2 Plates and a Map, Ss. —Vol. VI., Part 2, pp. 272, with Plate and a Map, 8s.—Vol. VII., Part I, pp. 194, with a Plate, Ss.—Vol. VII., Part 2, pp. 204, with 7 Plates and a Map, Ss.—Vol. VIII., Part I, pp. 156, with 3 Plates and a Plan, Ss. —Vol. VIII., Part 2, pp. 152, Ss.—Vol. IX., Part I, pp. 154, with a Plate, Ss.—Vol. IX., Part 2, pp. 292, with 3 Plates, 10s. 6d.—Vol X., Part I, pp. 156, with 2 Plates and a Map, Ss.—Vol. X., Part 2, pp. 146, 6-y.—Vol. X., Part 3, pp. 204, Ss.— Vol. XL, Part 1, pp. 128, 5.?.—Vol. X L , Part 2, pp. 158, with 2 Plates, Js. 6d.—Vol. XL, Part 3, pp. 250, Ss.— Vol. XII., Part I, pp. 152, 5^.—Vol. XII., Part 2, pp. 182, with 2 Plates and a Map, 6s.—Vol. XII., Part 3, pp. 100, 4s.—Vol. XIL, Part 4, pp. x., 152, cxx., 16, Ss.—Vol. XIIL, Part I, pp. 120, 5s.—Vol. XIIL, Part 2, pp. 170, with a Map, Ss.— Vol. XIIL, Part 3, pp. 178, with a Table, *js. 6d.—Vo\. XIIL, Part 4, pp. 282, with a Plate and Table, 10s. 6d.—Vol. XIV., Part 1, pp. 124, with a Table and 2 Plates, $s.-~ Vol. XIV., Part 2, pp. 164, with 1 Table, Js. 6d.—Vol. XIV., Part 3, pp. 206, with 6 Plates, Ss.—Vol. XIV., Part 4, pp. 492, with I Plate, 14J.—Vol. XV., Part 1, pp. 136, 6s.—Vol. XV., Part 2, pp. 158, with 3 Tables, 5^,—Vol, XV., Part 3, pp. 192, 6s.—Vol. XV., Part 4, pp. A List of 54 A s i a t i c Society—continued. 140, 5J.—Vol. XVI., Part 1, pp. 138, with 2 Plates, 7J.—Vol. XVI., Part 2, pp. 184, with I Plate, 9^.—Vol. XVI., Part 3, July, 1884, pp. 74-clx., 10s. 6^.—Vol. XVI., Part 4, pp. 132, 8^.—Vol. XVII., Part 1, pp. 144, with 6 Plates, 10s. 6d.—Vol. XVII., Part 2, pp. 194, with a Map, gs.—Vol. XVII., Part 3, pp. 342, with 3 Plates, 10s. 6d.—Vol. XVIII., Part I, pp. 126, With 2 Plates, 5^.—Vol. XVIII., Part 2, pp. 196, with 2 Plates, 6^.—Vol. XVIII., Part 3, pp. 130, with 11 Plates, 10s. 6d.—Vol. XVIII., Part 4, pp. 314, with 8 Plates, fs. 6d.— Vol. XIX., Part I, pp. 100, with 3 Plates, 10s.—Vol. XIX., Part 2, pp. 156, with 6 Plates, 10s.—Vol. XIX., Part 3, pp. 216, with 6 Plates, 10s.— Vol. XIX., Part 4, pp. 216, with I Plate, 10s.— Vol. XX., Part I, pp. 163, ior.—Vol. XX., Part 2, pp. 155, los.—Vol. XX., Part 3, pp. 143, with 3 Plates and a Map, 10s.—Vol. XX., Part 4, pp. 318, ior. ASTON, W. G.—A S h o r t G r a m m a r of t h e J a p a n e s e S p o k e n L a n g u a g e . Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, 12s. A G r a m m a r of t h e J a p a n e s e W r i t t e n L a n g u a g e . Second Edition. 8vo, 2%s. A u c t o r e s S a n s c r i t ! :— Vol. I. T h e J a i m i n f y a - N y a y a - M a l a ^ - V i s t a r a . Edited under the supervision of THEODOR GOLDSTUCKER. Large 4to, £3 I3J. 6d. Vol. II. T h e I n s t i t u t e s of G a u t a m a . Edited, with an Index of Words, by A. F. STENZLER, Ph.D., Prof, of Oriental Languages in the University of Breslau. 8vo, cloth, 4^. 6d.; stitched, 3^. 6d. Vol. III. V a i t a n a S u t r a : T h e R i t u a l of t h e A t h a r v a V e d a . Edited, with Critical Notes and Indices, by Dr. R. GARBE. 8vo, SS. Vols. IV. and V. V a r d h a m a n a ' s G a n a r a t n a m a h o d a d h i , with the Author's Commentary. Edited, with Critical Notes and Indices, by JULIUS EGGELING. Part I. 8vo, 6s. Part II. 8vo, 6s. BAB A, Tatui.—An E l e m e n t a r y G r a m m a r of t h e J a p a n e s e L a n g u a g e . With Easy Progressive Exercises. Second Edi« tion. Crown 8vo, 5*. BADGER, George Percy, D.C.Z.—Axi E n g l i s h - A r a b i c L e x i c o n . In which the equivalent for English Words and Idiomatic Sentences are rendered into literary and colloquial Arabic. Royal 4to, 80s. BALFOUR, F. # . — T h e D i v i n e Classic of N a n - H u a . Being the Works of Chuang Tsze, Taoist Philosopher. 8vo, 14^. T a o i s t T e x t s , Ethical, Political, and Speculative. Imperial 8vo, IOJ1. 6d. L e a v e s f r o m m y C h i n e s e S c r a p - B o o k . Post 8vo, p. 6d. Kegan Paul, Trench^ Triibner & Co.'s Publications. 55 BALLANTYNE,J. R.—Klements of H i n d i a n d B r a j B h a k h a G r a m m a r . Compiled for the use of the East India College at Haileybury. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 5^. F i r s t L e s s o n s i n S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r ; together with an Introduction to the Hitopadesa. Fourth Edition. 8vo, 3^. 6d. BEAL, S.—A C a t e n a of B u d d h i s t S c r i p t u r e s f r o m t h e C h i n e s e . 8vo, 15,?. T h e R o m a n t i c L e g e n d of S a k y a B u d d h a . From the Chinese-Sanskrit. Crown 8vo, 12s. B u d d h i s t L i t e r a t u r e i n C h i n a . Four Lectures. Demy 8vo, 10s. 6d. BE'AMES, John.—-Outlines of I n d i a n P h i l o l o g y . With a Map showing the Distribution of Indian Languages. Second enlarged Edition. Crown 8vo, 5s. A C o m p a r a t i v e G r a m m a r of t h e M o d e r n A r y a n L a n g u a g e s of I n d i a : Hindi, Panjabi, Sindhi, Gujarati, Marathi, Oriya, and Bengali. 3 vols. 16s. each. BELLE IV, Deputy-Surgeon- General H. W.—T h e H i s t o r y of Cholera i n I n d i a f r o m 1 8 6 2 t o 1881. With Maps and Diagrams. Demy 8vo, £2 2s. A Short Practical Treatise on t h e N a t u r e , Causes, a n d T r e a t m e n t of C h o l e r a . Demy 8vo, js. 6d. F r o m t h e I n d u s t o t h e T i g r i s . A Narrative of a Journey through Balochistan, Afghanistan, Khorassan, and Iran, in 1872. 8vo, 10s. 6d. K a s h m i r a n d K a s h g h a r . A Narrative of the Journey of the Embassy to Kashghar in 1873-74. Demy 8vo, 10s. 6d. T h e R a c e s of A f g h a n i s t a n . Being a Brief Account of the Principal Nations inhabiting that Country. 8vo, Js. 6d. BELLOWS, John.— K n g l i s h O u t l i n e V o c a b u l a r y , f o r t h e U s e of S t u d e n t s of t h e C h i n e s e , J a p a n e s e , a n d o t h e r L a n g u a g e s . Crown 8vo, 6s. BENFEY, Theodor.—A P r a c t i c a l G r a m m a r of t h e S a n s k r i t L a n g u a g e , f o r t h e U s e of E a r l y S t u d e n t s . Second Edition. Royal 8vo, iOf. 6d, BENTLEY, W. Holman.—Dictionary a n d G r a m m a r of t h e K o n g o L a n g u a g e , as spoken at San Salvador, the Ancient Capital of the Old Kongo Empire, West Africa. Demy 8vo, 21 s. BEVERIDGE, H.—The D i s t r i c t of B a k a r g a n j : Its History and Statistics. 8vo, 21s. B u d d h i s t C a t e c h i s m ( A ) ; or, Outline of the Doctrine of the Buddha Gotama. By SUBHADRA BHIKSHU, umo, %s. A List of 56 BUDGE, Ernest A.—Archaic Classics- Assyrian Texts; being Extiacts from the Annals of Shalmaneser II., Sennacherib, and Assur-Bani-Pal. With Philological Notes. Small 4to, >]s. 6a1. BURGESS, James.—ARCHJEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF WESTERN INDIA : — Reports— T h e B e l g a m a n d K a l a d i D i s t r i c t s . With 56 Photographs and Lithographic Plates. Royal 4to, half-bound, £2 2s, T h e A n t i q u i t i e s of K a t h i a w a d a n d K a c h h . Royal 4to, with 74 Plates. Half-bound, £3 $s. The Antiquities in the Bidar and Aurangabad Dist r i c t s , in the Territories of His Highne'ss'the Nizam of Haiderabad. With 63 Photographic Plates. Royal 4to, half-bound, £2 2S. The Buddhist Cave-Temples a n d their Inscriptions. Containing Views, Plans, Sections, and Elevation of Facades of Cave-Temples; Drawings of Architectural and Mythological Sculptures; Facsimiles of Inscriptions, etc.; with Descriptive and Explanatory Text, and Translations of Inscriptions. With 86 Plates and Woodcuts. Royal 4to, half-bound, ^ 3 3s. Elura Cave-Temples, and the Brahmanical and J a i n a C a v e s i n W e s t e r n I n d i a . With 66 Plates and Woodcuts. Royal 4to, half-bound, £3 3s. ARCHAEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF SOUTHERN I N D I A : — R e p o r t s of t h e A m a r a v a t i a n d J a g g a y p y a e t a B u d d h i s t S t u p a s . Containing numerous Collotype and other Illustrations of Buddhist Sculpture and Architecture, etc., in South-Eastern India; Facsimiles of Inscriptions, etc.; with Descriptive and Explanatory Text. Together with Transcriptions, Translations, and Elucidations of the Dhauli and Jaugada Inscriptions of Asoka, by Professor G. BUHLER, LL.D. Vol.1. With numerous Plates and Woodcuts. Royal 4to, half-bound, £4 4* BURGESS, James.—Kpigraphia I n d i c a a n d R e c o r d of t h e A r c h a e o l o g i c a l S u r v e y of I n d i a . Edited by JAS. BURGESS, LL.D. Parts I., II., and III. Royal 410, wrappers, Js. each. BURNELL, A. C—Elements of S o u t h I n d i a n P a l a e o g r a p h y , from the Fourth to the Seventeenth Century A.D. Being an Introduction to the Study of South Indian Inscriptions and MSS. Second enlarged and improved Edition. Map and 35 Plates. 4to, £2 12s. 6d. A Classified I n d e x t o t h e S a n s k r i t M S S . i n t h e P a l a c e a t T a n j o r e . Prepared for the Madras Government. 3 Parts. 4to, 10s. each. Kegan Paul, Trench, Ttubner & Co.'s Publications. 57 CALDWELL, Bishop R.—A C o m p a r a t i v e G r a m m a r of t h e D r a v i d i a n o r S o u t h I n d i a n F a m i l y of L a n g u a g e s . A second, corrected, and enlarged Edition. Demy 8vo, 28^. CAPPELLER, Carl—A S a n s k r i t - E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y . Based upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Royal 8vo. [In preparation. CHALMERS, J.—Structure of C h i n e s e C h a r a c t e r s , under 300 Primary Forms, after the Shwoh-wan, 100 A.D. Demy 8vo, I2J. 6d. CHAMBERLAIN, B. H.—A R o m a n i s e d J a p a n e s e R e a d e r . Consisting of Japanese Anecdotes, Maxims, with English Translation and. Notes. i2mo, 6s. T h e C l a s s i c a l P o e t r y of t h e J a p a n e s e . Post 8vo, 7.?. 6d. H a n d b o o k of C o l l o q u i a l J a p a n e s e . 8vo, 12s. 6d. CHATTER/I, Mohini M.—The B h a g a v a d Gita.", or, The Lord's Lay. With Commentary and Notes. Translated from the Sanskrit. Second Edition. Royal 8vo, 10s. 6d. CHILDERS, R. C.—A P a l i - E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y , with Sanskrit Equivalents. Imperial 8vo, £3 3s. T h e M a h a p a r i n i b b a n a s u t t a of t h e S u t t a P i t a k a . The Pali Text.. Edited by R. C. CHILDERS. 8vo, 5*. CHINTAMON, H.—A C o m m e n t a r y o n t h e T e x t of t h e B h a g a v a d - G f t a ; or, The Discourse between Khrishna and Arjuna of Divine Matters. Post 8vo, 6s. COOMARA SWAMY, Mutu.—T'h.Q D a t h a v a n s a ; or, The History of the Tooth Relic of Gotama Buddha, in Pali Verse. Edited by MUTU COOMARA SWAMY. Demy 8vo, IOJ*. 6d. English Translation. With Notes. 6s. S u t t a N i p a t a ; or, Dialogues and Discourses of Gotama Buddha. Translated from the original Pali. Crown 8vo, 6s. CO WELL, E. B.—A S h o r t I n t r o d u c t i o n t o t h e O r d i n a r y P r a k r i t of t h e S a n s k r i t D r a m a s . Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. P r a k r i t a - P r a k a s a ; or, The Prakrit Grammar of Vararuchi, with the Commentary (Manorama) of Bhamaha. 8vo, 14s. CRA VEN, T.—English-Hindustani D i c t i o n a r y . i8mo, 3.?. 6d. and Hindustani-English CUNNINGHAM, Major-General Alexander.—The Ancient Geog r a p h y of I n d i a . I. The Buddhist Period, including the Campaigns of Alexander and the Travels of Hwen-Thsang. With 13 Maps. 8vo, £ 1 Ss. A r c h a e o l o g i c a l S u r v e y of I n d i a , Reports. With numerous Plates. Vols. I. to XXIII. Royal 8vo, 10s. and 12s. each. General Index to Vols. I. to XXIII. Rona 8vo, 12s, 58 A List of CUST, R. AT.—P i c t u r e s of I n d i a n L i f e , Sketched with the Pen from 1852 to 1881. With Maps. Crown 8vo, p. 6d. DENNYS, JST. B.— T h e F o l k - L o r e of C h i n a , a n d i t s Affinities w i t h t h a t of t h e A r y a n a n d S e m i t i c R a c e s , 8vo, 10s. 6d. DOUGLAS, R. JT.—Chinese L a n g u a g e a n d L i t e r a t u r e . Two Lectures. Crown 8vo, $s. T h e L i f e of J e n g h i z K h a n . Translated from the Chinese. Crown 8vo, 5«r. DOWSONy John.—A. G r a m m a r of t h e U r d u o r H i n d u s t a n i L a n g u a g e . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, IOJ. 6d. A H i n d u s t a n i E x e r c i s e B o o k . -Containing a Series of Passages and Extracts adapted for Translation into Hindustani. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. DUKAy Theodore.—An E s s a y o n t h e B r a h u i G r a m m a r . Demy 8vo, 3-r. 6d. DUTT, Romesh Chmider.—A. H i s t o r y of C i v i l i z a t i o n i n A n c i e n t I n d i a . Based on Sanscrit Literature. 3 vols. Crown 8vo. Vol. I. Vedic and Epic Ages. Ss, Vol. I I . Rationalistic Age. Ss. Vol. III. \In preparation* EDKINS, Joseph.— C h i n a ' s P l a c e i n P h i l o l o g y . An Attempt to show that the Languages of Europe and Asia have a common origin. Crown 8vo, IOJ. 6d, T h e E v o l u t i o n of t h e C h i n e s e L a n g u a g e . As Exemplifying the Origin and Growth of Human Speech. Demy 8vo, 4s. 6d. T h e E v o l u t i o n of t h e H e b r e w L a n g u a g e . Demy 8vo, 5s. I n t r o d u c t i o n t o t h e S t u d y of t h e C h i n e s e C h a r a c t e r s . Royal 8vo, i$s. E g y p t E x p l o r a t i o n F u n d :— T h e S t o r e - C i t y of P i t h o m , and the Route of the Exodus. By EDOUARD NAVILLE. Third Edition. With 13 Plates and 2 Maps. Royal 4to, 25^. T a n i s , Part I., 1883-84. By W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE. With 19 Plates and Plans. Royal 4to, 25J. T a n i s . Part I I . Nebesha, Daphnse (Tahpenes). By W. M. FLINDERS P E T R I E and F. L L . G R I F F I T H . 64 Plates. Royal 4to, 2$s. Naukratis. Part I. By W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE, CECIL SMITH, E. A. GARDNER, and B. V. HEAD. With 45 Plates. Royal 4to, 2$s. Naukratis. Part I I . By ERNEST A. GARDNER. With an Appendix by F. L L . GRIFFITH. With 24 Plates. Royal 4to, 25^ G o s h e n . By E. NAVILLE. With 11 Plates. Royal 4to, 25^ Kegan Paul, Trench, Trilbner & Co!s Publications. 59 EITEL, E. J.—Buddhism 2 Its Historical, Theoretical, and Popular Aspects. Third, Revised Edition. Demy 8vo, $s. H a n d b o o k f o r t h e S t u d e n t of C h i n e s e B u d d h i s m . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 18s. ELLIOT, Sir H. M.—Memoirs on t h e History, Folk-Lore, a n d D i s t r i b u t i o n of t h e R a c e s of t h e N o r t h - W e s t e r n P r o v i n c e s of I n d i a . Edited by J. BEAMES. 2 vols. With 3 Coloured Maps. Demy 8vo, £1 16s. T h e H i s t o r y of I n d i a , as told by its own Historians. The Muhammadan Period. Edited from the Posthumous Papers of the late Sir H . M. ELLIOT. Revised and continued by Professor J O H N DOWSON. 8 vols. 8vo, £8 8s. EMERSON, Ellen Russell.—Indian M y t h s ; or, Legends, Traditions, and Symbols of the Aborigines of America. Illustrated. Post 8vo, £1 I J . FERGUSSON, T.— C h i n e s e R e s e a r c h e s . First Part. Chinese Chronology and Cycles. Crown 8vo, IOJ. 6d. FINN, Alexander.—Persian f o r T r a v e l l e r s . Oblong 321110, $s. FRYER, Majer G. E.—The K h y e n g P e o p l e of t h e S a n d o w a y D i s t r i c t , A r a k a n . With 2 Plates. 8vo, 3s. 6d. P a l i S t u d i e s . No. I. Analysis, and Pali Text of the Subodhalankara, or Easy Rhetoric, by Sangharakkhita Thera. 8vo, 3.?. 6d. GHOSE, Loke A7".—The M o d e r n H i s t o r y of t h e I n d i a n Chiefs, R a j a s , e t c . 2 vols. Post 8vo, 21s. GILES, Herbert A.—Chinese S k e t c h e s . 8vo, \os. 6d. A D i c t i o n a r y of C o l l o q u i a l I d i o m s i n t h e M a n d a r i n D i a l e c t . 4to, 28*. S y n o p t i c a l S t u d i e s i n C h i n e s e C h a r a c t e r . 8vo, i$s< C h i n e s e w i t h o u t a T e a c h e r . Being a Collection of Easy and Useful Sentences in the Mandarin Dialect. With a Vocabulary. I2mo, $s. T h e S a n T z u G h i n g ; or, Three Character Classic; and the Ch'Jen Tsu Wen; or, Thousand Character Essay. Metrically translated by HERBERT A. GILES. GOVER, i2mo, 2s. 6d. C. E.— T h e F o l k - S o n g s of S o u t h e r n I n d i a . Containing Canarese, Badaga, Coorg, Tamil, Malayalam, and Telugu Songs. The Cural. 8vo, los. 6d. GRIFFIN, L. &.— T h e R a j a s of t h e P u n j a b . History of the Principal States in the Punjab, and their Political Relations with the British Government. Royal 8vo, 21s. GRIFFITH, F L.— T h e I n s c r i p t i o n s of S i u t a n d D e r R i f e h . With 21 Plates. 4to, IQJ. 6o A List of GRIFFIS, W. E.— T h e M i k a d o ' s E m p i r e . Book I. History of Japan, from B.C. 660 to A.D. 1872. Book I I . Personal Experiences, Observations, and Studies in Japan, 1870-1874. Second Edition. Illustrated. 8vo, 20s. J a p a n e s e F a i r y W o r l d . Stories from the Wonder-Lore of Japan. With 12 Plates. Square i6mo, *js. 6d. HAFIZ OF SHIRAZ.—Selections f r o m h i s P o e m s . Translated from the Persian by HERMANN BICKNELL. With Oriental Bordering in gold and colour, and Illustrations by J. R. HERBERT, R.A. Demy 410, £2 2s. HAGGARD, W. H., and LE STRANGE, G. —The V a z i r of L a n k u r a n . A Persian Play. Edited, with a Grammatical Introduction, a Translation, Notes, and a Vocabulary, giving the Pronunciation. Crown 8vo, I or. 6d. HALL, John Carey.—A G e n e r a l V i e w of C h i n e s e C i v i l i z a t i o n , and of the Relations of the West with China. From the French of M. PIERRE LAFFITTE. Demy 8vo, 3J. H e b r e w L i t e r a t u r e Society.—Lists on application. HEPBURN, J. C.—A J a p a n e s e a n d E n g l i s h ] D i c t i o n a r y . Second Edition. Imperial 8vo, 18s. A Japanese-English and English-Japanese Dictiona r y . Abridged by the Author. Square i6mo, 14$". A Japanese-English and English-Japanese Dictiona r y , Third Edition. Demy 8vo, half-morocco, cloth sides. 3or. HILMY, H.H. Prince Ibrahim.—-The Literature of E g y p t a n d t h e S o u d a n . From the Earliest Times to the Year 1885 inclusive. A Bibliography; comprising Printed Books, Periodical Writings and Papers of Learned Societies, Maps and Charts, Ancient Papyri, Manuscripts, Drawings, etc. 2 vols. Demy 4*o, £3 3*H i n d o o M y t h o l o g y P o p u l a r l y T r e a t e d . An Epitomised Description of the various Heathen Deities illustrated on the Silver Swami Tea Service presented, as a memento of his visit to India, to H.R.H. the Prince of Wales, K.G., by His Highness the Gaekwar of Baroda. Small 4to, 3s. 6d. HODGSON, B. H—Essays on the Languages, Literature, a n d R e l i g i o n of N e p a l a n d T i b e t . Together with further Papers on the Geography, Ethnology, and Commerce of those Countries. Royal 8vo, 14J. HOPKINS, F. L.—-Elementary G r a m m a r of t h e T u r k i s h L a n g u a g e . With a few Easy Exercises. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d, Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 6t HUNTER, Sir William Wilson.—The I m p e r i a l Gazetteer of I n d i a . New Edition. In 14 vols. With Maps. 1886-87. Half-morocco, £$ 3s. T h e I n d i a n E m p i r e : Its People, History, and Products. Second and Revised Edition, incorporating the general results of the Census of 1881. With Map. Demy 8vo, £1 is. A Brief H i s t o r y of t h e I n d i a n P e o p l e . Fourth Edition. With Map. Crown 8vo, 3J. 6d. The Indian Musalmans. Third Edition. 8vo, 10s. 6d. F a m i n e A s p e c t s of B e n g a l D i s t r i c t s . A System of Famine Warnings. Crown 8vo, *js. 6d. A S t a t i s t i c a l A c c o u n t of B e n g a l . In 20 vols. 8vo, halfmorocco, £$. A S t a t i s t i c a l A c c o u n t of A s s a m . 2 vols. With 2 Maps. 8vo, half-morocco, IOJ. C a t a l o g u e of S a n s k r i t M a n u s c r i p t s ( B u d d h i s t ) . Collected in Nepal by B. H. Hodgson. 8vo, 2s. I n d i a . — P u b l i c a t i o n s of t h e G e o g r a p h i c a l D e p a r t m e n t of t h e I n d i a Office, L o n d o n . A separate list, also list of all the Government Maps, on application. I n d i a . — P u b l i c a t i o n s of t h e G e o l o g i c a l S u r v e y of A separate list on application. India. I n d i a Office P u b l i c a t i o n s : — A d e n , S t a t i s t i c a l A c c o u n t of. 5s. B a d e n P o w e l l . L a n d R e v e n u e s , etc., i n I n d i a . 12s. Do. J u r i s p r u d e n c e for F o r e s t Officers. 12s, B e a l ' s B u d d h i s t T r i p i t a k a . 4*. B o m b a y C o d e . 21s. B o m b a y G a z e t t e e r . Vol. II. 14s. Vol. VIII. 9s. Vol. XIII. (2 parts) 16s. Vol. XV. (2 parts) I6J. Do. do. Vols. III. to VII., and X., XI., XII., XIV., XVI. Ss. each. Do. do. Vols. XXL, XXII., and XXIII. gs. each. B u r g e s s ' A r c h a e o l o g i c a l S u r v e y of "Western I n d i a . Vol. II. 63J. Do. do. do. Vol. III. 42J. Do. do. Vols. IV. and V. 126s. Do. do. Southern India. Vol. I. 84J. B u r m a (British) Gazetteer. 2 vols. 50*. 62 A List of I n d i a Office Publications—o. do. Vols. III. to XL, XIII. and XIV. 12s. each. Oudh ; do. Vols. I. to III. IOJ. each. R a j p u t a n a G a z e t t e e r . 3 vols. 15^. S a u n d e r s ' M o u n t a i n s a n d R i v e r B a s i n s of I n d i a . $s. T a y l o r . I n d i a n M a r i n e S u r v e y s . 2s. 6d. T r i g o n o m e t r i c a l S u r v e y , S y n o p s i s of G r e a t . Vols. I. to VI. IOJ. 6d. each. T r u m p p ' s A d i G r a n t h . $2s. 6d. W a r i n g . P h a r m a c o p o e i a of I n d i a ( T h e ) . 6s. W a t s o n ' s T o b a c c o . $s. W i l s o n . M a d r a s A r m y . Vols. I. and II. 21s. I n t e r n a t i o n a l N u m i s m a t a O r i e n t a l i a ( T h e ) . Royal 4to, in paper wrapper. Part I. Ancient Indian Weights. By E. THOMAS, F.R.S. With a Plate and Map of the India of Mann. gs. 6d. Part II. Coins of the Urtuki Turkumans. By STANLEY LANE POOLE. With 6 Plates* 9s. Part III. The Coinage of Lydia Regan Paul, Trench, Triihner & Cols Publications. 63 I n t e r n a t i o n a l N u m i s m a t a O r i e n t a l i a (The)—continued. and Persia, from the Earliest Times to the Fall of the Dynasty of the Achsemenidse. By BARCLAY V. HEAD. With 3 Autotype Plates. 10s. 6d. Part IV. The Coins of the Tuluni Dynasty. By EDWARD THOMAS ROGERS, I Plate. $s. Part V. The Parthian Coinage. By PERCY GARDNER. 8 Autotype Plates. i&r. Part VI. The Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon. By T. W. RHYS DAVIDS, I Plate, IOJ. Vol. I. Containing the first six parts, as specified above. Royal 4to, half-bound, £ 3 13J. 6d. Vol. I I . C o i n s of t h e J e w s . Being a History of the Jewish Coinage and Money in the Old and New Testaments. By F. W. MADDEN, M.R.A.S. With 279 Woodcuts and a Plate of Alphabets. Royal 4to, £2. Vol. III. Part I. T h e C o i n s of A r a k a n , of P e g u , a n d of Burma. By Lieut.-General Sir ARTHUR PHAYRE, C.B. Also contains the Indian Balhara, and the Arabian Intercourse with India in the Ninth and following Centuries. By EDWARD THOMAS, F.R.S. With 5 Autotype Illustrations. Royal 4to, 8s. 6d. Vol. I I I . Part I I . T h e C o i n s of S o u t h e r n I n d i a . By Sir W. ELLIOT. With Map and Plates. Royal 4to, 2$s. JASCHKE, H. A.—A T i b e t a n - E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y . With special reference to the Prevailing Dialects. To which is added an English-Tibetan Vocabulary. Imperial 8vo, £i IOS. J a t a k a (The), together with its C o m m e n t a r y . Being Tales of the Anterior Birth of Gotama Buddha. Nowfirstpublished in Pali, by V. FAUSBOLL. Text. 8vo. Vol. I. 28s. Vol. II. 28s. Vol. III. 28s. Vol. IV. 28s. Vol. V., completing the work, is in preparation. JENNINGS, Hargrave.—HlciQ I n d i a n R e l i g i o n s ; or, Results'of the Mysterious Buddhism. Demy 8vo, \os. 6d. JOHNSON, Samuel.—Oriental Religions a n d their Relation to U n i v e r s a l R e l i g i o n . Persia. Demy 8vo, 18s. KISTNER, <9# or the Storm-Gods. 8vo, 12s. 6d. T h e H y m n s of t h e R i g - V e d a , in the Samhita and Pada Texts. 2 vols. Second Edition. 8vo, £i 12s. N a g a n a n d a ; or, The Joy of the Snake World. A Buddhist Drama. Translated from the Sanskrit of Sri-Harsha-Deva, with Notes. By P. BOYD. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. NEWMAN, Francis William.—A. H a n d b o o k of M o d e r n A r a b i c . Post 8vo, 6s. A D i c t i o n a r y of M o d e r n A r a b i c . Anglo-Arabic Dictionary and Arabo-English Dictionary. 2 vols. Crown 8vo, £1 is. Oriental T e x t S o c i e t y ' s P u b l i c a t i o n s . A list may be had on application. PALMER, the late E. H.—A C o n c i s e E n g l i s h - P e r s i a n D i c t i o n a r y . With a Simplified Grammar of the Persian Language. Royal i6mo, IOJ. 6d. A Concise P e r s i a n - E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y . Second Edition* Royal i6mo, 10s. 6d. PRATT, George.—A G r a m m a r a n d D i c t i o n a r y of t h e S a m o a n L a n g u a g e . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, iSs. REDHOUSE,J. W.—The T u r k i s h V a d e - M e c u m of O t t o m a n C o l l o q u i a l L a n g u a g e . English and Turkish, and Turkish and English. The whole in English Characters, the Pronunciation being fully indicated. Third Edition. 32mo, 6s. A List of 66 REDHOUSE,J. W.—continued. O n t h e H i s t o r y , S y s t e m , a n d V a r i e t i e s of T u r k i s h P o e t r y . Illustrated by Selections in the Original and in English Paraphrase. 8vo, 2s. 6d.; wrapper, is. 6d. A T e n t a t i v e C h r o n o l o g i c a l S y n o p s i s of t h e H i s t o r y of A r a b i a a n d i t s N e i g h b o u r s , from B.C. 500,000 (?) to A.D. 679. Demy 8vo, is. R i g - V e d a - S a n h i t a . A Collection of Ancient Hindu Hymns. Translated from the Sanskrit by the late H. H . WILSON, F.R.S. Edited by E. B. COWELL and W. F. WEBSTER. In 6 vols. 8vo, cloth. Vols. I., II., I I I . 2U.each. Vol. IV. 14s. Vols. V. and VI. 21 s. each. SACHAU, Edward.—MbevvLTii's I n d i a . An Account of the Religion, Philosophy, Literature, Geography, Chronology, Astronomy, Customs, Laws, and Astrology of India, about A.D. 1030. Edited in the Arabic Original by Dr. EDWARD SACHAU. 4to, £3 3*A n E n g l i s h E d i t i o n . With Notes and Indices. 2 vols. Post 8vo, 36s. SALMONE, H. A.--An Arabic-English Dictionary. Comprising about 120,000 Arabic Words, with an English Index of about 50,000 Words. 2 vols. Post 8vo, 36s. SATOW, Ernest Mason.—An E n g l i s h - J a p a n e s e D i c t i o n a r y of t h e S p o k e n L a n g u a g e . Second Edition. Imperial 32mo, 12J. 6d. SCHLAGINTWEIT, Emit.—Buddhism i n T i b e t . Illustrated by Literary Documents and Objects of Religious Worship. With a Folio Atlas of 20 Plates, and 20 Tables of Native Print in the Text. Royal 8vo, £2 2s. SCOTT, James George.—Burma a s i t ' w a s , a s i t i s , a n d a s i t w i l l b e . Cheap Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. SHERRING, M. A.— T h e S a c r e d C i t y of t h e H i n d u s . An Account of Benares in Ancient and Modern Times. With Illustrations. 8vo, 2 is. STEELE, 7%.— A n E a s t e r n L o v e - S t o r y . Kusa Jatakaya. Crown 8vo, 6s. SUYEMATZ, K.—Genji M o n o g a t a r i . The Most Celebrated of the Classical Japanese Romances. Translated by K. SUYEMATZ. Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d. TARRING, C. J—A P r a c t i c a l E l e m e n t a r y T u r k i s h G r a m m a r . Crown 8vo, 6s. Y a z i r of L a n k u r a n . A Persian Play. A Text-Book of Modern Colloquial Persian. Edited by W. H . HAGGARD and G. L £ STRANGE. Crown 8vo, 10s. 6d. Kegan Paul, Trench, frilbner & Co!s Publications. 67 WATSON, John Forbes.—Index t o t h e N a t i v e a n d Scientific N a m e s of I n d i a n a n d o t h e r E a s t e r n E c o n o m i c P l a n t s a n d P r o d u c t s . Imperial 8vo, £1 us. 6d. WHEELER,/. Talboys.—TYie H i s t o r y of I n d i a f r o m t h e E a r l i e s t A g e s . Demy 8vo. Vol. I. Containing the Vedic Period and the Maha Bharata. With Map. Vol. II. The Ramayana, and the Brahmanic Period. With 2 Maps. 21s. Vol. III. Hindu, Buddhist, Brahmanical Revival. With 2 Maps. 8vo, iSs. This volume may be had as a complete work with the following title, " History of India: Hindu, Buddhist, and Brahmanical." Vol. IV. Part I. Mussulman Rule. 14s. Vol. IV. Part II. Completing the History of India down to the time of the Moghul Empire. I2s. E a r l y R e c o r d s of B r i t i s h I n d i a . A History of the English Settlements in India, as told in the Government Records, and other Contemporary Documents, from the earliest period down to the rise of British Power in India. Royal 8vo, 15X. WHITNEY, W. D.—A S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r , including both the Classical Language and the older Dialects of Veda and Brahmana. Second Edition. 8vo, 12s. WHITWORTH, George Clifford.—An A n g l o - I n d i a n D i c t i o n a r y : a Glossary of Indian Terms used in English, and of such English or other Non-Indian Terms as have obtained special meanings in India. Demy 8vo, cloth, 12s. WILLIAMS, S. Wells.—A S y l l a b i c D i c t i o n a r y of t h e C h i n e s e L a n g u a g e ; arranged according to the Wu-Fang Yuen Yin, with the Pronunciation of the Characters as heard in Pekin, Canton, Amoy, and Shanghai. 4to, £$ $s. WILSON.—"Works of t h e l a t e H o r a c e H a y m a n W i l s o n . Vols. I. and II. Essays and Lectures chiefly on the Religion of the Hindus. Collected and Edited by Dr. REINHOLD ROST. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 21s. Vols. III., IV., and V. Essays Analytical, Critical, and Philological, on Subjects connected with Sanskrit Literature. Collected and Edited by Dr. REINHOLD ROST. 3 vols. Demy 8vo, 36J. Vols. VI., VII., VIII., IX., and X. (2 parts). Vishnu Purana, a System of Hindu Mythology and Tradition. From the original Sanskrit. Illustrated by Notes derived chiefly from other Puranas, Edited by FITZEDWARD HALL, D.C.L. Vols. I. to V. (2 parts). Demy 8vo, £5 4s. 6d. Vols. XL and XII. Select Specimens of the Theatre of the Hindus. From the original Sanskrit. Third Edition. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 21s. WRIGHT, W.—The B o o k of K a l i l a h a n d D i m n a h . Translated from Arabic into Syriac. Demy 8vo, 21s. 6S A List of TRUBNER'S ORIENTAL SERIES. E s s a y s o n t h e S a c r e d L a n g u a g e , "Writings, a n d R e l i g i o n of t h e P a r s i s . By MARTIN HAUG, Ph.D. Third Edition, Edited and Enlarged by E. W. WEST. I 6 J . T e x t s f r o m t h e B u d d h i s t C a n o n , commonly known as Dhammapada. Translated from the Chinese by S. BEAL. JS. 6d. T h e H i s t o r y of I n d i a n L i t e r a t u r e . By ALBRECHT WEBER. Translated from the German by J. MANN and Dr. T. ZACHARIAE. Second Edition, ior. 6d, A S k e t c h of t h e M o d e r n L a n g u a g e s of t h e E a s t I n d i e s . With 2 Language Maps! By ROBERT CUST. p. 6d. T h e B i r t h of t h e W a r - G o d . A Poem. By KALIDASA. Translated from the Sanskrit by RALPH T. H. GRIFFITHS. Second Edition. 5J. A Classical D i c t i o n a r y of H i n d u M y t h o l o g y a n d H i s t o r y , Geography and Literature. By JOHN DOWSON. I 6 J . Metrical Translations from Sanskrit Writers. 14s. By J. MUIR. Modern India and the Indians. Being a Series of Impressions, Notes, and Essays. By Sir MONIER MONIER-WILLIAMS. Fourth Edition. 14?. T h e L i f e o r L e g e n d of G a u d a m a , the Buddha of the Burmese. By the Right Rev. P . BIGANDET. Third Edition. . 2 vols. 21s, M i s c e l l a n e o u s E s s a y s , relating to Indian Subjects. HODGSON. Selections from 2 vols. the Koran. A New Edition. POOLE, By EDWARD WILLIAM LANE. With an Introduction by STANLEY LANE gs. Chinese B u d d h i s m . A Volume of Sketches, Historical and Critical. By J. E D K I N S , D.D. The By B. H t 28*. i&r. G u l i s t a n ; or, R o s e G a r d e n of S h e k h M u s h l i u - ' d D i n S a d i of S h i r a z . Translated from the Atish Kadah, by E. B. EASTWICK, F.R.S. Second Edition, iar. 6d. A T a l m u d i c M i s c e l l a n y ; or, ?One Thousand and One Extracts from the Talmud, the Midrashim, and the Kabbalah. Compiled and Translated by P. J. HERSHON. 14$-. T h e H i s t o r y of K s a r h a d d o n (Son of Sennacherib), King of Assyria, B.C. 681-668. Translated from the Cuneiform Inscriptions in the British Museum. Together with Original Texts. By E. A. BUDGE, IOJ. 6d. Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications. 69 B u d d h i s t Birth-Stories*, or, Jataka Tales. The Oldest Collection of Folk-Lore extant: being the Jatakatthavannana. Edited in the original Pali by V. FAUSBOLL, and translated by T. W. RHYS DAVIDS. Translation. The Classical P o e t r y BERLAIN, Vol. I. I8J. of t h e J a p a n e s e . By BASIL CHAM- js. 6d. L i n g u i s t i c a n d O r i e n t a l E s s a y s . By R. CUST, LL.D. First Series, iar. 6d. ; Second Series, with 6 Maps, 21s. I n d i a n P o e t r y . Containing " T h e Indian Song of Songs," from the Sanskrit of the Gita Govinda of Jayadeva ; Two Books from " The Iliad of India " (Mahabharata); and other Oriental Poems. By Sir EDWIN ARNOLD, K.C.I.E. Third Edition. 7J. 6d. T h e R e l i g i o n s of I n d i a . By A. BARTH. Translated by Rev. J. WOOD. Second Edition. 16s. H i n d u P h i l o s o p h y . The Sankhya Karika of Iswara Krishna, An Exposition of the System of Kapila. By JOHN DAVIES. 6S, A M a n u a l of H i n d u P a n t h e i s m . The Vedantasara. Translated by Major G. A. JACOB. Second Edition. 6s. T h e M e s n e v i (usually iknown as the Mesneviyi Sherif, or Holy Mesnevi) of Mevlana (Our Lord) Jelalu-'d-Din Muhammed, ErRumi. Book the First. Illustrated by a Selection of Characteristic Anecdotes as collected by their Historian Mevlana Shemsu-'d-Dm Ahmed, El Efiaki El Arif I. Translated by J. W. REDHOUSE. £1 is. Eastern Proverbs a n d E m b l e m s illustrating Old T r u t h s . By the Rev. J. LONG. 6S. T h e Q u a t r a i n s of O m a r K h a y y a m . E. H. W H I N F I E L D . A New Translation. By 5*. T h e Q u a t r a i n s of O m a r K h a y y a m . The Persian Text, with an English Verse Translation. By E. H. WHINFIELD. IOJ. 6d. T h e M i n d of M e n c i u s ; or, Political Economy founded upon Moral Philosophy. A Systematic Digest of the Doctrines of the Chinese Philosopher Mencius. The Original Text Classified and Translated by the Rev. E. FABER. Translated from the German, with Additional Notes, by the Rev. A. B. HUTCHINSON. 10s. 6d. Yusuf a n d Zulaika. A Poem by J AMI. Translated from the Persian into English Verse by R. T. H . GRIFFITH. SS. 6d. T s u n i - || G o a m , the Supreme Being of the Khoi-Khoi. PHILUS H A H N . By THEO- js. 6d. A C o m p r e h e n s i v e C o m m e n t a r y t o t h e Q u r a n . With SALE'S Preliminary Discourse, and Additional Notes. By Rev. E. M. WHERRY. Vols. I., II., and I I I . 12s, 6d. each. Vol. IV. los. 6d. A List of 70 Hindu P h i l o s o p h y : T h e B h a g a v a d G i t a ; or, The Sacred Lay. A Sanskrit Philosophical Lay. Translated by JOHN DAVIES. The SS. 6d. S a r v a - D a r s a n a - S a m g r a h a ; or, Review of the Different Systems of Hindu Philosophy. By MADHAVA ACHARYA. Translated by E. B. COWELL and A. E. GOUGH. Tibetan Tales. IOS. 6d. Derived from Indian Sources. Translated from the Tibetan of the Kay-Gyur by F . ANTON VON SCHIEFNER. Done into English from the German by W. R. S. RALSTON. 14^. Linguistic Kssays. By CARL ABEL. gs. T h e I n d i a n K m p i r e : Its History, People, and Products. WILLIAM WILSON H U N T E R , K.C.S.I. H i s t o r y of t h e E g y p t i a n R e l i g i o n . Translated by J. BALLINGAL. By Sir 21s. By Dr. C. P. TIELE, Leiden. JS. 6d. T h e P h i l o s o p h y of t h e U p a n i s h a d s . By A. E. GOUGH. gs. U d a n a v a r g a , A Collection of Verses from the Buddhist Canon. Compiled by DHARMATRATA. Translated from the Tibetan by W. WOODVILLE ROCKHILL. 9*. A H i s t o r y of B u r m a , including Burma Proper, Pegu, Taungu, Tenasserim, and Arakan. From the Earliest Time to the End of the First War with British India. By Lieut.-General Sir ARTHUR P. PHAYRE, C.B. 14*. A S k e t c h of t h e M o d e r n L a n g u a g e s of A f r i c a . Accompanied by a Language Map. By R. N. CUST. 2 vols. With 31 Autotype Portraits. I 8 J . R e l i g i o n i n C h i n a . Containing a Brief Account of the Three Religions of the Chinese. By JOSEPH EDKINS, D.D. Third Edition. *]s. 6d. O u t l i n e s of t h e H i s t o r y of R e l i g i o n t o t h e S p r e a d of t h e U n i v e r s a l R e l i g i o n s . By Prof. C. P. TIELE. Translated from the Dutch by J. ESTLIN CARPENTER. Fourth Edition. js. 6d. Si-Yu-Ki. B u d d h i s t R e c o r d s of t h e W e s t e r n W o r l d . Translated from the Chinese of H I U E N TSAING (A.D. 629). By SAMUEL BEAL. 2 vols. With Map. 24*. T h e L i f e of t h e B u d d h a , a n d t h e E a r l y H i s t o r y of h i s O r d e r . Derived from Tibetan Works in the Bkah-Hgyur and the Bstan-Hgyur. By W. W. ROCKHILL. IOS. 6d. T h e S a n k h y a A p h o r i s m s of K a p i l a . With Illustrative Extracts from the Commentaries. Translated by J. R. BALLANTYNE, LL.D. Third Edition. i6.r. T h e O r d i n a n c e s of M a n u . Translated from the Sanskrit. With an Introduction by the late A. C. BURNELL, C L E . Edited by EDWARD W. HOPKINS. 13s. Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co!s Publications. 71 T h e L i f e a n d W o r k s of A l e x a n d e r C s o m a D e K o r o s between 1819 and 1842. With a Short Notice of all his Works and Essays, from Original Documents. By T. DUKA, M.D. gs. Ancient Proverbs a n d M a x i m s from Burmese Sources; or, The Niti Literature of Burma. By JAMES GRAY. 6S. M a n a v a - I > h a r m a - G a s t r a . The Code of Manu. Original Sanskrit Text, with Critical Notes. By Prof. J. JOLLY, Ph.D. 10s. 6d. M a s n a v i I M a ' n a v i . The Spiritual Couplets of Maulana Jalalu'd-Din Muhammad I Riimi. Translated and Abridged. By E. H. W H I N F I E L D . *]S. 6d. Leaves from m y Chinese Scrap-Book. 7J. 6d. By F . H. BALFOUR. Miscellaneous Papers relating to Indo-China. Reprinted from "Dalrymple's Oriental Repertory," "Asiatick Researches," and the " Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal." 2 vols. 21s. Miscellaneous Essays on Subjects connected w i t h t h e M a l a y P e n i n s u l a a n d t h e I n d i a n A r c h i p e l a g o . From the "Journals" of the Royal Asiatic, Bengal Asiatic, and Royal Geographical Societies ; the " Transactions " and "Journal " of the Asiatic Society of Batavia, and the " Malayan Miscellanies." Edited by R. ROST. Second Series. 2 vols. With 5 Plates and a Map. £1 $s. T h e S a t a k a s of B h a r t r i h a r i . Rev. B. H A L E WORTHAM. Translated from the Sanskrit by the 5^. Alberuni's India. An Account of the Religion of India: its Philosophy, Literature, Geography, Chronology, Astronomy, Customs, Law, and Astrology, about A.D. 1030. By EDWARD SACHAU. 2 vols. 36J, T h e F o l k - T a l e s of K a s h m i r . By the Rev. J. HINTON KNOWLES. M e d i a e v a l R e s e a r c h e s f r o m K a s t e r n A s i a t i c S o u r c e s . Fragments towards the Knowledge of the Geography and History of Central and Western Asia from the Thirteenth to the Seventeenth Century. By E. BRETSCHNEIDER, M.D. 2 vols. With 2 Maps. The 21s. L i f e of H i u e n - T s i a n g . By the Shamans H w u i Li and YEN-TSUNG. With an Account of the Works of I-Tsing. By Prof. SAMUEL BEAL. 10s. Knglish Intercourse w i t h Siam in t h e Seventeenth Century. By J. ANDERSON, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 15^. Bihar Proverbs, By JOHN CHRISTIAN. \Jn preparation. 72 A List of Original S a n s k r i t T e x t s o n t h e Origin a n d H i s t o r y of t h e P e o p l e of I n d i a : Their Religion and Institutions. Collected, Translated, and Illustrated. By J. MUIR, LL.D. Vol. I. Mythical and Legendary Accounts of the Origin of Caste, with an inquiry into its existence in the Vedic Age, Third Edition. 2\s. MILITARY WORKS. BRACKENBURYy Col C. B., R.A. — M i l i t a r y H a n d b o o k s for R e g i m e n t a l Officers. I. M i l i t a r y S k e t c h i n g a n d R e c o n n a i s s a n c e . By Col. F. J. Hutchison and Major H. G. MacGregor. Fifth Edition. With 16 Plates. Small crown 8vo, 4J. II. T h e E l e m e n t s of M o d e r n T a c t i c s P r a c t i c a l l y a p p l i e d to E n g l i s h F o r m a t i o n s . By Lieut.-Col. Wilkinson Shaw. Seventh Edition. With 25 Plates and Maps. Small crown 8vo, gs., III. F i e l d Artillery. Its Equipment, Organization and Tactics. By Lieut.-Col. Sisson C. Pratt, R.A. Fourth Edition. Small crown 8vo, 6s. IV. T h e E l e m e n t s of M i l i t a r y A d m i n i s t r a t i o n . First Part: Permanent System of Administration. By Major J. W. Buxton. Small crown 8vo, 7,?. 6d. V. M i l i t a r y L a w 5 I t s P r o c e d u r e a n d P r a c t i c e . By Lieut.-Col. Sisson C. Pratt, R.A. Fifth Edition. Revised. Small crown 8vo, 4.J. 6d. VI. C a v a l r y i n M o d e r n W a r . By Major-General F. Chenevix Trench, C.M.G. Small crown 8vo, 6s. VII. F i e l d W o r k s . Their Technical Construction and Tactical Application. By the Editor, Col. C. B. Brackenbury, R.A. Small crown 8vo, in 2 parts, 12s. BROOKE, Major, C. A'.—A S y s t e m of F i e l d T r a i n i n g . Small crown 8vo, cloth limp, 2s. C a m p a i g n of F r e d e r i c k s b u r g , N o v e m b e r — D e c e m b e r , 1 8 6 2 . A Study for Officers of Volunteers. By a Line Officer. With 5 Maps and Plans. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 5*. CLERY, C. Francis, Col—Minor Tactics. With 26 Maps and Plans. Eighth Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, 9*. CQlVflE, LieuU-Col C, -ft—Military Tribunals- Sewed, 2s, 64. Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Go's Publications, 73 VRAUFURD, Capt. H. ^ . — S u g g e s t i o n s for t h e M i l i t a r y T r a i n i n g of a C o m p a n y of I n f a n t r y . Crown 8vo, is. 6d. HAMILTON, Capt.Ian, A.&.C.—The F i g h t i n g of t h e F u t u r e , is. HARRISON, Col, R.—The Officer's M e m o r a n d u m B o o k for Peace and W a r . Fourth Edition, Revised throughout. Oblong 32mo, red basil, with pencil, 3^. 6d. Notes on C a v a l r y Tactics, Organisation, ete. Officer. With Diagrams. Demy 8vo, 12s. By a Cavalry PARR, Col. H. Hallam, C.M.G.—The Dress, Horses, a n d K q u i p m e n t of I n f a n t r y a n d Staff Officers. Crown 8vo, is. F u r t h e r T r a i n i n g a n d E q u i p m e n t of M o u n t e d I n f a n t r y . Crown 8vo, is. PATERSON, Lieut.-Colonel William.—-Notes o n M i l i t a r y S u r v e y i n g a n d R e c o n n a i s s a n c e . Sixth Edition. With 16 Plates'. Demy 8vo, 7^. 6d. SCHAW, Col. H.—The D e f e n c e a n d A t t a c k of P o s i t i o n s a n d L o c a l i t i e s . Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, 3.?. 6d. STONE, Capt. F. Gleadowe, R.A.—Tactical Studies from the F r a n c o - G e r m a n W a r of 1 8 7 0 - 7 1 . With 22 Lithographic Sketches and Maps. Demy 8vo, 10s. 6d. WILKINSON, H. Spenser, Capt. 2.0th Lancashire R. V. — Citizen S o l d i e r s . Essays towards the Improvement of the Volunteer Force. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. EDUCATIONAL. ABEL, Carl, Ph.D.— L i n g u i s t i c E s s a y s . Post 8vo, gs. Slavic a n d Latin. Ilchester Lectures on Comparative Lexicography. Post 8vo, 5-r. ABRAHAMS, L. B.—A M a n u a l of S c r i p t u r e H i s t o r y for U s e i n J e w i s h S c h o o l s a n d F a m i l i e s . With Map and Appendices. Crown 8vo, is. 6d. AHN, F.—A C o n c i s e G r a m m a r of t h e D u t c h L a n g u a g e , with Selections from the best Authors in Prose and Poetry. After Dr. F. Ahn's Method. i2mo, 3*. 6d. P r a c t i c a l G r a m m a r of t h e G e r m a n L a n g u a g e , Crown 8vo, 3J. 6d, A List of 74 AHN, F.—continued. N e w , P r a c t i c a l , a n d E a s y M e t h o d of L e a r n i n g t h e G e r m a n L a n g u a g e . First and Second Courses in i vol, i 2 m o , 3sf. K e y to Ditto. i2mo, &/. M a n u a l of G e r m a n a n d E n g l i s h C o n v e r s a t i o n s , or Vade Mecum for English Travellers. i2mo, is, 6d. N e w , P r a c t i c a l , a n d E a s y M e t h o d of L e a r n i n g t h e F r e n c h L a n g u a g e . First Course and Second Course. i2mo, each is. 6d. The Two Courses in I vol. i2mo, 3*. N e w , P r a c t i c a l , a n d E a s y M e t h o d of L e a r n i n g t h e F r e n c h L a n g u a g e . Third Course, containing a French Reader, with Notes and Vocabulary. i2mo, is. 6d. N e w , P r a c t i c a l , f a n d E a s y M e t h o d of L e a r n i n g t h e I t a l i a n L a n g u a g e . First and Second Courses. i2mo, 3*. 6d. A i m ' s C o u r s e . Latin Grammar for Beginners. Ph.D. i2mo, 3^. By W. I H N E , BARANOWSKI, J. J.—Anglo-Polish L e x i c o n . Fcap. 8vo, 12s. S l o w n i k P o l s k o - A n g i e l s k i . (Polish-English Lexicon.) Fcap. 8vo, 12s. BELLOWS, John.—French a n d E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y for t h e P o c k e t . Containing the French-English and English-French divisions on the same page; conjugating all the verbs; distinguishing the genders by different types ; giving numerous aids to pronunciation; indicating the liaison or non-liaison of terminal consonants ; and translating units of weight, measure, and value by a series of tables. Second Edition. 32mo, roan, 10s. 6d.; morocco tuck, 12s. 6d. T o u s les V e r b e s . Conjugations of all the Verbs in the French and English Languages. 32mo, 6d. BOJESEN, Maria.—A. G u i d e t o t h e B a n i s h L a n g u a g e . De signed for English Students. i2mo, $s. BOLIA, C.—The G e r m a n C a l i g r a p h i s t . Copies for German Handwriting. Oblong 4to, ix. BO WEN, H. C, M.A.Studies i n E n g l i s h . For the use of Modern Schools. Tenth Thousand. Small crown 8vo, u . 6d. E n g l i s h G r a m m a r for B e g i n n e r s . Fcap. 8vo, is. S i m p l e E n g l i s h P o e m s . English Literature for Junior Classes. In four parts. Parts I., II., and III., 6d. each. Part IV., is. Complete, $s, Kegan Paul, Trenchy Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 7$ BRETTE, PH.,and THOMAS, F.—F r e n c h E x a m i n a t i o n P a p e r s set at t h e U n i v e r s i t y of L o n d o n . Arranged and Edited by the Rev. P. H. ERNEST BRETTE, B.D., and FERDINAND THOMAS, B.A. Part I. Matriculation, and the General Examination for Women. Crown 8vo, $s. 6d. F r e n c h E x a m i n a t i o n P a p e r s s e t a t t h e U n i v e r s i t y of L o n d o n . Key to Part I. Edited by the Rev. P. H. E. BRETTE and F. THOMAS. Crown 8vo, $s. F r e n c h E x a m i n a t i o n P a p e r s s e t a t t h e U n i v e r s i t y of London. Edited by the Rev. P. H. ERNEST BRETTE and FERDINAND THOMAS. Part II. Crown 8vo, ys. BUTLER, F.—T h e S p a n i s h T e a c h e r a n d C o l l o q u i a l P h r a s e B o o k . i8mo, half-roan, 2s. 6d. B YRNE, James.—General P r i n c i p l e s of t h e Structure of L a n g u a g e . 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 36^ T h e Origin of Greek, L a t i n , a n d Gothic R o o t s . Demy 8vo, 18 J. CAMERINI, E.— L'Eco I t a l i a n o . A Practical Guide to Italian Conversation. With a Vocabulary. i2mo, 4s. 6d. CONTOPOULOS, N.—A L e x i c o n of M o d e r n G r e e k - E n g l i s h a n d E n g l i s h - M o d e r n Greek. 2 vols. 8vo, 27s. CONWAY, R. Seymour,—Verner's L a w i n I t a l y . An Essay in the History of the Indo-European Sibilants. Demy 8vo, $s. T h e Italic D i a l e c t s . I. The Text of the Inscriptions. II. An Italic Lexicon. Edited and arranged by K. SEYMOUR CONWAY. 8vo. [In preparation. DELBRUCK, B.—Introduction to t h e S t u d y of L a n g u a g e . The History and Methods of Comparative Philology of the IndoEuropean Languages. 8vo, 5^. D'ORSEY, A. J. D.—A P r a c t i c a l G r a m m a r of P o r t u g u e s e a n d E n g l i s h . Adapted to Ollendorff's System. Fourth Edition. i2mo, *]s. Colloquial P o r t u g u e s e ; or, The Words and Phrases of Everyday Life. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, y. 6d. DUSAR, P. Friedrich.—A G r a m m a r of t h e G e r m a n L a n g u a g e . With Exercises. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 4s. td. A G r a m m a t i c a l Course of t h e G e r m a n L a n g u a g e . Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 3*. 6d. E d u c a t i o n L i b r a r y . Edited by Sir PHILIP MAGNUS :— A n I n t r o d u c t i o n to t h e H i s t o r y of E d u c a t i o n a l Theories. By OSCAR 53ROW^IN,G, M.A. Second Edition^ A List of 76 Education Library—continued. Industrial Education. By Sir PHILIP MAGNUS. 6S. Old G r e e k E d u c a t i o n - By the Rev. Prof. MAHAFFY, M.A. Second Edition. 3s. 6d. S c h o o l M a n a g e m e n t . Including a general view of the work of Education, Organization, and Discipline. By JOSEPH LANDON. Seventh Edition. 6s, EGER, Gustav.—Technological Dictionary in the English a n d G e r m a n L a n g u a g e s . Edited by GUSTAV EGER. 2 vols. Royal 8vo, £1 p. ELLIS, Robert.—Sources of t h e E t r u s c a n a n d B a s q u e L a n g u a g e s . Demy 8vo, p. 6d. FRIEDRICH, P . — P r o g r e s s i v e G e r m a n R e a d e r . With Copious Notes to the First Part. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. FRCEMBLING, Friedrich Otto.—Graduated German R e a d e r . A Selection from the most Popular Writers; with a Vocabulary for the First Part. Tenth Edition. i2mo, 3«r. 6d. G r a d u a t e d Exercises for T r a n s l a t i o n into G e r m a n . Consisting of Extracts from the best English Authors; with Idiomatic Notes. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d, Without Notes, 4^. GARLANDA, Federico.—Tlie F o r t u n e s of ' W o r d s . Letters to a Lady. Crown 8vo, $s. T h e P h i l o s o p h y of W o r d s . A Popular Introduction to the Science of Language. Crown 8vo, $s. GELD ART, E. M.—K G u i d e t o M o d e r n G r e e k . Post 8vo, js. 6d. Key, 2s. 6d. GO WAN, Major Walter E.—A. I v a n o f F s R u s s i a n G r a m m a r . (16th Edition.) Translated, enlarged, and arranged for use of Students of the Russian Language. Demy 8vo, 6s. HODGSON, W. B.—The E d u c a t i o n of G i r l s ; a n d t h e E m p l o y m e n t of W o m e n of t h e U p p e r Glasses E d u c a t i o n a l l y c o n s i d e r e d . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 3.?. 6d. KARCHER, Theodore.—Questionnaire F r a n c a i s . Questions on French Grammar, Idiomatic Difficulties, and Military Expressions. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, 4^. 6d.; interleaved with writing-paper, $s. 6d. LANDON, Joseph.—School M a n a g e m e n t \ Including a General View of the Work of Education, Organization, and Discipline. Seventh Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s. LANGE, F. K. W.—Germania. A German Reading-Book Arranged Progressively. Part I. Anthology of German Prose and Poetry, with Vocabulary and Biographical Notes. 8vo, 3s. 6d. Part II. Essays on German History and Institutions, with Notes. 8vo, 3s. 6d. Parts I. and II. together, $s. 6d. Regan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications. Jj LANGE, F. K. W.—continued. G e r m a n G r a m m a r P r a c t i c e . Crown 8vo, is. 6d. C o l l o q u i a l G e r m a n G r a m m a r . Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d. LE-BRUN, Z . — M a t e r i a l s f o r T r a n s l a t i n g f r o m E n g l i s h i n t o F r e n c h . Seventh Edition. Post 8vo, 4s. 6d. L i t t l e F r e n c h R e a d e r ( T h e ) . Extracted from " T h e Modern French Reader." Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. MAGNUS, Sir Philip.— I n d u s t r i a l E d u c a t i o n . Crown 8vo, 6s. MASON, Charlotte M.—Home E d u c a t i o n ; a Course of Lectures to Ladies. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. MILLHOUSE, John.—Pronouncing and Explanatory English a n d I t a l i a n D i c t i o n a r y . 2 vols. 8vo, 12s. M a n u a l of I t a l i a n C o n v e r s a t i o n . i8mo, 2s. M o d e r n F r e n c h R e a d e r ( T h e ) . A Glossary of Idioms, Gallicisms, and other Difficulties contained in the Senior Course of the Modern French Reader. By CHARLES CASSAL. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. M o d e r n F r e n c h R e a d e r ( T h e ) . Prose. Junior Course. Tenth Edition. Edited by C H . CASSAL and THEODORE KARCHER. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d. Senior Course. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 4s. M o d e r n F r e n c h R e a d e r . Senior Course and Glossary combined. 6s. NUGENT.—Improved French and English and English and F r e n c h P o c k e t D i c t i o n a r y , 241110, 3s. OLLENDORFF.—Metodo p a r a a p r e n d e r a L e e r , escribir yhablar el Ingles segun el sistema de Ollendorff. Por RAMON PALENZUELA y JUAN DE LA CARRENO. 8VO, 4s. 6d. Key to ditto. Crown 8vo, 3s. M e t o d o p a r a a p r e n d e r a L e e r , escribir y hablar el Frances, segun el verdadero sistema de Ollendorff. Por TEODORO SIMONN£. Crown 8vo, 6s, Key to ditto. Crown 8vo, 3^. 6d. OTTE, E. C. — D a n o - N o r w e g i a n G r a m m a r . A Manual for Students of Danish based on the Ollendorffian System. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d. Key to above. Crown 8vo, 3-r. PONSARD, ^ . — C h a r l o t t e C o r d a y . A Tragedy. Edited, with English Notes and Notice on Ponsard, by Professor C. CASSAL, LL.D. Third Edition. i2mo, 2s. 6d, L ' H o n n e u r e t l ' A r g e n t . A Comedy. Edited, with English Notes and Memoir of Ponsard, by Professor C. CASSAL, LL.D. Second Edition. i2mo, 3^. 6d. RASK, Erasmus,—Grammar of t h e A n g l o - S a x o n T o n g u e , from the Danish of ERASMUS RASK. Third Edition. Post 8vo, $s. 6d. By BENJAMIN THORPE. 78 A List of RIOLA, Henry.--How to L e a r n R u s s i a n . A Manual for Students, based upon the Ollendorffian System. With Preface by W. R. S. RALSTON. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, I2J. Key to the above. Crown 8vo, 5J. A Graduated R u s s i a n R e a d e r . With a Vocabulary. Crown 8vo, IOJ. 6d. ROCHE, A.—A F r e n c h G r a m m a r . Adopted for the Public Schools by the Imperial Council of Public Instruction. Crown 8vo, 3^. Prose a n d P o e t r y . Select Pieces from the best English Authors, for Reading, Composition, and Translation. Second Edition. Fcap. 8vo, 2J. 6d. ROSING, £ . — E n g l i s h - D a n i s h D i c t i o n a r y . Crown 8vo, 8x. 6d. SA YCE, A. H.—An A s s y r i a n G r a m m a r for Comparative Purposes. Crown 8vo, 7-r. bd. T h e P r i n c i p l e s of C o m p a r a t i v e P h i l o l o g y . Third Edition. Crown 8vo, lay. 6d. SINCLAIR, F.—A G e r m a n V o c a b u l a r y . Crown 8vot 2s. SMITH, M., and HORNEMAN, #".-—Norwegian With a Glossary for Tourists. Post 8vo, 2s. Grammar. THOMPSON, A. ^.-—Dialogues, R u s s i a n a n d E n g l i s h . Crown 8vo, 5J*. TOSCANI, Giovanni.--l\ali2L'a C o n v e r s a t i o n a l Course. Fourth Edition. i2mo, 5